Turbo CAD

The Breakthrough CAD Software
Are you a new'generation CAD user or potential user??

You're looking far software thal wl let you work at
TurboSpeed, from the time you open the package, to
the final professional drawing.
TurboCAD Is For You.

It is a remarkable 2-Dimensional high-perfonnance CAD
package. You'll enjoy ali the benefits of CAD. lt will
open new creative and design horizons, and improve your
professionalism and efficiency. What TurboCAD does
best is give you speed, power and ease-of-use, without
the risk of paying too high a price. TurboCAD is the
CAD software you' ve been waiting for .
TurboCAD Makes Drawing Easy.

Launch yourself into action quickly with TurboCAD's
user friendly design . Handy pull-down menus guide you
easily through complex functions. Context-sensitive
HELP is only a keystroke away . An on-line tutorial and
a comprehensive manual help you while you are learning.
Draw lines, ares, polygons, ellipses . fillets, squares and
rectangles with ease. Once an object is drawn you can
move, mirror, rotate or scale it to your specifications.
Use the grid and 18 snap modesto give you the precision
you need. Zoom and pan around your drawing to give it
that extra detail.
{$RJ2JS"
drawing with speed. Use linear, array or radial

options for copying. Experience the power of .u
! ti
automatic dimensioning and hatching.
n4'"f /.l--t;i
TurboCAD Gives You Flexibility.

TurboCAD works efficiently as an isolated
system, or smoothly with other specialized
CAD systems. DXF, ASCII and HPGL interfaces ensure compatibility with other micro,
mainframe and Desktop Publishing systems.
Powerful functions such as a complete Macro
and language, integrated scientific calculator
and easy Symbol library creation open up your
creative horizons. Attach attributes to your
sym~ls, and extracta Bill of Materials. TurboCAD will even generate the program code for
any drawing in BASICA or TurboPascal.
:#-'Lg L
88~~
1===-
-( -
~~~
TurboCAD Is For:
TurboCAD makes learning easy with Context
Sensitive HELP only a keystroke away.
Designers
Students
Engineers
Artists
Drafters
. Architects
Contractors
Managers
. . . Anyone who needs to draw 1
"TurboCAD easily outclasses other similarly priced
CAD software." - Online Today
"Best pricelpeiformonce of any CAD fHJCkage

/'ve seen." - Computer Shopper
TurboCAD lncludes:
Unlike other CAD packages, TurboCAD uses

Pull-Down menus to guide you effortlessly
through complex commands.
TurboCAD Gives You Power.

Someone with CAD experience will really appreciate
the power and speed of TurboCAD. Define an are in
7 ways. Feel the flexibility of 128 laycrs, 100 line and
arrow types. 256 line thicknesses, 16 colors. different
text fonts , cursors and grids. Use rubberbanding, orthogonal and windowing fnctions to create and edil your
Q]
Q]
Q]
Q]
Q]
Q]
Context Sensitive HELP

Pull Down Menus
Hatching. filleting . snaps and grids
Automatic Dimensioning
Full plotting capabilities
DXF. HPGL and ASCII file formats
JO-DaJ Mony Bacl Guaran/,.
Not Copy Prornted
System Requiffillellls: IBM compatible. 256K. 2 floppy di, ks
or hard drive. graphic!i card. Epson or IBM comparible prinrer
TurboC AD 1s a rcg1stercd tradcmarlc of Pink Soft lntemauonal

Copyri@:hl Pink Soft lntemational All nght\ re\erved
IBM POXT1AT. IBM PS12 "a trademark of
lntemational Busines\ Machines Corp
Pubhshed byo
IMSI, 1938 Fourth Str~t. San Rafad, CA 9490!
(415 14.14 710!
l1~\
Ll
~,,.~
Chapter 1 - Getting Started

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
l. 7
1.8
1.9
Introduction
What's New
Package Contents
Hardware Requirements
Conventions Used In This Manual
Protecting Your Program Disks
Starting TurboCAD . . . . . . .
The TurboCAD Drawing Screen
Gelting Out Of Trouble . . . . .
Chapter 2- The TurboCAD Tutorial
,',_.:..
(~~
-~
.-- ~...
-
.~:
""'"~.
.......
-.
..
~~\,.;:
~A
.....
...
>
<".,,;
. . .
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
lntroduclion
Manual Drafting Versus Cad
Memory Storage
Screen Resolution
Once Around The TurboCAD Keyboard
Starting TurboCAD
Entities, Shapes And Drawings
Sorne Practica! Advice
Exercise l - Discovering TurboCAD
Exercise 2 - Ice Cream Cad
Exercise 3 - A Simple Electrical Circuit
Exercise 4 - Hatching And Dimensioning
Exercise 5 - Making Connections
Exercise 6 - Layers
Exercise 7 - Zooming Around A Drawing
Conclusion
... 1
.1
.1
.l
.l
.1
.1
.1
.l
.l
1
3
5
6
7
8
9
13
16
... 2
.2
.2
.2
.2
.2
- 1
- 4
.2
.2
.2
.2
.2
.2
- 6
- 7
- 8
14
20
22
27
35
52
. 2 - 58
. 2 - 65
. 2 - 81
. 2 - 83
. 2 - 86
Table ot Contents 1
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 3 - Command Summary

3.1
3 .2
3.3
3 .4
3 .5
Funetion Keys . . . .
Main Menu . . .. . .
Point Definition Me nu
Erase Menu . . . . . .
Window Change Menu
.... 3
.3
. .3
.. 3
. .3
.. 3
:. .
Chapter 4 - Command Keys
.4 - 3
.4 - 4
. .4 - 6
. .4 - 7
. . 4 - 10
. . 4 - 11
.. 5
Chapter 5 - The Help Facility

Chapter 6 - Setup . . . . . . . .
.6
6. 1 lntroduetion . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Environment Pulldown Menu
6.3 Layers Pulldown Menu . . .
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
Configuration Pulldown Menu

Text Pulldown Menu . .. . .
Dimensions Pulldown M e nu .
Other Entities Pulldown Menu
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
.....
Plot Pulldown Menu . . . .

Graphies Print Pulldown Menu
Read Pulldown Menu
Write Pulldown Menu
Files Pulldown Menu
1
4
10
12
17
21
28
.... 7
.7
.. 7
.. 7
.. 7
. .7
Chapter 8 - The Calculator
.....
Chapter 9 - Redrawing The Se re en
. 12
3
9
16
20
22
.. . . . . .
.... .
Chapter 13 - The Grid . . .

Chapter 14
Pan
..... .
Chapter 15 The TurboCAD Menus

Chapter 16 - The Are Command
16. l
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
16.7
Are - Aretan ..
Are - Centre&pt
Are - Double Pt
Are - Fi llet . . .
Are - Line Tan .
Are - Radeentre
Are - Triple Pt .
Chapter 17 - The Change Command

17 . 1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
17 .6
17.7
.9
. 11
Chapter 11 - Move
12.l Linear Copy
12.2 Array Copy
12.3 Radial Copy
.. 8
. 10
Chapter 10 - Windows
Chapter 12 - Copy
.4 - 1
.4 - 2
Butt o ns
C ursor K eys
Esca p e - <Ese>
C ontrol - <Ctrl>
C ursor Swap - <Spacebar>
Insert - <lns>
4.7 Erase Key - <Del>
4.8 Zoom Key s . . . .
Chapter 7 - Transfer Utilities
2
3
4
5
6
.... 4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4 .6
6.4
6 .5
6 .6
6 .7
Change - Are - Anglesrad

Change - Are - Flip . . .
Change - Are - Penlayer
Change - Are - Rad Trim
Change - Are - Split . . .
Change - Are - Trimtopt
Change - Dimension . . .
. . . . 12 - 2
. 12 - 5
.. . . . . 12 - 8
. 13
. 14
. 15
. 16
.. 16 - l
. . . . 16 - 3
. . 16 - 5
.. 16 - 6
. . 16 - 8
. .16 - 10
. . . . . . 16 - 11
. . . 17
. 17 - 1
. 17 - 3
. 17
. 17
. 17
. 17
. 17
7
9
11
13
Table of Contents 3
rabie of Contents 2
Ta ble of Contents
Table ot Contents
17.8 Change - Batch . . . . .

l 7. 9 Cha nge - Line - Break
l 7 .1 O Change - Line - Length
17.11 Change - Line - Meet 21ns
17. 12 Change - Line - Penlayer
17.13 Change - Line - Split .. .
17. 14 Change - Line - Trimtopt .
17.15 Change - Line - Trim Line
17.16 Change - Text .. . . . . . .
Chaptcr 18 - Dimcnsion Commands

18.1
18.2
l 8. 3
18.4
l 8.5
18.6
Dimensions In General
Dimension - Arrow ..
Dimension - Horizontl
Dimension - Parallel
Dimension - Radiu s
Dimension - Vertical
Chaptcr 19 - Fancyline Command

19. l
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.6
19. 7
19.8
Fancyline
Fancyline
Fancyline
Fancyline
Fancyline
Fancyline
Fa ncy 1i ne
Fancyline
Arc pttan
Dropline
Ellipse .
Line2arcs
Parallel
Polygon .
Rectangle
Tangen!
. .. 17 - 16
. .. 17-17
. . . 17 - 19
. . . 17 - 21
. . . . 17 - 23
. .. 17 - 25
. . . 17 - 26
. 17 - 28
. . . 17 - 30
. . . . 18
.. .. 18
. .18
.. 18
.. 18
. . 18
. . .. 18
1
2
3
4
. . . . 19
.. . 19
.. . 19
. . . 19
. . . 19
.. 19
. . 19
. 19
. . 19
Chapter 20 - The Hatch Command
. 20
Chapter 21 - The Line Command .
. 21
Table of Contents 4
1
3
5
7
8
10
11
12
Chapter 22 - The Measure Command

22. 1
22.2
22.3
2 2.4
22.5
Are
Line
'u tline
Point
Twopoints
. . . 22
. 22
. 22
. 22
. 22
. 22
Chapter 23 - The Point Command
. 23
Chapter 24 - The Sketch Command
. 24
Chapter 25 - The Text Command
. 25
Chapter 26 - The Quit Command
. 26
Chapter 27 - Point Definition Menu
. 27
27.1 Screenpos
27.2 Nearpoint
2 7.3 Coordsabs
27 .4 Relative .
27.5 Polar . . .
27.6 Midpt L in
27.7 Endpt Are
2 7.8 Are Angle
27.9 On Are Pt
2 7.10 Line Pt
2 7.11 Hor & Rad
2 7.12 Ver & Rad
27.13 X & Angle
27.14 Y & Angle
27.16 lntersect
2 7.17 Digitiser . .
1
2
3
5
6
.27 - 3
. 27 - 4
. 27 - 5
. 27 - 6
. 27 - 7
. 27 - 8
. 27 - 9
. 27 - 1o
. 27 - 11
. 27 - 12
. 2 7 - 13
. 27 - 14
. 2 7 - 15
. 27 - 16
. 27 - 17
. 27 - 20
Ta ble of Contents 5
Table of Contents
Chapter 28 - Advanced Topics

28. l
28.2
28.3
28.4
lnstallation
Mouse ..
Plotters
Digitizers
Appendix - B .
.............
8.1 Turbocad Technical Specifications

8.2 Turbocad Error Messages . . . . .
Appendix - C
C. l
. 28
. 28
. 28
. 28
: : ,: , , , :':':' ,, , ,,,: ,,,. , , , :':': ,, ,., , ., ,. , , , ., , , , ,

-
,,,,,,,
,,,,,:, "" ':''''
:::::::
::::::
5
11
15
1.1 INTRODUCTION
::::::
............
Problem Solving and Common Questions
.A
.A
.A
.A
:::::::::
:::;::
'""' , , , ,,,,
.,, , ,,, ,, ,
, , , , ::}'/\'' :':\':\: ,,, , \\ , '"'"' {:. :::>('.: '' 1
:}''
''"' ">l :?A :'];
::::;:
~::::
:::::::
1':\
1 { 1-.~ FJi >:' :'.::.>:...\>.,
::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ::::::: :::::;;:::::::: :::::::::::::: ::::::: ;:::.:::::::. :::::::::::::
.,.,.,,.
.,..
TM
. . . . . . . ... A
Appendix - A
A. l
A.2
A.3
A.4
. . . . 28
Interface Files . . . . . . . .
Turbocad's Macro's
Interfacing To Other Software
Bill Of Materials . . . . . . . .
1
8
9
23
. .. B
.B - 1
.B - 2
... e
... e - 1
INTERNAT!Ol''. AL MICROCOMPUTER SOFTWARE INC. congratulates you on your decision to purchase TurboCAD. Enjoy using
it as a stand alone design tool for drawings, graphics and technical
specifkations, or lr. conjunction with other software packages.
This manual has been written to serve asan introduction to Computer
Aided Design (CAD) as well as to provide a det?.iled technical reference for use by the experienced user. The structural simplicity of
TurboCAD enables it to be operated by persons with varying degrees
of cornputing knowledge, while experienced users can choose from
a formidable number of drawing tools.
This is what separates TurboCAD from the common drawing
pl)grarns. IMSI is dedicated to building user fricnd ly software and
TurboCAD was carefully designed to suit your needs. Extensive
reference was made to draftsmen and experienced techniciaus to
ensure its suitability in tcrms of generally acceptcd dcsign practices .
Experienced computer users may skip most of the scctions on disk
preparation, backups, -:te. and will probably be able to install the
system simr~Y l.: running the INSTALL program and answering the
prompts. The novice user, however, is advised to read through a li
these sections.
The aim of th' tutora! section is twofold. It is dcsigned to tcach
the novice user how to set about using a CAD package as wcll as
showing the advanced user how TurboCAD has implcmented com-
Table of Contents 6
1.1 INTRODUCTION
Page 1 - 1
Chapter 1
Getting Started
mon CAD conccpts. The cxpericnced CAD nser may find it sufficienl
lo simply refer lo lhe COMMAND reference seclion called
TurboCAD INPUTS.
Final ly, i l is imporlanl lhal yo u fill out and return lhe IMSI
REGISTRATION CARO so lhal we can kcep you informed of
TurboCAD dcvelopmcnls. This publicalion may nol be reproduced
in any form, by any melhod for any purpose without lhe prior written
consenl of IMSI.
1.2 WHAT'S NEW

The latest release of TurboCAD includes the following enhancements:
l. Virtual Storage
In previous releases thc size of drawing thal could be drawn using
TurboCAD was reslricted by the amounl of free memory availablc
in your compuler. TurboCAD now uses your hard disk or RA M
disk for temporary slorage space. The drawing size is now limited
by the amount of space that you have on your hard disk.
The MEM value in the information box on thc bollom righl of the
screen will flash between <Dsk> and MEM when the virtual slorage
system is accessing thc disk. The MEM value is an indication of
how much memory space is still available to load more lext fonts.
NOTE:
TurboCAD will give the fatal error message "Error expanding tcmporary file, Save drawing (Y/N)" If you run out of disk space while
working. If you do not wish to lose the work that you have done
on the drawing, you should reply <Y> to the above question and
then type in tbe name of a drive that has space on it followed by
the drawing name e.g. if you have stuck an empty formatlcd floppy
disk in the A : drive you could type in A:NAME <RETURN>. After
TurboCAD has saved the drawing to this other drive, you can tidy
up your hard disk so that you have more free space and may continue
your work session.
NOTE:
During an extended period of editing with TurboCAD, especially
after many entities have been erased, the virtual storagc syslem will
become clutlered with wasled spacc. This affecls specd. Thc key
combinalion Alt-1 can be used to recover lhis wasted space. Saving
lhe drawing, quitting and then reloading it will bave the same cffect.
2. SPEED
TurboCAD is approximalely 3 to 5 times faster than previous
releases depending on the action being pcrformed. This is most
noticeable in PANS and ZOOMS wherc speed increases as you
progressively zoom in further.
Page 1 - 2
1.1 INTRODUCT/ON
1.2 WHA T'S NEW
Page 1 - 3
Getting Started
Chapter 1
3. VGA SUPPORT
TurboCAD now supports VGA 3. DRAWING ORDER PRESERVED
TurboCAD no longer shuffles the drawing order, but always redraws
in the sequence in which you added things to the drawing.
4. l<'ONTS
TurboCAD now has eight fonts (COMPLEX, ITALIC, NORMAL,
OLDENG, SCRIPT, SIMPLEX, TCHPGL, TXT).
5. LASER AND 24 PIN PRINTER SUPPORT
6.PANNING
The panning command has been improved in the folowing manner:
Once the <FlO> key has been pressed, you may now use your mouse
or arrow keys to move the rectangular cursor to the area to which
you wish to pan. When you are satisfied with the position of the
rectangular cursor, pres <RETURN>.
1.3 PACKAGE CONTENTS

13efore you s tart working wilh TurboCAD , Lake a minute to look
over Lhe contents of this package. Provided that no changes have
been made (see READ.ME notes overlcaf ), your package should
contain :
l. Diskettes:
One floppy disk that conta in the TurboCAD program and support
programs and files .
Systcm Disk - slarts TurboCAD and contains the following:

DISK.ID
lNSTALL.EXE
TCUNZIP.EXE
Symbols Disk - contains 13asic Home Design, Home and OITice
Fumishings and 13usiness F1owcharting symbols.
7. USING OLD VERSION DRAWINGS

TurboCAD version 1.52 could load drawing drawn in ali versions
prior to it. The current release will only read drawings from 1.52
onward.
8. BILL OF MATERIALS
The bill of materials program previously supplied in dBase source
form is now also supplied in executable form.
9. ABSOLUTE CURSOR STEPS
This allows macros to be compatible from screen to screen.
lNSTALL.BAT
13HD.EXE
HOD.EXE
13FLOW.EXE
DISK.ID
2. TurboCAD program manual

3. TurboCAD Symbols manual
4. IMSI registration card

Therc may also be a file called REA D.ME on Lhe TurboCAD program d isk. 11lis will be used for lasl minute informatio n not included in the manual. To read this file, inserl the disk into drivc
A: and type the following when prom pted by the DOS prompt.
10. VGA SUPPORT
A> TYl'E READ.ME <RETURN>

This will cause Lhe READ .ME file to be d isplaycd on Lhe screen .
To stop the screcn display scrolling up press <Ctrl-S> to pause the
scrcen scrolling and an y key to resu me.
Page 1- 4
1.2 WHA
rs NEW
1.3 PACKAGE CONTENTS
Page 1 - 5
Getting Started
Chapter 1
1.5 CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
1.4 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
This manual uses bo ld face characters enclosed in angular brackets

to denote the keys on the keyboard as follcws:
TurboCAD requires the following mnimum configuration:

- An Il3M PC/XT/AT or 100% compatible micro compuler
- PC-DOS or MS-DOS operat ing systems (Version 2.0 or greater)
The fu nction keys down the lefl hand side or along the top o f thc
keyboard:
- Al least 512K of memory
<Fl> <F2> <F3> <F4> <FS> <F6> <F7> <F8> <F9> <F lO>
- A hard drive with a minimu m of one megabyte of space free
The kcys o n the cursor kcypad al thc ri ght h<ind sidc:
- A graphics monitor (Hcrcules, CGA, EGA, VGA, Olivetti or 100%

compatible)
<Home> <Up> <l'gUp> <Left > <Ri gh l> <End> <llow n> <l'g l>n>
T he numeri c kcys:
While the above is a mni mu m configuration, lhcre are man y

hardwa re add-ons that a re desirable in runn ing an effic ient
TurboCAD system (refer to APPENDIX A - INSTALLATION for
device dctails).
Input Device
Allhough TurboCAD can operate with only a standard keyboard as
an input device, it can also take full advantage o f other input devices
which are specifically designed for pointing (e.g. mouse) or for
precise positioning of the cursor on the screen (e.g. digitizers). As
these devices are not standard, picase ensure that the device you
wish to use is in fact supported by TurboCAD.
<1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> <7> <8> <9> <0>
Other keys:
<Ese> <C lrl> <SpaceHar> <HETU R N> <BackSpace> <Nurn
Lock> <+> <-> <lns> <Del>
T he follow ing is an cxample o f more than onc key presscd simul taneously:
<Clrl-S> mcans ho ld the <C lrl> key down firs t and then prcss thc
<S> kcy.
Printer
TurboCAD will send oulput in a raster form to a number of printers.
Generally, the resolution of a printer will be better than that of the
screen as TurboCAD takes advantage of the resolution of each output
device. Note that although your printer may not be specifically
listed, you should check with your dealer to see whether it can be
used as it may be compatible with one of those listed.
Plotter
While a printcr will give you a resolution better than your
the only way to get really high quality output is to use a
TurboCAD supports a wide range of these. Plotters vary in
and numbcr of pens. lf you are considering purchasing a
discuss your rcquirements with your dealer and he will be
advise you on the bcst for your nceds.
Page 1 - 6
screen,
plotter.
quality
plottcr,
able to
1.4 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
1.5 CON VENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
Page 1 - 7
Gettng Started
Chapter 1
1.6 PROTECTING YOUR PROGRAM DISKS

TurboCAD is not copy protected. However, thcre are a number of
ways that a disk can be damagcd. Magnets, pressure, heat and dirt
can ali destroy the information stored on a disk. For your own protection, we suggest that you use the DOS DISKCOPY command to
make copies of your program disks.
1.7 STARTING TurboCAD

If you are running TurboCAD for the first time refcr to APPENDI X
A - INSTALLATION now.
To start TurboCAD, change lo thc direclory which conlains thc
TurboCAD files, for example:
C>CDITC <RETURN>
1. Make sure that your DOS system disk is in the A: drive and that
thc door is properly closed.
Thcn typc:
2. Type DISKCOPY A: B: and prcss <RETURN>.
C>TC <RETURN>
3. Inscrt the disk you want lo copy (thc "source" disk). When you
have done this, close the drive <loor and press <RETURN>. The
drive light comes on for a few moments and the program asks for
the "target" disk (the blank disk).
Refcr lo APPENDIX A - INSTALLATION for instructions

lo INSTALL TurboCAD.
011
how
4. Removc the disk you are copying and replace it with a blank
disk. If you have a twin floppy machine place the blank diskette
in drive B:. Press <RETURN>. Again the drive light comes on as
the copy is made. This step takes slightly longer than stcp 3.
5. Depending on how much memory you have installed in your

machine, you mayor may not be prompted to re-insert the "source"
and "target" disks.
6. Remove your copy and !abe! it immediately.
7. When the program finishes copying the disk, it asks if you want
to make another copy of another disk. If you do, type <Y> and
press <RETURN>. Repeat stcps 3 and 4 for each disk you want
to copy. When you are done copying disks, respond to this message
with <N> <RETURN>.
8. Store your original disks in a safe place.
Page 1-8
1.6 PROTECT/NG YOUR PROGRAM DISKS
Page 1 - 9
Getting Started
Chapter 1
If TurboCAD loads correctly, the following screen will be displayed:
TM
direclory used will be displayed and you need simply press

<RETURN> lo accepl lhis direclory. Type in a valid DOS drive
and sub-direclory specificalion followed by <RETURN> if you wish
lo use anolher direclory.
e.g. Work directory ? B:
or
Work direclory ? C:\DRAWINGS
You can use the <BackSpace> key to correct mistakes and can
press the HELP key <Fl> if you are unsure as to what to do.
Once you have enlered lhe work direclory, TurboCAD will prompl
you for a work drawing. By default the last drawing used will be
displayed and you need simply press <RETURN> lo accepl lhis
drawing. Allernalivcly, lype in a valid DOS filcnamc followcd by
<RETURN> if you wish to use anolher drawing name .
e.g. Work drawing ? DRAWINGl
1f you acccpl lhe lerms of lhe licensc agrecmcnl, prcss lhe

<RETURN> key. This will cause lhe following screen to appear.
Uork dircctory ?
TurboCAD will lhen search the specified sub-direclory for the

specified drawing.
NOTES
b:
1. If lhe sub-direclory is incorrectly specified, TurboCAD will go

back to prompting for a work directory.
2 . If no sub-direclory is specified, TurboCAD will use lhe default
sub-directory. TurboCAD will load the drawing if il exisls. 1f it
<loes not, it will ask whelher you wish to creale the file as well as
requesting lhe paper size and seale.
Create file (Y /N) ? Y
Paper A 4
Scale 1 : l
Men:
2051
CI
He
L 0 P 1
The prompl al lhe top of the screcn indicales lhe direclory from
whcre your drawings will be stored or loaded. By default the lasl
Page 1 - 10
When a new drawing is starled using TurboCAD a scale musl be

selecled. This is the scale of a drawing relative lo a real object e .g.
a scalc of 1: 100 means thal lcm drawn on paper represenls 1OOcm
on lhe real objecl. In addilion, TurboCAD must keep lrack of the
scalc of the screen representalion of a drawing relative lo the actual
drawing size. For examplc, an A4 drawing is 297mm x 210mm bul
Page 1 - 11
Getting Started
Chapter 1
it must be rcprcscntcd on thc scrccn in an arca ???mm x ???mm

dcpcnding 011 thc scrccn uscd . Por cxamplc, in a 1: 1 scalc it is
unlikcly that a 10 cm linc will be displaycd as a 10 cm Ji11c 011 thc
scrcc11, cvcn though it will be storcd i11tcrnally as a 1O cm c11lity.
Unlikc a manual draughti11g cnvironmcnt, sclccting thc papcr sizc
and scalc is not a critica! dccision, as both can casily be changcd
al a latcr slagc (rcfcr lo thc SETUP comma11d kcy <F2> Environmc11l) .
1.8 THE TurboCAD DRAWING SCREEN

Thc layout of thc TurboCAD drawing scrccn is illustratcd in th c
followi11g diagram which displays thc scrcc1 aftcr the Li nc option
from thc main mcnu has bccn chosen:
First point
Def 2pt l lne
ScreenPos
Uork drawing ? DR11UIHG1
TurboCAD Directory of C:'DAVID.

DEMO
GRAPH
BOLT
MICRO
151
Po lntDe f :
ScreenPos
HearPoint
CoordsAbs
Re lati ve
Polar
If you prcss thc HELP kcy < Fl > whc11 prornptcd for a work drawing,
TurboCAD will display a dircclory of ali drawing files found in
lhc work dircctory as follows:
195
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MidPt Lin
EndPI nrc
nrc Ilnglc
On Ore Pt
L ine Pt
llar & Rad
Ver & Rad
)( & Angle
Y & Angle
S Drawing files found.

llATCH
Intersect
Dig itiser
Men: 205 ]
CI
L
He
8 P 1
ll consists of thc following parts:
Men:
205 1
CI
He
L 8 P 1
You can use thc <Left>, <Right>, <Up> and <Down> cursor kcys
or thc <Spaccllar> to highlight any onc drawi11g file name ami
thcn prcss <RETURN> to load thal drawing.
Thc drawing arca

This is lhc largc blank arca wh ich fi lls rnost of thc scrccn. This is
whcrc your drawing will be crcatc<l. It is surroundc<l by a rec tangular
bordcr which scparatcs it from the prompl linc at thc top of th c
scrcen an<l thc mcnu down thc right han<l sidc.
Thc Mcnu
On the right hand sidc of thc scrccn is a list of "commands" from
which you will sclcct whcn drawi ng .
The prompt arca
Thc top linc of thc scrccn is uscd to prompt you for in format ion
whilst drawing as wcll as for displaying informa tio11.
Page 1 - 12
1.8 THE TurboCAD DRAWING SCREEN
Page 1 - 13
Getting Started
Chapter 1
The status area
This is the lillle box in the bollom right of the screen below the
menu. It is used to display the amount of free memory left which
can be used for drawing as well as giving summary information of
the status of various TurboCAD setup options.
Ver & Rad

X & Angle
Y & Angle
Intcrscct
Digitizcr
Thc cursors
TurboCAD has 2 cursors. Prcssing thc <SpaccBar> will cause
TurboCAD to toggle betwccn cursors.
Drawing cursor
In the drawing arca, you will scc a crosshairs cursor made of a
vertical and horizontal linc. This is thc drawing cursor and is uscd
for idcntifying points on the screcn.
CI
Ne
Mcnu cursor
Thc menu cursor consists of a highlight ovcr a mcnu option. This
cursor is uscd for sclccting commands from thc mcnu.
o
Q
R
L O
p
MEM: 205
if prcsent, indicates that thc grid is active

if prescnt, indicates that ORTHO mode is ON
if prescnt, indicates that KwikTcxt mode is cnabled
if prescnt, indicates that rubber banding is cnablcd
indicates the window modc (CI - CLOSED, Op - OPEN)
indicates thc search mode (Ce - CENTRE, Ne - NEAR)
indicates the !ayer to which entitics drawn now
will be assigned (in this case !ayer O)
- indicates the pen number which will be uscd for any
entity drawn at this stage (in this case pen !)
- indication of the amount of memory lcft
Explanation Of Thc lnormation Displaycd

Firsl Point
Dcf 2pt linc
ScrccnPos
195
151
PointDef:
- TurtxiCAD prornpt
- currcntly selccted option
- currcntly sclcctcd point dcfinition modc
- X coordinalc of currcnt cursor positiun
- Y coordinatc of current cursor position
- namc of thc currcntly displayed TurboCAD mcnu
(in this case, thc point dcfinition mcnu)
Thc following are ali thc mcnu oplions:

ScrccnPos
NcarPoint
CoordsAbs
Rclativc
Polar
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Une Pt
Hor & Rad
Page 1 - 14
1.8 THE TurboCAD ORAWING SCREEN
1.8 THE TurboCAD ORA WING SCREEN
Page 1 - 15
Chapter 1
1.9 GETTING OUT OF TROUBLE

If you ever selecl a command by mislake, or change your mind in
Lhe middle of a command, press the <Ese> key lo abort.
Occasionally you mighl have Lo press <Ese> severa! Limes, parLicularly if you have selecled an oplion from a number of successive
menus. You can ALWAYS relum lo lhe main menu by pressing
<Ese> a sufficienl number of times.
If you wish to exit TurboCAD without saving anything, press <Q>

when the main menu is showing.
TurboCAD will ask: "Quit (Y/N) ?" lo verify that you did not invoke
the command by accident. Reply <Y> <RETURN> to stop the drawing session. Reply <N> <RETURN> lo the "Save drawing (Y/N)
?" and "Another drawing (Y/N) ?" prompts. TurboCAD will retum
you to the DOS operaling system. For delailed information on the
QUIT command, refer Lo the command reference section.
2.1 INTRODUCTION
WARNING AND DISCLAIMER
The TurboCAD Tulori al is dcsigned Lo provide general information
about TurboCA D and is provided on an "as-is" basis rclativc to
TurboCAD Vc rsi on 1.8.
The TurboCAD Tu to ri al is not a complete guide Lo TurboC AD . lt
is inlcnded thal il should only introduce thc ncw uscr to sorn e of
TurboCAD's fc aturcs in order that they may quickly lcarn to use
thc product. As a result, thc Tutorial <loes not diminish the uscr 's
nced for constant reference to the TurboCAD manual, in par ticular,
the Commands Section.
THE TURBOCAD TUTORIAL IN PERSPECTIVE

Wclcomc to thc TurboCAD Tutorial. We trust that it will prove to
be a pleasant learning cxperience. It is our intention that Lhis Tutoria l
should gi vc yo u enough bas ic info rm ation about TurboC AD lo
cnable you lo starl drawing immediatcly.
TurboCAD 's price, p erfo rm ance and friendlin ess places it in a
category ali on its own. Il is, quite probably, the easicsl to use o f
ali the many PC CAD packagcs availa ble today. Evcn so, thcre is
a cons iderable lca rnin g curve thal must be cl imbcd bc fo re th e ne wcomer to CAD masters TurboCAD.
Th is does not m ea n lhat our claims of "ease-of-use" an d "uscrfri endl iness" are mere promotional hype. Ralhcr, il is a testamcn t
to lh e fac t lhat TurboCAD includcs an array of sophislicated a1HI
somc li mcs esoleric CAD features. These w ill be besl lcarncd wilh
reg ul ar use of TurboCAD and by stud ying th c Commands Scclion
of thc manual.
Thc TurboCAD Tutorial wi ll gradually introduce you lo th e bas ic
compone n! parts o f TurboCAD . Do not thin k tha t beca use th c
TurboCAD Tutorial is esscntially clemcntary tha t TurboC AD is a
mere drawin g package. Noth ing cerni d be furth cr from thc truth !
TurboCAD is a powerful dra ft ing and dcs ign program tha t is in-
Page 1 - 16
1.9 GETTING OUT OF TROUBLE
2. 1 INTRODUCTION
Page 2 - 1
Chapter2
The TurboCAD Tutora/
creasingly popular with a wide range of profcssional uscrs like enginecrs, architects and managers.
Today, TurboCAD is uscd across a broad spectrum of commerce,
industry and the design professions. TurboCAD is found in applications as diverse as Stock Exchange flow charts to heavy engineering
component design.
Many users of expensive CAD systcms have found that TurboCAD
effects 90% of what their supposedly more sophisticated systems
can do. The real suprise is in discovering how easy TurboCAD is
to use and that it is on many occasions faster than its supposedly
up-market rivals. As a result, TurboCAD is finding increasing acccptance with large design practiccs where it is run in tandem with
other systems.
This Tutorial attempts to bring TurboCAD's ease of use to your
learning experience. Please remember that the Tutorial must nol be
used as a fuli explanation of the features of TurboCAD. Only the
TurboCAD Commands section can do that. Each Command and
Function Key is clearly represented and explained in the Command
Section. You should work through this Tutorial and then use practicc
and constant referral to the Command Section to lcarn ali about
TurboCAD.
DRAWING THE LINE

TurboCAD is a powerful yet cost-effective drawing and design tool
for your IBM PC, XT, AT or 100% compatible. TurboCAD runs
faultlessly on the new IBM Personal System/2 series.
TurboCAD runs on almost ali compatible PCs. IMSI cannot guarantee that TurboCAD will perform reliably on these PCs. If you own
a low-cost clone and experience inexplicable problems not resolvable by reference to the manual, we suggest that you have a compatibility problem. Please refer your enquiries to your hardware
supplier's support division.
2 . This Tutorial assumes that you have a graphics printer attached

lo your computer, and that you are not using a pointing dcvice. lf
you are using a Digitizer, or a Mouse, please read the appropriate
installation instructions or appendix. TurboCAD supports the lMSI
Mouse, Microsoft Mouse, or compatibles. See the Command Section.
For information on how to use a prinler and plotter with TurboCAD,
please refer to the Commands Section. This Tutorial is only concerned with basic drawing skills; it does not cover printi ng or plotting.
COMMAND CONVENTIONS
The following conventions are used in this Tutorial to indicatc kcy
actions. Please familiarize yourself wi th them.
COMMAND
WHATYOUDO
<Fl>
Press the Function Key marked "Fl".
<Ese>
Press the "Ese", Escape key on top of the kcyboard.
<RETURN>
Press the "Enter" key on the right of the keyboard.
<Ctrl-A>
Hold down the key marked "Ctrl" and press "A".

NOTE: You do NOT key in the hyphen!
<+>
Press the Grey Plus key.
<A>
Press the key marked "A".
<S> <RETURN>
Press the key marked "S" followed by "Enter".
When you are required to enter a value in the Prompt Area, the
instructions read:
<-45> <RETURN>
Enter lhe value "-45" in the Prompt Area

followed by "Enter".
<.3> <RETURN>
Enter the value ".3" in the Prompt Area

followed by "Enter".
<right><left>
Press the right and left arrow keys.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN

l. Make sure that you have followed the inslallation instructions
fully. This Tutorial requires theprogram be configured with the
standard defaults, particularly A4: 1: 1 . lf you are uncertain about
the settings, type SETUP from your TurboCAD directory.
Page2-2
2. 1 INTRODUCTION
2. 1 INTRODUCTION
Page2-3
Chapter 2
2.2 MANUAL DRAFflNG VERSUS CAD

Manual drafling has bccome sccond naturc to most draftsmen - they
needn"t specifically think about what they are going to do ncxt much like riding a bicycle. When you start using CAD, it is much
like learning to drive a car - you have to Jearn a new set of controls.
Once the new actions come naturally, however, you can drive much
faster and further with a car than a bicycle.
TurboCAD becomes your set of drawing instruments - but remember,
as powerful as TurboCAD is, it cannot read your mind any more
than a pcncil or ruler can. When you draw lines on a drawing board,
you line up two points with a ruler and draw the line betwcen them.
Absolute accuracy is not possible because of the pencil thickness,
how finely you can rnove your hand, etc.
crease that can be achieved with CAD. Creating drawings with slight
variations using CAD is so much more efficient than manual drafling
that it would be unfair to try and compare.
TurboCAD caters for the building up of shapc libraries for repeatcd
use of commonly used drawing entitics - an architect nced only
draw a ccrtain type of window once, an elcctronic engineer a single
circuit elemcnt. Thcse cntities can thcn be duplicated at will by the
computer whenevcr needed.
There are also ali sorts of special cffects which are very
and sometimcs impossible to achieve manually. Effccts
layering (displaying or not displaying portions of a drawing
automatcd dimcnsioning and measuring of perimetcrs and
difftcult
such as
at will),
arcas.
With TurboCAD, ali points are "written down" inside the computer's
memory. You "write down" these points by positioning your computer cursor on the screen and an absolutely accurate system can
result. Not ali CAD systems can achieve this, but with TurboCAD
you can use the cursor to indicate a point near to the exact position
and TurboCAD will "snap" to the exact position desired - giving
absolute accuracy. Now lines can intersect exactly and not overlap
or miss when viewed al high magnification.
lnstead of using a compass to draw circles, you use one of
TurboCAD's commands to generate circles. You don't have to bothcr
yourself with setting your compass to the right radios, simply tell
TurboCAD to do it. Measuring to deadly accuracy is a cinch. No
need to use a pair of dividers with a pockmarked drawing rule,
simply let TurboCAD use the power of your computer to calculatc
measurements to accuracics you cannot even perceive with the naked
eye. TurboCAD will calculate arcas, lengths, and perimctcrs.
Those hours of stcncilling text fade into insignificance - just type
in the required tcxt, then select size, font, pen color, position, cte.
Correcting mistakes ncver rcquires starting a drawing again from
scratch - just let TurboCAD erase, change or move entities.
Manual drafting does not lend itself to intensivc utilization of entities (bits of drawings) already creatcd. An advantage of CAD is
that once drawn, entities can be manipulated in many ways (e.g.
magnified, reduced, rotated, mirrored, strclched, extended, split).
This is one of the major reasons for the dramatic productivity in-
Page2-4
2.2 MANUAL DRAFTING VERSUS CAD
2.2 MANUAL DRAFTING VERSUS CAD
Page2-5
Chapter2
2.3 MEMORY STORAGE
2.4 SCREEN RESOLUTION
A computer uses two types of memory - RAM and disk storage.

TurboCAD creates your drawings in RAM (Random Access
Memory). Coupled with slick programming, TurboCAD's use of
RAM memory is the reason for its faster than average speed.
There are a few minor disadvantages associated with RAM. Most
importantly, RAM is volatile - if the power fails, or if you switch
your PC off, you lose whatever was in memory. By regularly saving
your drawings to disk, you can prepare for the inevitable assault
of the Data Loss Monster.
RAM only allows one drawing in memory al any one time. As the
loading and saving times of simple drawings are relatively short,
this is quite acceptable. In fact it is TurboCAD's use of RAM which
gives you the speed you need for CAD. On the Plus Side, RAM is
very fast.
NOTE: Always remember to save your drawings at regular intervals.
RAM is also used to store that part of the TurboCAD program which
is being executed. TurboCAD has to be read from disk each time
the machine is switched on. lt is too large to fit into the RAM of
the machine as a whole. TurboCAD uses a method called Overlaying
to read sections of the program from disk when they are needed.
As a result the developers of TurboCAD require that you use a hard
disk.
Page2-6
2.3 MEMORY STORAGE
Resolution refers to the amount of detail that can be represented

on a device - a screen, printer or plotter. This vaies between devices.
The higher the device's resolution, the smoother will be your display.
Low resolution <loes not necessarily imply that your drawings have
to be inaccurate. The physical resolution of each device only affects
the work done on that device. If you output the drawing to a device
which has improved resolution, TurboCAD will utilize its greater
resolution capabilities.
One difference between the screen and paper images is that the
quality of the printed or plotted output will be infinitely more exact
than a screen representation. This is beca use the screen "s resolution
places a limit on what can be achieved. The most obvious examplc
is a circle. On screen it appears oval and flat-sided. Printed, it is
near perfect.
Quirks like these and others, which are common to ali CAD packages, will soon be recognized by you and ignored. As you become
familiar with TurboCAD, you will find that its built-in features will
quickly make your manual drafting skills redundan!. Technology
has it ali and more !
2.4 SCREEN RESOLUTION
Page2- 7

Chapter2
2.5 ONCE AROUND THE TURBOCAD KEYBOARD

The IBM PC range, AT and now the Personal System/2 keyboards
are ali different. Compatible PCs have diffcrcnt keyboards again.
As a result, we provide no keyboard tcmplate but offer this overview
of the generalized IBM keyboard instead.
TBE ALPBANUMERIC KEYS

Most software packages rely extensively on the alphanumeric keys
for their basic data entry. TurboCAD, while using these keys to
capture numeric data and select Menu options, makes greater use
of the cursor control keys on the right of the keyboard. If you plan
to use a Mouse with TurboCAD, and we suggest that you do, you
will ha ve even lcss cause to use the alphanumeric keys.
TurboCAD uses the keyboard's alphabet keys to select Main Menu
options, for typing in commands in conjunction with the <Ctrl>
and <Alt> keys, and when inserting text into drawings. Similarly,
the numeric keys in the top row of the keyboard are used to provide
settings in the form of angles, radii, distances, etc., to change settings in the Pull Down Window Menus and to change the cursor
step increment . <l> is small, <2> to <8> are intermediate speeds.
<9> is large.
TBE CURSOR CONTROL KEYS

The cursor is moved around the screen with the numeric keypad
on the right hand side of your keyboard. The Arrow Keys move
the cursor vertically - Up and Down - and horizontally - Right and
Left. The <Pg Up>, <Pg Dn>, <End>, <Home> keys move the
cursor diagonally across the screen. <Numlock> must be OFF.
TBE TURBOCAD FUNCTION KEYS

Situated on the left hand side of IBM and most compatible keyboards
are the Function Keys. A full explanation of the TurboCAD Function
Keys appears in the Command Section. These Function Keys ali
provide specific options.
With the exception of the <Fl> Help Function Key and <F4> Calculator, they can only be accessed from the Main Menu.
Page2-8
<Fl>-HELP
This introduces TurboCAD's context-sensitive Help Menu and
causes a narrow Help window to appear in the lower half of the
screen. Generally, it can be used for Help lnstruction purposes al
any time and will relate to the mode you are u:-.ing. It is no substitute
for the Command Section of the manual.
To exit the Help Menu, press <Ese>.
<F2>-SETUP
This acccsses the Pull Down Menu Windows. They are: Environ ment, Laycrs, Configuration, Text, Dimensions and Other Entitics .
Use the Arrow Keys to highlight a Menu and press <RETURN >
or press the first letter of the dcsired Mcnu Window.
Use the Down Arrow key to highlight the system paramcter you
want and change it by typing in either the new value and prcssing
<RETURN>, or pressing <RETURN> to change the default from
On to Off, Closed to Open, and A4 to AO, etc. The <Fl> Help
facility can be used with the Pull Down Menus.
To exit the SetUp Menu, press <Ese>.
<F3> - TRANSFER
The Transfer Function Kcy is used for printing or plotting your
drawing and managing your drawing files. The Transfer Pull Down
Menu Windows are: Plot, Graphics print, Read, Write and Files.
They are accessed and work on the same basis as <F2> SetUp. Use
the Arrow Keys to highlight a Menu and press <RETURN> or press
the first letter of the desired option.
The printing and plotting of drawings is not covercd in the
TurboCAD Tutorial. For further information on Transfer, picase refer
to thc Command Section.
To exit the Transfer Menu, press <Ese>.
<F4> - CALCULA'fOR
This handy calculator can be used for ali standard arithmetic,
trigonometric and Jog functions. Note that the multiply sign is an
asterisk, *, and the divide sign is /.
Page2- 9
The TurboCAD Tutorial

Chapter2
The convention is:

10*(10) <RETURN>
100/(10) <RETURN>.
Calculations are perfonned to 11 significant figures but displays
only 10 decimal points. The calculator has 10 memory registers
for storing values while you work.
<F8>-COPY
This facility works much like Move but duplicates rather than moves
drawings or entities around. You can use Copy with an <F6> Win dow or on its own. It asks for Reference and Destination Points. It
has, however, an ability to make Linear, .Radial and Array copies
- duplicates of the drawing in lines, circles and rows.
Press <Ese> to exit.
To exit the Calculator Menu, press <Ese>.

<FS> - REDRA W
Rcdraw refreshes the screen. If deletions have erascd pixels or drawings have left points on thc screen, Rcdraw will tidy up bchind
you. As the drawing's lime-consuming calculations have already
been done during the creative design process, Rcdraw will take only
a fcw seconds. The more complex the drawing, the longer the
Redraw. As Rcdraw always returns the drawing to the screen, no
Escape proccdure is neccssary. Simply continuc with your next option from the Main Menu.
<F6> - WINDOW
This is a Function Key that you will use often. It allows you to
create a Window around a drawing, or just a part of a drawing, and
then, in conjunction with other keys, pcrform other functions like
Move <F7>, Copy <F8>, Insert <lns>, Delete <Del>, etc. You can
evcn Zoom a window to thc full screen size.
<F9>-GRID
This switchcs on the TurboCAD Grid, a very useful drawing aid.
The size of the Grid can be determincd in thc <F2> SctUp Environment. Press <F9> to switch the Grid off.
<FIO>-PAN
Pan allows you to view, screen by screen, a drawing into which
you have already Zoomed In. You indicate the direction in which
you wanl to pan with the cursor control keys. The panning distance
can be changed in the <F2> SctUp Menu.
lt is quite easy to gel lost whcn panning. To see wherc you are in
relation to the Zoomed In drawing you are panning across, press
<Ctrl-Fl>. This will bring upa Window with a box that identifies
your exact position. Press <Ese> to exit the View position. Once
TurboCAD has panned to a sereen, it switehes Pan off automatieally.
To view anothcr screcn, you must invoke Pan, <FlO>, again.
Importantly, a Window can be either Open or Closed. Open Window

operations apply to ali cntities that have any part enclosed in the
Window. Closed Window operations only apply to entities that are
entirely enclosed in the Window. The default is Closed.
TBE ESCAPE KEY - <Ese>
To abort the Window Option, press <Ese>.
TBE CONTROL KEY - <Ctrl>
<F7>-MOVE
This allows you to move seetions of a drawing. You can Move with
an <F6> Window or with the cursor. The Window appears with a
cross-hair. Use it to pinpoint the Reference and Destination Points.
It is controlled by the Arrow Keys and its speed can be set by the
top row of numeric keys, just like the cursor. You must also provide
the X and Y scaling factors, as well as the Rotation.
<Ese> is used to interrupt the mode that you are in. Generally,
<Ese> will always return you to the Main Menu.
Control key combinations will provide a shorteut to the Pull Down

Window Menus. It is used in combination with the first lellcr of
the Menu you want. Sorne examples are: <Ctrl-E> to invoke the
<F2> SetUp Environment Pul! Down Window; <Ctrl-L> <loes the
same for the Layers Pull Down Window while <Ctrl-F> will produce
the <F3> Transfer Files Pull Down Window. This is a handy way
to make regular Saves of your drawing.
To abort the Move Oplion, press <Ese>.
Page2-10
Page 2 - 11
The TurboCAD Tutoria/
Chapter2
TBE ALTERNATE KEY - <Alt>
TBE ZOOM KEYS
The <Alt> key commands caler for thirteen popular parameters.

When the graphics cursor is present, they provide an even quicker
short-cut for cbanging the <1~2> SctUp parameters on the Prompt
Line. This is much faster than going to a Pull Down Window. Sorne
examples are: <AU-L> prompts for changes to the current Layer
setting; <Alt-T> prompts you to change the current Linc Thickness
setting; and <Alt-D> similarly prompts far a change in the Line
Dash Type.
The Zoom Keys are on the far right of the keyboard. The Zoom In
key, the Grey ( +), is for magnification. The Zoom Out kcy is tht
Grey (. ). The arca to be Zoomed In on is determined by the cursor
position. Once you have Zoomed In and you wanl to return to thc
full drawing on tbe screen, you can use eitber the Zoom Out key,
whicb will take you back in tbe stages you went in by, or you can
use tbe Zoom Retum, the Grey Backspace key, to go back directly.
See the Quick Reference Card far a complete list.
TBE INSERT KEY - <Ins>

Thc <lns> key is limited to storing shapes on disk and for retrieving
and inserting them into a drawing.
TBE DELETE KEY - <Del>

The Erase Key, <Del>, is used to erase entities. It is used in two
ways. The first: al the Main Menu press <Del>. This will bring up
thc Erase Menu with its lisl of options. The second: with the <F6>
Window key create a Window that encompasses the entity to be
erased, then press <Del>.
Remember: Windows can be either Open or Closed. If you are
making an Erase with the entity fully enclosed in the Window, it
does nol matter if the Window is Open or Closed. In Open Window
mode, where the Window only covers a parl of an entity, that enlity
will be erased. With a Closed Window Erase only tbose entities
cntircly enclosed in the Window will be affected. TurboCAD <loes
not do partial erases!
You can undo any mistaken deletions witb the Oops! option. ll will,
however, only restore the lasl entity erased. The laSt option, (one
of the few thal are nol invoked by its first letter), deletes the last
entity drawn. ll is often necessary to make a string of <Del> <S>
to delete a complex entity.
TBE ENTER KEY

This is uscd to initiatc commands. These comroands are generally
selecting or changing settings or values in the Pull Down Windows,
as well as acccpting default values on thc Prompt line or aftcr kcying
new data in.
Page2 12
THE SPACEBAR
Thcre are two cursor positions.The Spacebar "togglcs" thc cursor
betwecn the Drawing and Menu Arcas allowing you lo use Lhc Down
Arrow key to scroll down to the Mcnu option of your choice. Whilc
mosl uscrs will probably selcct Menu oplions from thc kcyboard,
toggling is a most practica( facility when using a Microsoft Mousc.
Simply hit Lhe Spacebar to know you are in the Main Menu, then
use your mouse to select an option . lt is that easy !
AMOUSE
We recommend that you use a mousc with TurboCAD. Thcrc is no
doubt thal, with practice, a mouse is thc casiest input dcvice to
use. Virtual.y every facility of the program (exccpt tcx t input) can
be carried out quicker via a mouse.
The developers of TurboCAD recommend that you use an IMSI
Mouse or Microsoft compatible mouse in conjunction with
TurboCAD.
The mouse replaces the need for extensive use of tbe cursor kcys.
The most important and immediate benefit of using a mouse is an
increase in productivity. However, tbis <loes depend on the applica tion it is used for. A mouse can provide very little advantage in a
mode, like the Line option's CoordsAbs, where you musl key in
your points using X and Y co-ordinates.
When you have to indicate
TurboCAD's otber modes, as
a mouse is an indispensable
thal a proficient TurboCAD
productive with a mouse.
Points, and you do a lot of this in

well as selecting Main Menu oplions,
productivity lool. Research indicatcs
user can be almosl three times more
Page 2 13
Chapter 2
THE WORK DRAWING PROMPT
2.6 STARTING TURBOCAD

ln ali the following exercises we assume thal you havc jusl inslalled
TurboCAD and Lhal you are aboul Lo starl TurboCAD for Lhe firsl
Lime. Thus, ali your TurboCAD syslem dcfaults are standard. (A
defaull is Lhe system selling as sel by the software publishers, or
changed lo a new default setting by yourself - in which case the
defaulls are nol standard !).
TurboCAD will now ask you for a Work drawing. Type in an ap

propriate eighl leller drawing name eg . ORAWINGS. Eight lettcr:
are the maximum you can use for a Turb,1CAD file namc. You can
also use numbers in your file names eg . DRAWING J. This is a
more useful convention for filing purposes.
Uork draw ing ? DRAUIHGt
lf your defaulls are nol standard, we suggesl thal you re-install

TurboCAD for the purpose of these exercises.
Al the DOS prompl (e.g. "A>"), type in:
<TC > <RETURN>

This will cause the firsl page wilh lhe IMSI logo lo be displayed.
If you accept the Lerms of our license agreement, press the
<RETURN> key.
THE WORK DIRECTORY PROMPT

An empty TurboCAD screen is displayed. There is a prompt in the
top left corner. lt requests confirmation of where your drawings
must be stored. If you have a bard disk with TurboCAD in a subdirectory, it will include thc sub-directory in the prompt. It says
eitber:
Work directory ? 8: - far dual disk drive PCs.

Work directory? C:ITC - where TC is the sub-drectory.
Simply Press <RETURN> in bolh inslances.
Men:
C:I
2851
He
8 P 1
When you start anotber drawing, TurboCAD will always prompl

you with the namc of the last drawing you worked on. TurboCA D
will remember Lhe name of the lasl drawing even if you switch
your macbine off at night. When you start again the next day,
TurboCAD will present you wilh itas your first option. If you want
to work with it, ali you do is press <RETURN> .
Work drawing ?
<DRAWING 1>
<RETURN>
TurboCAD's use of memory recall is one of its most striking fea tures. In th is Tutorial you will be constantly reminded thal
TurboCAD defaults to the last mo<le or file used. (A default is a
standard setting, value or file to which the computer continually
returns and invokes.)
Page2- 14
Page 2- 15
Chapter2
SCALE
Two further points about Work drawings.

i. lf you want to create a new file name, simply type in the new
file name over the default file name. Only if you make an error
with the new file name is there a need to Use the Destructive Back-
space key to delete it.
ii. To display a directory of ali drawing files in the work directory,

press the Help Function key <}'l>. You can use the Left or Right
Arrow keys to highlight a file. If you press <RETURN>, the file
is automatically loaded.
CREATING A FILE
When you starl a new <lrawing with TurboCAD you are prescntcd
with Lhe <lefaull scale of 1: l. A sea le of 1: 1 mcans thal l c m 011
paper represenls lcm in rcality. lf you change lhe <lcfaull scalc lo
1: l O, your ncw selling will become Lhc defaull.
<Y> <RETURN>
lf you wanl lo change Lhe scale while you are working, us e thc
Environment Pull Down Menu. This is onc of TurboCAD's greal
advanlages over manual draughling. Simply press Lhe <F2 > Se tUp
Function Kcy to change thc default selting. As you exit thc SetUp
screen, TurboCAD will rc-scalc your drawing.
PAPERSIZE
TurboCAD needs to know what paper size you will be plotting or
printing to as il uses tbis variable intemally to set the size of the
oulput to the plotter. TurboCAD can work with A4, A3, A2, Al and
AO paper sizes.
You can creatc a drawing al A4 sizc and thcn change it before
printing using the SctUp Function Key, <F2> to access tbe Environmcnt Pull Down Window. The size to be used, however, may be
restricted by your ploller or printer. The default value is tbe drawing
scale as created or saved .
If you are only going to print or plot to an A4 size, simply press

<RETURN> wbcn promptcd.
Paper A 4
Page2- 16
When you inslallc<l TurboCAD you wcrc given the choice of scl ccling a unil in millimcters, ccntimetcrs, mclers, inchcs or fccl. lf you
wish lo changc your choice of measuremenl, you mus t run the
TurboCAD selup program. Use millimetres for Lhese excrci scs .
This prompt only appears if you are creating a file for the first
time . As the purpose of the exercise is to create a file, simply press
the Enter key when prompted by TurboCAD. Type in No <N> if
you are suddenly afilicted by indecision.
Create file (YIN) ?
'
One of Lhe greal advanlages of compuler aidcd <lcsign is the fa c

thal sclccting paper sizc and scale is nol as critica! a <lccision as
in manual drafling mclhods. Using Turbe CAD, both can casil y be
changc<l in Lhc Environmenl Pull Down Window. TurboCAD simpl y
computes lhe ncw dimcnsions, a task Lhal would mean rc-<lrawing
in a manual cnvironmenl.
<RETURN>
TurboCAD's scrcen co-ordinalcs are always given in real scalc.

Evcry time TurboCAD rcquires you to Lypc in a mcasurem e nl, it
musl be entcrcd in real world scalc. Al the time Lhal a new drawin g
is slartcd, Lhc scaling faclors are sel so that Lhe scrcen shows a
vicw corresponding to the paper sizc you havc sclccted .
THE TURilOCAD DRA WING SCREEN

You are now presenled with a fresh drawing scrccn, a pro ve rbia 1
clcan slale if we may conjure up a dcsign image so anachronistic .
Just considcr the momenl and CAD in general.
Spare a Lhoughl for Cro-Magnon man painling on Lhe rock wall~
of a cave in Lascaux; of Sumcrian clay tablcls and Egyptian
hicroglyphics. Think of thc Scvcn Wondcrs of thc Ancicnt World.
Lhe glory that was Grcece, Angkor Wal and Zimbabwe. Ncither thc
halls of Monlczuma nor lhe spires of Lhe Alhambra wcrc <lcsigned
with CAD. What might Archimcdcs, da Vinci, Pirancsi, Wrcn, Brunei
and Eiffel have said?
Page 2- 17
Chapter2
Such is TurboCAD, your work tool, arguably onc of thc most powerful, popular design tools ever.
For modern man with liule time for such musings, the TurboCAD
Drawing Screen comprises five clements:
25
59
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~--,
Thc Menu Arca

On the top right hand side of the screen is the Menu Arca. The
Main Menu has 11 options, ruostly relating to drawing commands
When you choose an option, a sub-menu is presentcd for furthcr
selection.
Menu :
Are
Change
Dirtension
F8ncyLlne
&tch
Llne
f1easurn
Point
Sketch
Text
Quit
+
He": 168
The Status Arca

This is the box below the Menu Arca. lt gives a brief summary of
Setup options and is a quick reference to the status of your environment. Depending on which options are available, diffcrent letters will be shown.
Typically, thc Status Arca rcveals thc amuunt of RAM rcmaining this is important becausc drawings are crcatcd in RAM. lt also
reveals thc Window Modc, either Closed or Open; if we have Ncar
Scarch Modc on; what Layer we are on and which Peo wc are
using.
You are now ready to start using TurboCAD. Befare you bcgin the
basic drawing excrcisc, read the following section.
CI
H"
L 8 P t
The Drawing Arca

This is the large rectangle surrounded by a border. Your drawings
are created in this arca. At thc moment it is blank except for the
cursor in the middle of the screen.
TheCursor
The crosshair cursor is in thc ccntcr of thc scrccn. You will use it
Lo identify points in thc drawing arca.
TurboCAD has three types of cursor, small crosshair, large screensize crosshair and diamond-shapc. The default value is Small. lt is
changed via <Alt- C>.
Thc Prompl Line
This is thc topmost line of your screen. It is where you will be
prompted for input. lt is blank at present. Move the cursor and the
position of the co-ordinatcs is shown on the right side of the Prompt
Line. Prompts for input are always on the lcft.
Page2. 18
Page 2- 19
Chapter2
2.7 ENTITIES, SHAPES AND DRA WINGS
In a later ex1:-rcise, you will see how understanding angles will hclp
to create an Are above a line rathcr than randomly below thc line.
25
Line
lle asure
Point
Sketch
Text
Clui t
+
""": 168
Cl
H..
L 8 P 1
This drawing compriscs shapcs which are madc up of cntitics.

Just as a manual drawing is made up of lincs, circles and rectangles,
etc., so a TurboCAD drawing is compriscd of shapes and entities.
TurboCAD has six drawing cnlitics - Ares, Dimensions, Hatchcs,
Lines, Poinls and Texl. Together lhey crcatc shapcs which comprise
drawings.
Manual drafting <loes not lend itself to intcnsive utilization of entities. Those bits of a drawing lhat havc b.:en already crcatcd on
paper cannot be used again. An advantage of CAD is that once
drawn, entities can be manipulated in many ways - reduccd, rotated,
stretched, enlarged, etc. This is one of the major reasons for the
dramatic productivity increase achievable with CAD.
Crcating drawings with slight variations using CAD is so much
casier and more efficient than manual draufting that it would he
unfair to allcmpt any comparison. TurboCAD, for instancc, allows
you to crcate Shape Librarics in which you can storc commonly
uscd shapes. Thesc shapes, comprising any numbcr of cntities, can
be duplicated by thc computer and incorporatcd into other drawings
when they are needed.
Architects need only draw a certain type of window or <loor once .
They can then incorporate it into new plans. Electrical cngincers
can have al! manner of symbols - diodcs, resistors, transistors, etc.
- stored on disk in their Shape Library.
TurboCAD will often prompt you to indicate a drawing cntity. When
it <loes, indicate the entity - a Line, Are, Point, etc., - by moving
the cursor to near the cntily and then pressing <RETURN>. lf
TurboCAD is unable to locate the entity, il will "becp" lo indicatc
that thc entity was not found. This usually means that the cursor
was loo far from the enlity.
An enlity can be regarded as a bit of a drawing. A straighl line

comprises une entity ami is registercd as thc joining of two points.
A rectanglc compriscs four cnlitics because it has four sides. lnlercslingly, but not strangcly, a Fancyline Rectangle is registered as
two points - a diagonal.
TurboCAD will lisl Lhc cnlities internally as you creale them. A
circle compriscs onc cnlity, the circumfercnce. Depending upon the
mode you have chosen lo draw the circle in - TurboCAD refers lo
circlcs as Ares - it can be listcd in TurboCAD in a variety of ways.
For instance, an Are can be listed as either three points, a center
point and radius or a <liamctcr.
Ali circles encompass 360 dcgrces. This is the difference between
circles and semi-circles which are internally represented as a centre,
a radius, a starting angle of O degrees and a selectable ending angle.
Page2-20
2.7 ENTITIES, SHAPES ANO ORAWINGS
2. 7 ENTIT/ES, SHAPES ANO DRAWINGS
Page 2-21
Chapter2
Plot
Graphics print
Read
Urite
2.8 SOME PRACTICAL ADVICE
Files
G
Save Drawin
1
In ordcr to smooth your learning curve, rcad tbis scction bcfore

you blindly rush into TurboCAD. lt will bclp you to understand
and use tbe package better. ln the process you will avoid many of
tbc pitfalls ami obstacles that so often frustrate one's introducton
to a new software package.
Renane DraHing
Erase Drawing
Drawing
Dir
ion
ine
SHtc066
A:
1
neasure
Point
Sl<etch
Text
Oui t
HOW TO ESCAPE, SA VE AND QUIT

ESCAPE - <Ese>
Have you cvcr bccn stuck in a software program and not known
how to gel out'? Thcrc can be few things more frustrating to thc
first-timc uscr than not knowing how to ESCAPE from a program
that has bccome a dead-cnd.
You should nevcr have this problem with TurboCAD. If you get
into trouble, simply prcss <Ese> to rcturn to the Main Menu.
lf you select a command by mistakc, or changc your mind in thc
middle of a command, press the <Ese> key to abort whatcver you
were doing. Sometimes you might have to press <Ese> severa! times,
particularly if you have selected an option from a number of successive menus. You should always be able to return to the Main
Menu by pressing <Ese>.
SA VE - <Ctrl-F>
Don't grant the Data Loss Monster another victory ! Save your
drawings regularly with <Clrl-F>. Believe us, the Data Loss
Monster will conspire in every which way it can to destroy your
painstaking hours of labour.
Ncver relax your guard whcn making a drawing - rcmember that
you are always threatened by the lurking Data Loss Monster. ll is
particularly fond of TurboCAD which creates drawings in RAM
(Random Access Mcmory). This highly volatile state of memory is
much to the Data Loss Monster's liking.
Men:
17~1
CJ
Ne
L 68 P t
To save your drawings to disk during thc course of thc drafting

process, you must use thc SAVE command - <Ctrl-F>. This creatcs
a Eilcs Pull Down Menu with the first option highlightcd. Simply
p1..:ss <RRTURN>. TurboCAD will Save thc drawing and rctum
you to the Drawiug Arca.
One advantagc of having your drawing in RAM and of using <CtrlF> to save it regularly to disk is that if you do ruin your drawing
you can simply Quit <Q>. If you say No to Saving it, you lose the
error-filled drawing. You then resume with the same drawing, which
was previously saved to disk, albeit a few dcsign steps back from
whcrc you wcnt wrong.
Regular Savcs will keep your drawing updated and reasonably safc
on your hard disk, or on System Disk 2 in the B: drivc. For real
data security your drawings should be properly backed-up onto flop py disks at tbe end of thc day and safely stored away. Never dismiss
the Data Loss Monster. Just like Murphy and bis Law, it is an accident waiting to happcn.
QUIT- <Q>
QUIT is a Main Menu option. Wbenever you want to !cave your
drawing, cithcr toggle the cursor to the Main Mcnu by prcssing thc
Spaccbar and scrolling down tbc options with the Down Arrow kcy
and press <RETURN>, or, much easier, simply typc <Q> for QUIT.
Page2-22
Page2-23

Chapter 2
ERASE, DELETE AND .... OOPS!
You are thcn prcscntcd with a choice:
Quit (Y/N) ?
Save drawing (Y/N) ?
Another drawing (Y/N)?
<Y> <RETURN>
<Y> <RETURN>
<N> <RETURN>
lf you now type <RETURN>, you will exit TurhoCAD and return
to DOS. lf you want to continue working:
Another drawing (Y/N)?
<Y> <RETURN>
In case you make errors in the following excrcises, it will be useful

to know how to Dclete or Erase them. In TurboCAD Dclcte and
Erase are the same. Pressing thc <Del> kev whcn you are al lhc
Main Menu brings up the Erase Menu.
You have two basic ways of removing entilies in TurboCAD.
ERASE METHOD 1:
Erase
4194
1265
You can now specify a new drawing.
ADJUSTING CURSOR SPEED

The cursor speed can he adjusted by sirnply selccting any number
between < l> and <9> un the lopmosl row of numeric keys . < 1> is
slow, the cursor dislance travelled hcing vcry small. <9> is fasl,
moving wilh largc leaps .
Erase '
Are
Dinension
Hatch
laSt
Llne
Oops 1
Point
Jext
Thc cursor spccd dcfaull sclling is <S>. You will find it uscful lo
be ablc to changc lhc cursor specd as you movc around lhc scrccn.
Changing thc cursor spccd will allow you to move lo cxacl positions,
lo squcczc a winduw bclwccn cnlilics or lo simply work faslcr.
Lcarn to know lhc gradualions which prompl thc cursor's movcmcnl
spccd.
In lhe first cxcrcisc you will he askcd lo gol to poinl (145 105) in
lhc drawing arca. Whcn you altcmpl lo do so you may find il impossiblc lo place lhc cursor in cxaclly lhis posilion. lf you changc
lhc cursor spccd you will conlrol lhc dislanccs lhal lhc cursor movcs
with every kcyslrokc. You will lhcn be ablc to localc lhc co-ordinatc
(145 105).
Press <Ese> to take you to the Main Menu.

Press <Del> to bring up the Erase Menu .
Position thc cursor near thc cntily to be erased.
Now, dcpending on what you want to delctc, Prcss:
<A> for Are,
<D> for Dimension,
<H> for Hatch,
<L> for Linc,
<P> for Point and
<T> for Text.
To dclctc only thc last entity you drew:
Prcss <S> for laSt.
(Normally, you prcss the first lettcr of thc option. laSt is onc of
thc fcw cxceptions. plygon is anothcr.)
Page 2-24
2.8 SOME PRACTICAL ADVJCE
Page2-25
Chapter2
ERASE METHOD 2
Position the cursor to the left and below the entity to be erased.
Press the <F6> Window Function Key. Use the Up and Right Anow
Keys to expand the Window until it completely encapsulates the
entity to be erased. Press <Del> and TurboCAD will erase the entities within the window.
5882
\4 \cit:-:---=
_J
Oui t
11en: 189
R
Cl
He
L 68 P 1
Windows can operate in both Open and Closed mode. The default
is Closed. This can be changed in the Environment Pull Down Window accessed by the <F2> Setup Key or <Ctrl-E>. If the Window
is Open, the <F6> and <Del> Erase routine will work quite differently .
OOPS !
If you mistakenly erase an entity, the Oops option in the Erase
Menu will restore it. BUT, it will only restore an entity if there
have been no subsequent deletions. lt only remembers the last deletion. You can make as many additions to your drawing as you like
but if you delete two objects, it will only remember the last and
restore that.
If you have rcad to hcre, you are now equippcd lo tackle the next
scclion . Wc will do a simple exercise in DISCOVERING TURBOCAD.
Page2-26
2.9 EXERCISE 1 - DISCOVERING TURBOCAD

If you have never used TurboCAD, this exercise will help you lo
develop sorne basic keyboard skills.
This lesson will show you how to move the cursor around the screcn,
how to increase or decrease the cursor speed and how to toggle the
cursor between the screen and the Main Menu. It will also introduce
you to sorne basic drawing options, show you how to Delete an
entity and how to Quit a drawing.
For the purpose of this elementary exercise, create a new file . Having
done so, you will find the cursor in the center of a blank Drawing
Area. The Prompt Line will be empty. The Menu Arca on the top
right will display the Main Menu while below it the Status Arca
will show the default settings - Cl, Ne, L O and P l - and your
available RAM memory.
MOVING THE CURSOR
The cursor is moved around the screen with the numeric keypad
on thc right hand side of your keyboard. The Arrow Keys move
the cursor vertically - Up and Down - and horizontally - Right and
Left. The <Pg UP>, <Pg Dn>, <End>, <Home> keys mov e the
cursor diagonally across the screen. <Numlock> must be OFF.
CURSOR SPEED
The Numeric Keys across the top of the keyboard affect the speed
of the cursor. <l> is very slow, <2> to <8> are intermediate speeds
and <9> is vcry fast.
Try moving the cursor around at different spceds and in different
directions . After a while you will become used to the differcnt distances that the cursor travels with each setting. On <l > it requires
two keystrokes to affect a change in the cursor co-ordinatcs . <9>
jumps the farthest.
T~JRllO-CHARGlNG THE CURSOR
Almost unbelicvably, TurboCAD allows you to movc your cursor
even faster. High speed can only be attained with the Left ami Right
Arrow Keys. Thc Up and Down actions cannot be altcrcd. lf you
attempt it al sctting <9>, please pul your crash belmct and lcathcrs
on. Ready?
Page2-27
Chapter 2
The TurboCAO Tutorial
Try <Ctrl-Lcft Arrow Kcy> and <Ctrl-Right Arrow Kcy>.
Perhaps thc bcst way to use the cursor al this spccd is with a slowcr
cursor selling like <5>. If you shool lhrough the containing bordcr
into the Main Menu and you highlight an oplion in lhe proccss, try
prcssing <RETURN>. You havc just discovered another way lo invoke an oplion !
X Y CO-ORDINATES
The (X Y) co-ordinate system is a mea ns of pinpointing a position
on a flal surfacc. TurboCAD uses this carlesian co-ordinale system
to represen! the location of the cursor and give drawing poi nls to
thc compuler. Any poinl on a drawing can be spccificd by such an
(X Y) pairing.
For those who have forgollen the basic (X Y ) co-ordinale system,
press the Lefl or Right Arrow Keys. Watch the right hand side of
the Prompt Linc. When moving th e cursor horizontally, il is the
first co-ordinate, the X co-ordinalc which is affcctcd. Similarly,
when moving the cursor either Up or Down, it is the Y co-ordinatc
which is affected.
Remember: X is
hori zontal
Y is vertical.
TurboCAD can mcasu re a co-ordinate to e leven significa nt figures.

lt displays as many figur es as il can al any onc time, but in ternall y
it calculatcs lo eleven sign ificant fig ures (as opposcd lo decim al
places).
TOGGLI NG THE CURSOR
You havc two methods of choosing an option from the Ma in Menu .
Thc easicst is to si mply prcss the firs t lc ller of the option o f your
cho ice. Prcss < L> for Line and you go lo thc Line Options Mcn u.
Press <Ese> to go back to the Main Menu.
Thc sccond mcthod is lo toggl c thc c ursor bctwccn lhc Dra wi ng
and Mcnu Arcas. Prcss thc <Spacc ba r>. Thc cu rsor disappca rs and
thc Are Option is hi g hligh tcd. Prcss lhc Down Arrow Kcy lo go lo
thc Linc optio n . Once this is high lig htcd, prcss <RETURN>.
You are now in thc Line Options Mcnu. Prcss <Ese> to go ha c k
lo thc Main Mcn u. Th c Line option is still highlighlcd. Prcss lhc
<Spaccba r> and thc cursor rcturns to the scrce n.
You ca n also movc thc cursor in to thc Mcnu Arca wilh th c cu rsor
kcys and sclcct an oplion with <RET URN>.
The ongm of the system is th e lower left corner of thc Drawing

Arca, co-o rdinatc (O O).
SCALE IN THE BALANCE
lf you havc sel your drawing up with a sea le of 1: 1, thc cursor
position numbcrs will rcfl cct thc actual dislancc in millimc trcs that
will be plollcd or printcd on paper. To test this, movc th c cursor
up lo thc top right comer of thc drawin g arca . Thc c ursor posi ti o n
nunibc rs should rcad (297 21 O), thc sizc of an A4 sheet of papcr.
NOTE
Do nol assume thal bccausc <l> movcs the cursor a half drawing
unit al a time, thal TurboCAD is limited lo mcasuring in incremental
slcps of .5 millimelc rs . This movemenl is duc lo thc physical limilations of thc scrccn's rcsolution, the numbcr of dots pcr inch. Dcpcnding on the scrccn's rcsolution, ( c.g. Monochromc, CGA, EGA, a nd
VGA ), thc cursor movcs diffcrcnl distances.
Page 2- 28
2.9 EXERCISE 1 - O/SCOVERING TURBOCAO
Page 2- 29
f
f:
Chapter2

SKETCH
We are now going to use Sketch. This is a very easy way to draw
a linc. Once Sketch is on, it draws a line whercver you movc thc
cursor. In the Sketch modc think of thc cursor as a pen which you
can switch On and Off with <RETURN>.
Before wc start, make sure thal the cursor speed is a modest <5>
or less - you do not want your pen to run away with you ! Are you
at the Main Menu ? If not, press <Ese> .
Sketching
145
95
A l<'ANCYLINE RECTANG LE
Go to an empty part of the screen. Press <F> for Fancylinc.

Select <R> for Rectanglc from the Fancyline sub- menu.
Observe the Prompt Line. Note that TurboCAD tells you that you
are in ScreenPos mode and asks you to lndicate First Point. (lf you
are not in ScreenPos mode, press <S>. ScreenPos allows you to
define points on screen by positioning the cursor). Prcss
<RETURN> to indicate the First Point of your rectangle on thc
screen. Move the cursor away and you will see that you ha ve defined
a point.
lndleate Second P--~
---- -
Reetangle
ScreenPos
117
71
PointDf!f:
Screer1Pos
HearPoint
Coordsflbs
Reiatlve
Polar
D
+
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Line Pt
Hor & Rad

Ver & Rad
X & Angle
Y & Angle
""": 2051
lntersect
lligltiser
Cl
Ne
L 0 P 1
Men:
Now, press <S> for Sketch.

The Prompt Line informs you that you are in Sketch mode and
gives the cursor co-ordinates. Move the cursor to co-ordinate ( 145
105). Now, press <RETURN>. This will switch Sketch On. Attempt
to draw a small rectangle wilh cach side only two or three clicks
of each Arrow Key. When you havc completed the rectangle, switch
Sketch Off by pressing <RETURN>.
204J
CI
Ne
L
0 P t
The Prompt Line now asks you for the Second Point. Fancyline
will define a rectangle based on the two opposite points of a
diagonal. (It assumes the rectangle 's opposite si des are parallel.)
Move the cursor away and either up or down, then indicate the
Second Point by pressing <RETURN>. You have created another
rectangle.
Press <Ese> to go back to lhe Main Menu.
Page2-30
2.9 EXERC/SE 1 - D/SCOVERING TURBOCAD
2.9 EXERCISE 1 - D/SCOVERING TURBOCAD
Page2-31
Chapter2
The TurboCAO Tutora/
ARC
Press <Ese> to return to tbe Main Menu. We will now draw an Are
using the RadCentrc option. This rcquircs us to define a Centcr
point, a Radius and a Start and End Anglc.
30. No maller how largc you draw lhe circle, il slill has flallcncd
sides. When prinled, or prcfcrably ploltcd, it will be perfce tl y round .
Finally, observe that when drawing a cirele, TurboCAD draws in a
counlcr-clockwisc direction. More about this later !
Go to an empty part of tbe serccn.
Prcss <Ese> to go back lo the Main Menu.
Prcss <A> for Are.

Press <R> for RadCentre.
Observe tbc Prompt Linc. lt is tclling you that you are slill in ScrccnPos modc and that you are going lo draw an Are by indicaling a
Ccntcr with a Radius. ll is also asking you for !he Ccnlcr poinl of
lbc Are or circ!c. Prcss <RETURN>.
232
170
Prcss lhc <Del> kcy to access thc Dclcte Mcnu.

Movc thc cursor away from th e circlc and prcss <A> for Are. Noth ing should happcn if !he cursor is far from lhc circlc. T11 rboCAD
will "bccp" th at it has failcd to locatc thc circlc ami abortcd ihc
opcralion . Movc thc cursor closc to !he circurnfcrcncc and rcpcat
lhc cxcrcisc. Thc circlc is dclclcd.
11enu :
Are
Change
Dinension
F"ncyLine
Funct ion kev :
Hatch
Lino
tleasure
Point
Sketch
Te><t
Ul0
144
Mcnu
Are
Ouit
[gJ
Change
D inension
FancyLine
fla tch
L ine
Measure
Point
Sk etch
Tex t
Ou i t
:n: :~1
L
0 P 1
Noticc lhal you havc indicaled a poinl and lhal thc cursor has left
tbe Drawing Arca and is now blinking on tbc Prompt Line. lt is
rcquesting lhat you type in tbc Radius.
Radius : 10
Start Angle : O degrees.
End Angle : 360 degrees.
<10> <RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
An Are appcars 011 thc scrcen. lt has flaltcncd cdgcs. Tbis is duc
to the limitalions of thc sercen. Draw anolher Are on lhc same
Centcr point wilb a Radius of 20, then anolhcr wilh a Radius of
Page2-32
DELETING AN ENTITY
cn:
203""
CI
ll e
L 0 P 1
Now, place thc cursor bclow and to thc left of onc of thc rcc tanglcs
which you crealed. Prcss !he <F6> Window Kcy and expand it with
thc Arrow Keys until the window endoses your rcctanglc full y.
Prcss <Del>. Notice how lhc rcclangle is dclclcd enlity by cntity
ie. side by sidc. When it has finishcd delcting, TurboCAD rcturns
you to lhe Main Menu.
2.9 EXERCISE 1 - DISCOVERING TURBOCAO
Page2-33
The TurboCAO Tutorial

Chapter 2
OOl'S !
Wc will now try to rccover the delctcd rectangle . Press <Del> to
invoke the Erase Menu . Prcss <O> for Oops ! and ..... POP! You
have gol your rectangle back. Now try to rccover the Are which
you deleted. lt is nol possible. The message "Buffer Empty" flashes
briefly on the screcn. Now dclele ali the entities and proceed with
2.10 EXERCISE 2 - ICE CREAM CAD
Excrcise2, ICE CREAM CAD.
!
l
This cxercise is recommended as a qu ick and easy wa y to discove r

TurboCAD's mosl basic fealures. It rcquirrs you lo d ra w an Ice
Crcam ! Again, system defaults are standard.
We are aware that design professiona ls might think such an excrcisc
too elementary. If you have CAD experience you must dec ide fo r
yoursclf if it is bettcr for you to s kip this scetion a nd go dircc tl y
to the Commands section or the ncx t exercise. This cxercise, ICE
CREAM CAD, is for bcginners.
WHAT THIS EXERCISE COVERS
This cxercise wi ll cover Lines and Ares, Saving, Ha tching, Co pying,
Moving and inserting Text. Give you rsclf sufficient time to complete
this cxcrcise in one sitting. You s hou ld be able to complete it in
two hours. If no l, you can always Q uit <Q>, save what you ha ve
done and continue another time.
As this is only your second lesson in TurboCAD, thcre is a lo t o f
explanation to begin with. Towards the end of this exe rcise we will
establish an lnstruction and Command layout stylc that presum es
increasing knowledge on your part.
CONCEIYf'S
Bcfore we begin, consider an ice c rca m that eomprises a cone w ith
a scoop of ice cream and a cherry 0 11 top. In any simpl e 2-D reprcscntation an ice cream is composcd of straight lincs ma king up
a lriangle - the eo ne; a semi-cirele o r an are on to p - thc ice crcam ;
anda small circ le al a tangent lo thc are above it - the cherry. Now,
lct's draw it.
START
For the purpose of this exercise TurboCAD's Systcm Dcfa ults a re
standard. In other words your system should be co nfig ured as th o ugh
you have just installed TurboCAD. Create a new drawing ca ll ed
ICEDRAW. Use Paper Size A4 and a Scale o f l : l. Choosc mil limcters for uni ts . In both inslances, simply press < RET URN> .
Page 2-34
2.9 EXERC/SE 1 - O/SCOVERING TURBOCAD
2. 1O EXERCISE 2 - ICE CREAM CAD
Page 2 - 35
Chapter2

Move the cursor to co-ordinate (20 50) and press <RETURN>.
TJP: Always check the Status Area bcfore you starl. How much
RAM is available for your drawing '! You should be in Closed Window and Near Search Modes. Unless you need them, which you do
not in this exercisc, make sure that you are on Layer O and that
Pen l is on. Always check to scc thal any special options you used
in your lasl drawing havc becn switched off.
Hext point
ler 2pt line
ScreenPos
20
50
You have drawn a line with a leng1h of 30 drawing units. TurboCAD

defined a Point where you pressed <RETURN>. The Line thal has
been drawn is merely the joining of the tv. o Points. Internally,
TurboCAD represents this line as two Points.
You are now going to draw another line. Change the drawing mode
by selecting Relative <R>.
PointDef:
ScreeoPos
HearPoint
Coordsflbs
Rel&tive
Polar
)( relatlve
Def 2pt llne
R.eiatlve
Hor & Rad

Ver & Rad
Y & Angla
DRAWING UNES
We will use three different methods of drawing lincs lo create thc
triangle or Ice Cream cone. From the Main Menu selecl the Line
option, <L>. Line command contains sixtcen different ways of drawing a line. In this exercise we will use thrce Line options lo draw
our Ice Cream cone.
Observe that the Prompt Line now contains information and lhat
the Menu arca lists the relevant Line options. We will use ScreenPos
for the first of our lhrce Line oplions. If you are not in ScreenPos
mode, press <S>. In ScreenPos mode, a Point is defined al lhe
position of the cursor when you press <RETURN>.
Hor & Rad

Ver & Rad
)( & Angle
Y & Angla
l n tersect
Dlgltiser
Page2-36
11en:
2~
CI
He
8 P 1
Observe what has happened to the Prompt Arca. It now reads:
1
1
1
1
X relative : O Det 2pt fine Relative 20 50

This meaos that TurboCAD wants the Nexl Point. It will use lhc
currently defined point (20 50) as the first point of thc nex t linc.
In Relative mode, the nexl point must be enlercd as a set of co-ordinates. Use the upper row of Numeric Keys to enter the rclalivc
values:
X relative :
Move the curs..>r to position (50 50). Press <RETURN>. If you

cannol reach this co-ordinate, change lhc cursor selling. The Prompl
Line has changed. lt is now asking you for the Next Point so thal
it can complete a line. If you move the cursor you will see that
you have defined a Poinl.
PolntDef:
Se~~
MidPt Lin
F.ndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
)( & Angle
~"
18
HearPoint
Coordsflbs
Relatlve
Pol&r
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
lntersect
Dlgitlser
35
y relative :
<15> <RETURN>
<-40> <RETURN>
You have now drawn a linc to lhe poinl (35 JO). Vcri fy lh is fro m
the cursor co-ordinates in the Prompt Arca.
Page2-37
Chapter2

You are now going to use anotber metbod to draw tbe third side
of your cone . Change the drawing mode by selecting NearPoint
<N>. Tbis "snaps" to the nearest point !
DELETING
Observe wbal has bappened to Lbe Prompt Area . It now reads:
Here are two mcthods of obtaining a fresh drawing surfacc.
Def 2pt fine NearPoint 35 1O
Pcrhaps lhe most intcresting way is to press <Ese> to go back to

thc Main menu. Position the cursor to the left and bclow thc cone .
Press the Window Function Key <F6>. Expand the Window with
the Up and Right Arrow keys so that it endoses the cone completely.
Press <Del> and the cone will be erased.
lf you are confused at tbis point, rcpcat thc excrcise again .
To use tbe Relative modc to close the triangle that forms thc cone
of our Ice Cream would be cumbersome as you would have to calculate tbe relativc distance from (35 10) to (50 50).
With NearPoint modc ali you havc to do is move the cursor fairly
closc to a Point and press <RETURN> . TurboCAD will thcn search
for the nearest Point and cause the linc to converge there. This
method will give you perfect accuracy.
Hext point
Def 2pt l ine
HearPolnt
58
58
Altcmativcly, al tbe Main Menu press <Ese>, then Quit <Q>. Say
No <N> to saving the drawing but Yes <Y> to another drawing.
Prcss <RETURN> until a fresh screen comes up.
Now, redraw thc conc based on the prcceding instructions . On ce
you have done so we will draw an are or, in layman's tenns, "we
will pul a dollop of ice cream in the cone".
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
CcordsAbs
Relative
Polar
If you are not at the Main Menu, press <Ese>.
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Lino Pt
Hor & Rad

Ver & Rad
X & Angle
V & Angle
lntersect
Dlgltlser
Men: 205
Cl
L
He
8 P t
Let's do it now. Position the cursor close to point (50 50). Do not
position it on the point. Press <RETURN> . Notice how the line
"snaps" to the nearest point. You bave just created the triangle which
will form the cone of your Ice Crcam.
TlP: You bav1.; drawn lines using three different types of Point
Definition Modes - ScrcenPos, Relative and NearPoint. Remember:
TurboCAD always remembers tbe last mode you used and defaults
to it every time. Tbis can cause confusion with new users. It is,
however, a very useful feature.
Page2- 38
'"'
2.10 EXERCISE 2- ICE CREAM CAD
Page2-39

Chapter2
<A>
Are Tan :
ARCS
Selecl Are <A> from lhe Main Menu. This will place lhe Ares Drawing Menu in lhe Main Menu Arca. There are seven ways lo define
an Are . We will lry thc Double Point method, <D>. This method
Are Tan will draw a full circle langenl lo an anolher Are. Follow
lhe prompts in lhe Prompl Area. Firsl you are asked lo indicale lhc
Are. This refcrs lo lhe cxisling semi-circle, lhe Ice Cream. You can
place lhc cursor anywhere on lhe Are. Simply idenlify il by pressing
<RETURN>.
draws a semi-circle when given two points.

28
58
11enu :
Are
Ch""9"
Dinension
FnncyLine
Hatch
Line
ne asure
Point
Sketch
teict
35
65
11enu :
Are
Change
Dirtension
FnncyLine
Hatch
Llne
tleasure
Point
Sketch
Teict
Quit
Qui
fJ
"""' 2051
CI
He
L 8 P t
Press <D>. Nolice lhal lhe Poinl Definilion Menu has come onto
lhe screen. This is neccssary since we are going lo define 2 points
that form the cnd-points of a semi-circle.
1
1
t
Move lhc cursor lo lhe poinl (50 50). Press <RETURN>.

Move the cursor lo the point (20 50). Press <RE'fURN>.
TurboCAD draws an Are belween the two points. This Are, which
requires only lwo points to define it, is represenled wilhin
TurboCAD as a Center, a Radius, a Starling Angle of Zero and an
Ending Angle of 180 degrees.
1
l
""": 284 1
Cl
He
L 8 P t
You will now be prompled for a radius. After chosing a radius of

4 which you will key-in from your top row of numeric keys, prcss
<RETURN>. You are now asked to indicale where on lhe Are you
want the common tangenl to be . Posilion lhc cursor al the apex of
your Ice Cream . Press <RETURN> .
You now have a cherry on your Ice Cream . OR DO YOU ?
Evcn if your cherry is on lop, read lhe nexl seclion. ll conlain s
sorne useful ac:!vicc and informalion.
TlP: Are you wondering how TurboCAD knew it must draw lhe
Are above the line, nol below ? The answer is thal TurboCAD did
n0t know. ll is programmed to always draw circles counter-clockwise. If you had defined co-ordinale (20 50) firsl, then (50 50),
TurboCAD would havc drawn the Are upside-down .
Now, we will place a cherry on top of your Ice Cream. Choose the
Are oplion <A>.
2. 1O EXERCISE 2 - ICE CREAM CAD
Page2-40
Page 2- 41
1
Chapter2
PROBLEMS, PROBLEMS. "lt's not on top, it's ...... "

Has the elegance of your Ice Cream 's design been marred by the
mysterious manifestation of the cherry, down the side rather than
on top ?
In Lhc prompt arca yo u are now askcd for dcta ils abo ut thc Hatch
pattcrn. Wc will makc our ha tchi ng slant a t the dc fau lt 45 dcgrcc:;_
<UETURN>. Changc th c dist a n ce to 2, < R ETU R N>. Whe n
promptcd for cross-hatching, say "Yes" < Y >, <R ET U RN >
If your cherry has formed on the side of your Ice Cream, sclect
<L> for Linc from the Main Menu. Is NearPoint mode still on ?
If it is, change to ScreenPos <S> and redraw your cherry. To do
so follow the preceding instructions again but making sure that NearPoint is OFF. To erase your errant cherry see below.
REMEMBER: TurboCAD always dcfaults to the last mode you used
and as a consequence can sometimes frustrate the unsuspecting firsttime user. In this instance, the last mode you used was NearPoint.
When you defined the point where you wanted the cherry to be, it
"snapped" to the nearest point.
DELETING THE LAST ENTITY YOU DREW

Press Delete <Del>. You will see the Erase Menu appear. Press <S>
for laSt. This will erase your cherry, the last entity you drew. (Normally, you key in the first lettcr of lhe oplion you want. However,
laSt is one of lhe few where you do nol. pOlygon is anolher.)
TIP: Your drawing has reached a stage where il now makes scnse
to save it. If somelhing goes wrong, you can always relurn Lo your
basic Ice Cream drawing.
SAVING
You have two options, bolh of which access lhe Pull Down Menus.
Press lhe Transfer Function Key, <F3>, lo access lhe Pull Down
Menus. Use the Righl Arrow key lo move to lhe "Files" option. If
iL is highlighled, press <RETURN> and do lhe same again wilh
"Save Drawing" . The allernalive is lo use <Clrl-1<'>. This will lakc
you direclly lo lhe Files Menu. Selecl Save and lhen press
<RETURN>.
HATCHING
This is TurboCAD's way of filling areas wilh differenl line pallerns.
IL is very useful for highlighting or giving a drawing deplh. We are
going lo pul a criss-cross pattern into our Ice Cream Cone.
From lhe Main menu, press <H> for Halch.
Page2-42
Ou tl i ne
Hatch
Po in t
20
Out! i n e:
Po i n t
lr c
Er a s e
r
~
t
t
Me n:
2 112
CI
He
0 P 1 '
You are now promptcd to outl inc thc arca th at is to be hatchcd .

Movc th c cursor closc to thc Po int (50 50) whcrc wc s tartcd dra w ing
th c conc. Prcss <RETURN>. No ticc th at an astc risk appcars ovcr
thc Po int (5 0 50) . Movc c losc to th c Po int ( 20 5 0) and p rcss
<RETURN>. Anothcr astcrisk appcars.
NOTE
Whcn Ha tching, you are automatical ly in NcarPoi nt modc. Yo u do

not havc to go to thc cxac t Point Iocati on. In th is way, TurboCA D
ma kcs thc crcati on o f th e Hatch o ull inc casicr and lcss ti mc-con s uming. You must, howcvcr, be closc to thc Poin t you want. Yo u
ca nnot be bctwcc n two Points .
Continuc down to thc bottom of th c conc. Place th c cursor nca r thc
bottom and p rcss <RETURN>. Although yo u ha vc now outlincd
thc conc, Hatch ing rcquircs yo u lo closc thc sclcc tcd arca . Do this
by rcturning to thc Point (50 5 0) and marking it aga in. Tu rboC A D
will takc th is as a comrnand to Hatch th c arca dc fin cd with as tcrisks .
2. 10 EXERCISE 2 - ICE CREAM CAD

Page2- 43
...
Chapter 2
The TurboCAD Tutora!
St
40
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
11enu :
Are
Change
Dinension
FancyLlne
Dcs tination Point
Copy
Scree n Pos
230
100
Po intDe f:
Sc r eeriPos
NearPoi nf
Hatch
Llne
Coordsllbs
Re1ati ve
neasure
Point
Pol a r
Sketch
Te>et
MidPt Li ri
EridPt llrc
Ore Ang l e
Ouit
On Are P t
Llne Pt
lnters ec t
Men: 204
Cl
L
~ 2 01
He
Now, press <F8>, thc Copy Function key.

When asked to choose from Linear/Radial/Array, press <RETURN>
to select Linear by default. Now, the Prompt Line asks you for a
Refcrence Point. Position the cursor in thc center of the lec Cream
and press <RETURN> . You can position the cursor anywhcre on
thc drawing. Knowing that it is centcred will allow your mind's
cyc to gauge more accuratcly how the drawing will copy to a new
arca .
Page2-44
Digiti ser
8 P t
COPYING AN ENTITY
We will now Copy the lee Cream to another part of the drawing.
Position the cursor to the left and below your lee Cream. Press the
Window Function Key, <F6>, and use the Up Arrow and Right
Arrow keys to enclose the drawing completely. Only the entity, the
drawing, will be copied. The space betwccn the drawing and the
window is of no consequencc.
llor & Rad

Ver & Ra d
X & llngl e
V & Arigle
CI
He
0 P 1
You are no w asked for a Dcstination Poin t. Move the c ursor to

co-ordina lc (230 l 00) and press <RETURN> . Wc are go ing to cnlarge the Ice Cream by 230 % by ma king thc X and Y scaling both
2.3. (Thc defau lt is 1: 10)
X scalng :
Y sca/ng :
{J
~;
n
1
1'
<2 .3> <RETURN>

<2.3> <RETURN>
but re tain th c default scttings for the foll o wing .

Rotation :
<O> <RETURN>
Repettons
< 1> <RETURN>
2. 1O EXERC!SE 2 - ICE CREAM CAD

Page 2- 45
;1
:
f;
\j
,1
1

Chapter 2
-~?30
100
Menu :
Are
Change
Dinension
FancyLine
Hateh
Lino
ne asure
Poin-t
Sketch
Te><t
Ouit
you what routine to follow. It also duplicates the qucry in thc Prompt
Line. The Command Column contains the key board c om mands that
you must invoke. We are now going to go back to the o rigina
drawing and copy it again.
<F6>
Window Function Key
Expand the Window with Arrow Keys.
<FB>
Copy Function Key
<L Copy> <RETURN>
Linear/Radial/Array :
<Centre of Ice Cream> <RETURN>
Reference Point :
l~
Men:
202
Make the mode ScreenPos if you have not already done so and
position the cursor on co-ordinatc (90 140) for the Dcsti nation Point.
Press < RETUR N>. Then:
Cl
He
L 0 P 1
Plot
A largc ice cream appcars on the right haml sidc of your Draw ing
<2>
<2>
<310>
<1>
X scaling :
Y scaling :
Rotation :
Repetitions
Graphics prlnt
Read
Urlte
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
F iles
Are
Arca. OR DOES IT!
lf you havc not cxpcricnccd a prohlcm, yo u may wan l to skip this

scction. Wc rccommcnd thal you rcad it.
a sure
Point
l\IORE PROllLEl\IS. " ll's not on top, it's ins idc ! "
lf your ncw drawin g has produccd itsc lr ovc r your o ri gi nal Ice C rcam
Conc, you havc anothcr va riation o r " thc chcrry down th c sidc"
problcm wc cxpcricnccd carlicr. Again, are you in Nca rPoi nl modc
lf you are in ScrccnPos modc, you should nol havc cxpcricnccd
Ouil
a problcm in Copying.
Rcmc111bcr, NcarPo int "snaps" to thc ncarcst Point. Now, yo u madc
th c Rdcrcncc Point thc centre o f th c lec Crcam ami th c Dcstin ation
Poinl (230 100). Whilst this Dcstination Point is on thc rar s idc of
thc Drawing Arca, NcarPoint has causcd your Copy lo "s nap" to
th c ncarcsl Poinl. ll is no womlcr thal you havc two Ice C rca ms
ovcrlapping cach othcr
Once you ha vc suecessfully eopicd an cnlargcd lec Crcam to th c
righl sidc of your Drawin g Arca, il is tim e to Save it again. You
ha ve too much lo lose. Prcss <C trl-F >.
Now that you are more familiar with TurboC AD , wc will follow a
new Command Convcntion. Thc lnstruetion Column on the ldt tells
2.10 EXERC/SE 2 - ICE CREAM CAD

Page 2- 46
Sketch
Te><t
Men:
2081
Cl
He
L
0 P 1
TIP: You will noticc thal your Ice Cream is anglcd a t 3 1O dcgrccs.
Remembcr, TurboCAD calculales angles anti-clockw isc.
Again, it is lime to Savc your drawing.
Now, lry populating the top lcft hand comer and thc cc ntcr of thc
Drawing Arca between thc two largc chcrries with Ice Crcams
Page2-47
Chapter2
SMALLER than thc original. Do not place any drawings in the
open area in the cenler. We are going to pul Tcx.t into this spacc.
Once you have finishcd, Save your drawing again.
TEXT
We will now add Tcx.t lo the drawing. Position your cursor on coordinale (80 70). Sclccl lhe Tex.l, <T> oplion from lhe Main Menu.
Use CAPITAL lctters only. Begin by typing in thc lex.t, lhcn follow
lhese lnslruclions and Commands.
<AN EXERCISE> <RETURN>
<10> <RETURN>
<18> <RETURN>
<RETURN>
Text:
Text Width
Text Height :
lndicate Point
You will see how lhe Tcx.l slarls at co-ordinale (80 70) and movcs
across lhe screen. Now go down lo co-ordinale (80 50).
<IN ICE CREAM CAD> <RETURN>
<10> <RETURN>
<18> <RETURN>
<RETURN>
Text:
Text Wdth
Text Height :
lndicate Point
Envlronnent
Layers
Conflguratlon
Text
~
Dinensions
~- -
.. -
Other entltles
1
, ... I
3.080
TurboCAD Directory of C:,TCSPEC,

COltPLEX IIALIC
HCJRl1AL
SIMPLEX
'~"~
Change
Dinension
I ""
Move to co-ordinate (140 40).

Use lower case letters only.
Text:
<by> <RETURN>
Text Width :
<5> <RETURN>
Text Height :
<9> <RETURN>
lndicate Point
<RETURN>
FONTS
We are now go ing lo change lhe Fonl for lhc las l linc of tcx.t. Th is
will comprise one word - YO UR FIRST NAME. Position lhe c ursor
where you wanl your name lo fal l.
Use CAPITAL lcllers only. Decide for yourself whcrc you wa111 to
indicatc lhc Point, i.e., whcrc your namc will start. Is your narnc
long or short ? Try not to run thc tcx.t into an entily.
To changc the Fonl, follow this proccdurc. From the Main M cnu
prcss the Setup Function Key <F2>.
Select Text with Right Arrow Key
Se/ect Font with Down Arrow key
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
You will see that the default font is NORMAL. When you presse<l
return the highlight disappeared. If thc cursor is blin king, press the
<Fl> Help Key. This will open a window in which is displayed a
Iist of available Font Files. Use the Arrow Keys to select one. We
suggest COMPLEX. Press <RETURN> to go back to the Tex.t Pull
Down Window. To return to the Main Menu, press <Ese>. You have
changed Fonts.
Hatch
Ouit
T
Page 2-48
AN EXERCJSE
,
IN ICE CREN1 CAD
by
n.,,,, tss
CI
He
L 8 P 1
2.10 EXERCISE 2- ICE CREAM CAD
Page2-49

Chapter2
152
113
Henu :
tbe cursor, (EndPt Are). Generally, it is available in ali intersection

modes.
Are
Change
Dil"leflsion
F.,ncyLine
Hatch
Llne
ttessure
Point
Sketch
Text
AN EXERCISE
IN ICE CREAM
t:ry
Qui t
cm
LUIGL
11en: 188
Cl
L
He
INTERRUfYI'lNG LINE'S FIRST POINT, NEXT POINT,

NEXT POINT ROUTINE
When using the Line option, <L>, in ScreenPos mode, you must
define your First point. You do this with <RETURN> and are then
asked to define tbe Next point. Move tbe cursor to the Next point
with the cursor control keys and press <RETURN>.
You continue defining Next points until you want to stop or break
the line and continue elsewhcre. lf you want to do the lattcr, it is
useful to know that you do not have to prcss <Ese>. Simply prcss
<RETURN> twice on thc last Next point and TurboCAD asks you
for a First point again. Make the break and eontinue with Firsl
point, etc.
8 P t
Now, you c:-.n complete this exercise by inserting your name into
tbe drawing. Before you do so, Save your drawing first. lf you
experience problems, simply Dclete the Text by pressing <Del> to
invoke the Erase Menu and <T> for Text.
A FINAL TIP: Don't try to add text with the NearPoint modc on
- unless you plan to derive a positive benefit from doing so. Your
Text will "snap" to the Nearest Point !
HJNfS AND TIPS

lf you have worked this far through the Tutorial, you have come a
long way since first installing TurboCAD. Here are a few more
hints and tips to help you along.
NEARPOINT IS RIGHT ONTARGET EVERYTIME

Often it is imperative that the cursor be positioned exactly at the
end of a line or on a particular point. Generally, it is much easier
to position the cursor with Nearpoint mode than to waste time trying
to position the cursor visually.
Position the cursor close to the point first. Choose the Line option,
<L>, with Nearpoint mode and press <RETURN>. The cursor will
"snap" exactly to the required point. Now, knowing that the cursor
is positioned exactly on the point, press <Ese> to go to the Main
Menu option you want.
SNAP
The ScreenPos mode is often not exact enough for architects and
engineers who require spot-on accuracy. TurboCAD's "snap" facility
is a powerful feature of TurboCAD. lt will save time by helping
to pinpoint .'.:xact locations witbout the nced for co-ordinates. Be
sharp - "snap" to it !
When in Line m0de, the "snap" facility will find points, as you
have scen with NearPoint mode. Amongst thc range of short-cut
services that "snap" provides, it will find the middle of lines, (MidPt
Lin) and the end point of an are closest to where you positioned
Page2-50
2.1 O EXERC/SE 2 - ICE CREAM CAD
Page2- 51

Chapter2
<Ese>
Go baek to the Main Menu
<L>
Seleet Une
Make sure you are in SereenPos mode
<S>
<70 50> <RETURN>
First point
<70 160> <RETURN>
Next point
2.11 EXERCISE 3 - A SIMPLE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

We will now draw a very simple Electrical Circuit courtesy of
Widget Co. It comprises a printed circuit board connection, a line,
a switch, a pulse and a resistor. With your developing TurboCAD
skills, this should take less than 30 minutes.
BROKEN LINES
Position the cursor on co-ordinate (70 50). We are going to start
by drawing a vertical broken line. To do this we must change the
default Une Type to a Une Dash Type.
Env l roonent
Layers
Conflguratlon
Text
Dlnenslons
Hext point
Def 2pt line
SereenPos
+
1
Other entltles
Peo Colour
"'--
Layer
lhlckness
Line lype
70
160
PointDef:
ScreenPos
NearPoint
CoordsAbs
Relative
Polar
MidPt Lin
EndPI lrc
Ore lngle
On Ore PI
Line Pt
1
8 ion
8 ine
Hor & Rad

Ver & Rad
)( & Ongle
Y & Angle
2
Llfl8
11elSStJJ"lt
lntersect
Digitiser
Point
Sketch
lext
Men:
Quit
2051
CJ
He
L
0 P 1
"""' 285
Cl
L
Press <F2>Setup Function Key

Use Right Arrow Key to go to the
Other Entities pu/1-down menu.
Use the Down Arrow Key to go
down to Line Type. /t reads O.
""
8 p t
<F2>
<RETURN>
The cursor is now blinking behind the nought. A blinking cursor is

always an indication that TurboCAD is waiting for input from you.
Change the Une Type to 2.
You have drawn a vertical broken line. TurboCAD has four diffcrcnt
Line Types. You can crcate your own specific Line Typcs ami havc
as many as you want. Before we proceed wilh our ckctrical widgcl,
you musl resel lhe Line Type or TurboCAD will rclain il as lhc
<lefaull Linc Type.
<2> <RETURN>
Press <F2> Setup Function Key

Other Entities is highlighted
Une Type 2 is highlighted
Type in O
Go baek to Main Menu
<F2>
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
<O> <RETURN>
<Ese>
An allcrnalive way lo do lhis is lo use an <Alt> kcy command.

Keying in <Alt> <D> will allow you lo change lhe Line Dash Typc
on the Prompl Line.
Now, go lo co-ordinalc (25 100). Makc sure lhal you are in ScrccnPos modc. lf lhc Prompl Line tells you lhal you are nol, prcss <S>.
Une Type is now highlighted and shows a setting of 2.
Page2- 52
2. 11 EXERC/SE 3 - A SIMPLE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT
2. 11 EXERCISE 3 - A SIMPLE ELECTRICAL C/RCUIT
Page 2 - 53
Chapter2
Are
RadCentre
lndicate Centre point
Radius :
Start angle : O
End angle : 360
<A>
<R>
<RETURN>
<B> <RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
Hext point
Def 2Pt llne
ScreenPos
~'i
HearPoint
RelatiYC
Po l ar
Are
MidPt Lin
EndPt Rrc
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
"-
Hatch
V & Angle
lnter~ect
Sketch
Dlgltlser
Te><t
Me":
C)ui t
CI
L
<RETURN>
(110 100) <RETURN>
You have drawn a line. Prcss <Ese> to go back to the Main Menu.
Position the cursor lcm above the end of the line. Press <L> for
Line again.
<RETURN>
Now, go back down to the end of the line you have drawn and
move on lcm.
/ndicate this as the Next point

lndicate the next point
Page2-54
You bave drawn a line with a circuit break or switch . We are now
going to draw a pulse. (Well, according to Widget Co., th is is a
pulse! Like many engineering and design companies, Wid get Co.
have developed their own shapes and symbols.)
H"
8 P 1
You have drawn a circle. With the cursor still on the Center point,
press <L> for Line. Follow the Prompt Line.
lndicate the first point
284
Cl
He
L 8 P 1
"""' 2841
/ndicate the first point

lndicate the next point
llor & Rad

Ver & Rae!
)( & Angle
Llne
tleasur"
Point
PointDef:
ScreenPos
CoordsAbs
tlenu :
Change
Dinension
FnncyLine
tes
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
<RETURN>
<155 100> <RETURN>
Press <Ese> to go back to the Main Menu.

Press <A> for Are.
Press <C> for Centre&Pt.
lndicate the Center point of the circle you are abou t to draw al
co-ordinate (170 100). You are now asked to indicate the Point on
the circumference. Return to co-ordinate ( 155 100). You must now
fill in sorne details of your circlc.
Start angle : 180

End angle : 360
< O><RETURN>
<RETURN>
You have drawn a circle. The radius was dependent on the distance
you placed the Ccnter point from the end of the linc. Try it again
if you like. Erase it witb <Del> and <A>.
Now, we are going to draw a diagonal linc through thc c ircle. Posi tion thc cursors top and right cross-hairs parallel with the bottom
and lcft sidc of the circle.
2.11 EXERCISE 3 - A SIMPLE ELECTRICAL C/RCUIT
Page2-55
Chapter2

<RETURN>
Press <L> for Une
<RETURN>
Indica.te the First point
lndicate the Next point by placing the cursor
in a position diagonal/y opposite the first point <RETURN>
Hext point
Def 2pt line
ScreenPos
185
121
Sketchlng
296
185
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
CoordsAbs
RelatlYe
Polar
(')r-~~~~~ ~~--1
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
1
-+--------;----~
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
llor & Rad

Ver & Rad
X & Angle
'i & Angle
Men: 282
CI
L
Intersect
He
8 P 1
Dlgltiser
nen: 283
CI
L
He
8 P 1
You have just drawn a resistor and completed an elementary electrical circuit. Quit, <Q>, this exercise. You now have the option of
either saving your drawing to disk or deleting it. We suggest you
do the latter and read the next section.
You have drawn the line through the circle. Schematically, this now
represents a Pulse. Press <Ese> to go back to the Main Menu. Now,
place the cursor on the circumference of the circle opposite the
line. Draw a Line to co-ordinate (210 100). Press <Ese> to go back
to the Main Menu.
W!th the cursor still at the end of the Iine you have just drawn,
select the Sketch mode.
Sketch
Switch it On
<S>
<RETURN>
Use the PgUp Arrow to move up and right approximately lcm.

Use the PgDn Arrow to move down and right 2cms.
Use the PgUp Arrow to move up and right 2cms.
Repeat these two sequences twice.
U,,e the Pg Dn Arrow to move down and right lcm.
Extend the line for 3 or 4 cms.
Press <RETURN>to switch Sketch Off
Page2-56
2.11 EXERC/SE 3 - A SIMPLE ELECTRICAL CIRCU/T
Page2-57
The TurboCAD Tutoriaf
Chapter2
You will note that the plygon oplion is one of the few w here you
do not use the first letter. ("P" is for Point.) The Prompt Une should
be telling you that you are in ScreenPos mode on point (200 130)
and asking you to indicate the center of thr polygon you are about
to create.
2.12 EXERCISE 4 - HATCHING AND DIMENSIONING

COMPLEX HATCHING
As you have already learned, Hatching is TurboCAD's way of filling
areas with different line patterns. lt is very useful for highlighting
aspects of a drawing, as well as giving it depth and a professional
image.
HOW A HATCH WORKS
A TurboCAD Hatch, the asterisk that you see when you define a
point, has almost 200 points or sides to it. These points connect to
other points via the angle and distance that you define and provides
the outline of the area to be hatched. You define the number of
points neeessary to batch a shape and then return to the first point
to close the Hatch. This can be used to generate very complex areas
of hatching.
Jndlcate centre
Polygons
ScreenPos
288
138
A six-sided polygon appears 011 the scree11 and you are rcturned to
the Main Mc11u. Now, draw a small circle in the ce11tcr of the
polygon . Th is wi ll turn your polygon into a 2-D reprcsentation o f
a nut.
<A>
<C>
<RETURN>
Are
Centre&Pt
Centre Point
PointDef:
Se raen Pos
You are now asked to indicate a po int 011 the circumference. Move
the cursor to Co-ordinate ( 190 130).
HearPoint
CoordsAbs
Relatlve
Polar
<RETURN>
<35> <RETURN>
<6> <RETURN>
<RETURN>
lndicate Centre
Radius : 35
Sides : 6
Start Angle : O
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Centre point
Are Cent
& pt
ScreenPos
Line Pt
Hor & Rad
Ver & liad
X & Angle
'l & flngle
ln1:ersect
Digltlser
11e":
2051
CI
He
8 P 1
Page2-58
<F>
<O>
2.12 EXERCISE 4- HATCHING AND DIMENS/ONJNG
130
Po intDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
Coordslbs
Relat ive
Po lar
MidPt Li n
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
L lne PI
& Rad
llor
Ver
& Rad
X & lngl e
'l
& Angl e
J ntersect
Digitiser
We will begin this exercise by creating a polygon. First, create a

new drawing or erase an old one. Place the cursor on co-ordinate
(21)0 130).
Fancylines
pOlygon
200
Men:
204~1
CI
He
Point on C ircumference
Start Angle : 180
End Angfe : 360
2. 12 EXERCISE 4 - HATCHING AND DIMENSIONING
0 P 1
<RETURN>
<O> <RETURN>
<360> <RETURN>
Page 2- 59
Chapter2
The TurboCAO Tutora/

As an exercise, we will now hatch the center of the nut. We will
delete it later. Return the cursor lo the Center Point of both the
Are and Polygon.
Hatch
Outl lne
Are
209
138
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Out 1 ine
Hatch
Are
244
138
Out 1 ine :
Point
nrc
[rase
Outl lne:
Polnt
@+
Are
Erase
MeM: 201
CI
He
L ll P 1
MeM:
2821
CI
He
L 8 P 1
An Are is reprcsenled inlernally as a Ccnter Poinl, a Radius, a Starting Poinl and an Ending Point. Hatching will creale enough mullipointed asterisks as to create a multi-sided polygon that will
adequately representa circle. When hatching Ares, TurboCAD needs
internally represcnled Points in order lo define the oullinc of the
many-sided polygon Lhal will cmulate the Are. Wc will now Halch
Lhc Are in Lhc cenlcr of thc nul. Choosc Hateh from the Main Menu.
Hatch
Now, The Prompt Line is asking you for an Outlinc and lelling you
thal you are in Point modc. Notiee that lhe Hatch Menu has come
up. ll has thrce options - Point, Are, Erase. With thc cursor in Lhe
centre of Lhc Are, press <RETURN>.
Outline
<RETURN>
An aslerisk appcars in thc centcr of lhe Are. Now, sclecl Are, <A>,
from the Hatch Mcnu . Place the cursor on or near lo thc Are and
press <RETURN>. The Are is outlincd wilh aslcrisks. Rcturn the
cursor to Lhe first poinl you madc in the centre of thc Are, change
to thc Point option, <l, and press <RETURN>. The cirelc is
hatched.
<H>
Do nol be coneerned if no further options appear in the Main Menu

arca. They will. You are askcd to indicalc the angle of lhe Hatch,
e.g. the angle at whieh thc lines will run aeross thc serccn. Acecpt
Lhe default of 45.
Angle: 45
Oistance : 2
Cross (Y/N) ? N
<RETURN>
<2> <RETURN>
<Y> <RETURN>
Why, you are probably asking, could we not just ha ve outlincd thc
circlc using the Are modc ? Why ali thc nccd to movc backwards
and forwards to the centcr of the cirele ?
Thc answcr is that TurboCAD cannot Hateh circlcs. lt approximates
cirelcs as polygons. lt treats them as a strange shapc for a polygon
where one side is presscd upon another. It rcquircs that wc use the
Starting Point and Ending Point of the circlc to draw the polygon.
Thc Starting Point ancl Ending Point of thc Are happcn to be thc
samc in this case .
Now, wc will try somcthing more complex. Firsl Dclctc thc Hatch
by positioning lhc cursor in the hatchcd cirele and prcssing lhc
<Del> kcy. This invokcs lhe Erase Mcnu. Press <H> for Hatch.
Page 2- 60
2.12 EXERCISE 4 - HATCHING ANO OIMENSIONING
2. 12 EXERCISE 4 - HA TCHING ANO OIMENS/ON/NG
Page 2- 61
Chapter2
This will delcte the Hatch. Prcss <FS> to clcan up the drawing
with Redraw.
Jndcate first point
Vert Di,..,nsion
HearPoint
163
152
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
CoordsAbs
Relatlve
Polar
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
llor & Rad
Ver & Rad
X & Angle
Y & Angla
lnterseci
Dlgltiser
Men : 2 02
CI
Ne
L 0 P t
We wi ll bcgin w ith thc nu l that wc have just hatched. T he c ursor

should be on the top right ha nd point. From the Main Menu, selcct
Dimensions .
Dimensions
Vertical
lndicate firs t point
Now, indicate whe re yo u want your ve rtical linc to fall a longsidc

thc nu t. Move thc cursor s lightly beyond thc furthcst righ t point of
thc nu t. Prcss <RETURN >.
lf you havc crcatcd a nut w ith thc Tutorial's suggcstcd sizcs, th c
dimcnsion should rcad " 6 1". (lf it is too small for you to read, pu l
an <F6> Window around it and Zoom In.)
Now, lct's dimcnsion the top left side of the hcxagon.
Dimensions
Para/le /
<O>
<P>
Bt
Mcnu
Are
Fa ncyLinc
lfotch
L i ne
Me a sure
Po int
Sketch
Text
Uu it
1i
USEFUL DIMENSIONING
One o f TurboCAD's most powcrful fcalurcs is its ahility to auto maticall y rc-dimcnsion a drawing that has bccn c nla rgcd or rcduccd.
In this cxcrcisc, wc will introduce you to this vcry practica! and
useful fa cility.
2.12 EXERC/SE 4- HATCHING ANO O/MENSIONING
55
Ch ange
D inension
You are, of course, in Point mode . Now changc to Are mod c and
move thc cursor to thc cdgc of thc ccntc r circlc. Prcss < RETURN>
and you will sce how thc circlc is ringcd with astc risks. Changc
bac k to Point modc - TurboCAD will "bccp" if you do not - thcn
go back to thc last point tha t you indicatcd on th c hcxagon ami
define it again. Now, go to thc first point lhat you dc fincd at thc
top right point ami indicate it again.
Page 2 - 62
<RETUR N>
To indicate the second point, place the cursor al the bollom cdgc
o f the nut opposi te the first point and press < R ETURN>.
Movc the cursor close to th c top right hand poin t o f thc polygo n,
(in actual fac t, with six sidcs it is a hexagon) . You do not havc to
position thc c ursor exacll y as Ha tch is anothcr "snap" modc. Choosc
Hatch from the Main Mcnu and procccd to hatc h your hcxagon
throu gh ali six points. Kccp the samc spccifications from thc prcv ious Hatch.
TurboCAD will now hatch thc nut lcaving the ccntc r clcar.
<O>
<V>
Mcn : 197
CI
Ne
L
0 P 1
2.12 EXERC/SE 4- HATCHING ANO DIMENSION/NG
Page 2 - 63
Chapter 2
Rcpcat the previous procedure . Note that Dimcnsions also uses the
"snap" facility for total accuracy. The new dimcnsion reads "35"
for onc sidc of the hcxagon. Zoom out if you havc Zoomcd in !
Now, place thc cursor bclow and to thc lcft of the nut. Create a
Window with thc <F6> Function Kcy. Enclosc thc nut and its dimcnsions fully. Copy it with <F8> to thc bottom lcft of thc scrccn.
Make the approximatc ccnter of the nut's circle your Rcfcrcncc
Point. Enlargc thc nut by 50% i.c. make thc X a!lll Y scaling 1.5,
and leave thc Rotation thc same.
Once thc cnlargcd nul is drawn, you can sec immcdiately that
TurboCAD has automatically rc-dimensioncd thc drawing. The vertical dimension now reads "91 ". Thc shorter, parallcl dimcnsion al
the top left now reads "52".
2.13 EXERCISE S - MAKING CONNECTIONS

This exercise will teach you how lo Creale Shapes, how to Store
them in a Library and how lo Relrieve ancl Inserl them into a draw ing. You will also learn lo Slore Values in lhe Calculator, to use a
Grid and make effective use of Zooming.
You will be required to access an incomplete eleetrical eircuit draw ing which is stored on System Disk 2. You will complete it with
the shapes of transistors and resistors which you will create, store
and inserl into the drawing.
Give yourself sufficient time lo complete this exercise in onc sitting.
As this is a fairly complicated exercise, lwo hours or more may be
required by any new user of TurboCAD.
Whilc this is an cxtremcly simple example, TurboCAD can use this

fcaturc to pcrform complcx rcdimensioning cxcrciscs . Thc <F2>
SetUp Function Kcy providcs furthcr options to you when working
with Dimcnsions . Read the Command Scction to cxpand your
knowledgc about this indispensable featurc.
Page 2- 64
2.12 EXERCISE 4- HATCHING ANO DIMENSIONING
2.13 EXERCISE 5 - MAKING CONNECTIONS
Page2- 65
Chapter2
<+>
<+>
Zoom In
Zoom In
PART 1: A TRANSISTOR
START
We are going lo draw a Transistor and slore il in our Shapc Library.
Creale a new drawing called TUTOR3. The Syslem defaults are
standard. Use Paper Size A4 and a Scalc of 1: 1.
ZOOM IN, ZOOM OUT AND ZOOM RETURN

Effeclively we have crealed a circle wilh a ltnm radius. It is loo
small lo see and use bul lwo clicks of lhe Zoom ln key, (Grey + ),
have expanded il lo a workable size . Conlinue lo press Lhe Zoom
In key until thc circle disappears off the screen. Now prcss Lhe
Zoom Out key, (Grey -). This will relurn you to Lhe original draw ing
size one step at a time. A fasler way of doing this is lo use thc
Zoom Retu rn key, (Backspace ), which descends direclly lo lhc
original size.
TIP: A very useful and praclical convcnlion lo observe is lo design

ali your Shapes l mm in sizc. Thus if yo u rcquire a 1Omm transistor
you simply enlarge il 10 Limes. A l7.23mm diodc dcsigned as lmm
is simply mulliplied by it's actual size ie. 17 .23. This convenlion
saves a lol of unnecessary calculalions, head scralching and worn
fingernails. Remember, however, lhal il is nol always suilable for
sorne jobs.
NOTE: If yo ur circle runs out of thc drawing arca aflcr o nc click

of the Zoom In key, check if the Zoom Magnificalion 's dcfault sctting is st an d ard (5.000). [Press F2 Se t up , En v iro nmc n t
<RETURN>.] Allernatively, do nol press so hard and long on thc
Zoom In kcy. Try lo make quicker keystro kes.
tlenu :
Are
Change
Dinension
FancyLine
Hatch
X relatlve :
Line
Def 2pt llne
Re l atlve
Measure
Point
Qui t
2031
CQ
Cl
He
L 8 P t
Page 2- 66
<A>
<R>
<S> <RETURN>
<1 > <RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
2.13 EXERC/SE 5 - MAK/NG CONNECTIONS
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are:
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Ll ne Pt
llor & Rad
Ver & Rad

X & Angle
V & Angle
lntersect
Dlgltlser
We will begin by drawing an Are wilh a Radius of !mm in Lhe

cenler of lhe Drawing Arca. It will be so small you will havc lo
use lhe Zoom ln facilily lo enlarge il.
Commence by drawing an Are

RadCentre
Define the Are centre point using
the ScreenPos point definition mode
Radius
Start Ang/e : O
End Angle : 360
PointDef :
ScreenPos
HearPoint
Relatlon.
Polar
Text
11en:
185
Coord1;Atn:
Sketch
140
tlen :
2031
CI
He
8 P t
We are now going lo creale sorne lines within Lhe circle.
Select the Line command

then Re/ative point definition mode
X Relative :
Y Relative :
<L>
<R>
<-1.3> <RETURN>
<.4> <RETURN>
Page2- 67
Chapter2

<O> <RETURN>
<-.8> <RETURN>
X Relative
Y Relative
again. We will use an intcrruptcd line <lraw to place the cursor al

an exact position. Move the cursor to near the top of the vertical
line an<l prcss <RETURN>. The cursor will "snap" to exactly th'
cnd of this line's nearest point. Abort the drawing of thc linc lcaving
the cursor positioned cxactly at thc cnd. Press <Ese>.
A vertical line appcars to the lcft of the circlc 's centcr.

<Ese>
<L>
Now, go back to the Main menu

and se/ect the Une command
Now, select the Une command

<L >
Relativa point definition mode
<R>
X Relativa :
<O> <RETURN>
Y Relative :
<-.2> <RETURN>
ArcAngla point definition mode
<A>
lndicata the are by moving the cursor
to anywhere on the are, then press
<RETURN>
Angle on Are :
<45> <RETURN>
Break the sequence by defining the same
point again using the NearPoint mode
<N> <RETURN>
Noticc that thc Prompt Jinc shows that TurhoCAD is still in Relative
point <lefinition mo<lc. Once again, TurboCAD has rcmcmhcre<l the
last mo<le you use<l ! Remembcr this !
First point
Def 2pt line
HearPoint
C0
149
104
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
Coordsflbs
Relatlve
Polar
MidPt Lin
EndPt lre
lre Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
lndicate are
Def 2pt line
Are Angle
149
106
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
Coordsflbs
flor & Rad
Relatlve
Polar
Ver & Rad

X & Angle
Y & Angla
EndPI Are
MidPI Lin
Are Angle
lntersect
Digitlser
Men:
2031
CI
He
L 0 P 1
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
flor & R<>d
Ver & R<>d
X & Ang\e
Y & Angle
lntersect
Digltlser
Wc are now going to <lraw accurately anglc<l lines from thc vertical
linc to thc circumfercncc of lhe circle .
Men:
X Relative :
Y Relative :
Select ArcAngle point definition mode
lndicate the are by moving the cursor
onto the are and pressing
Angle on Are
<O> <RETURN>
<.2> <RETURN>
<A>
<RETURN>
<-45> <RETURN>
TIP: Now, break thc scqucncc by <lcfining the same point again
using the Ncarpoint mo<le, <N>, an<l then press <RETURN>.
THIS IS A VERY USEFUL TRICK. TurboCAD will now want to
start a ncw sequcncc of lincs and will prompt for the First poinl
Page2- 68
2. 13 EXERCISE 5 - MAKING CONNECTIONS
2821
CI
He
L 11 P 1
TurboCAD will now want to start a new scqucncc of lincs an<l will
prompt for First point again.
Mid Pt Un point definition mode
lndicate the fine by moving the cursor
to the vertical fine near its centre
ArcAngfe poi1it definition mode
lndicate the are by moving the cursor
to anywhere on the are
2.13 EXERC/SE 5 - MAKING CONNECTJONS
<M>
<RETURN>
<A>
<RETURN>
Page 2- 69
Chapter2

Angle on Are :
Back to Main menu
Measure
Line
Now, move the cursor to near the
bottom diagonal line
<180> <RETURN>
<Ese>
<M>
<L>
MOVE
Gcnerate a window by moving the cursor below and to the left of
thc triangle. Press <F6> and expand the window with your Arrow
keys so that you enclose the triangle completely. We will now use
Move to place the triangle in lhe shape. hess <F7>. Position the
cursor on the bottom right hand side of the triangle and specify the
Reference point using the Nearpoint definition m ode < N > a n d
<RETURN>.
<RETURN>.
This will display thc lcngth, anglc, and X and Y displaccmcnts of

the linc. Thc Prompt Line should read:
Destlnatlon Polnt
11ove
ScreenPos
Length : 1.13 Angle : -333.2735 dX: 1.01 dY: -0.51
151
187
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
CoordsAbo;
SAVING VALU ES IN THE CALCULATOR

Save the results of the measure
Start register no :
<Ctrl-S>
<1> <RETURN>
This stores the four mcasuremcnts in TurboCAD's built-in calculator.

ll will start with with memory register 1 to which will be assigned
thc length of 1.18 . The anglc and X and Y displacemenls of thc
line will be automatically entered into memory registcrs 2, 3 and
4.
Page2- 70
Men:
206 1
Now, place thc cursor ncar thc bottom right han<l end of thc bollom
diagonal line in thc circlc and press <RETURN >.
<S> <RETURN>
<.2> <RETURN>
<3> <RETURN>
<F4>
Hor & Rae!

Ver & Rae!
X & Angle
V & Angle
CJ
He
L 0 P 1
<F>
<O>
USING V ALU ES STORED IN THE CALCULATOR

F4 is the Calculator function key. You will now see the word "Mcm"
in the prompt arca. This rcfers lo the mcmory registcrs in which
you have stored data. Simply tell TurboCAD which memory register
to use. In this case the angle was stored in registcr 2, the other
values in registers 1, 3 and 4. Key-in <2> <RETURN>. A small
triangle appcars. Wc will now Move this into the transistor shape
in order to complete it.
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
lntersec t
Dl gltlser
Now, move the cursor to an emply parl of lhe upper right-hand side
of thc screen. Wc are going to draw a small triangle which will
complete our transistor.
Se/ect Fancyline
pO/ygon
Define the polygon centre point using
the ScreenPos point definition mode
Radius :
Sides :
Start Angle :
Re!atlve
Polar
X Sca/ing :
Y Scaling:
Rotation :
1 <RETURN>
1 <RETURN>
O <RETURN>
Tbis movcs the trianglc into thc circlc. Congratulatio ns ! You ha vc

just drawn the standard electrical symbol for a transistor. Wc wil l
savc it for later use.
SAVING A SHAPE TO A LIDRARY

To do so we must first cnclosc the shapc in a window. Movc thc
cursor below and 10 thc left of the shapc, <F6>. Use thc Arrow
kcys fo cxpantl lhe window and lo cnclose thc transistor fu ll y. To
save it, prcss <Ins>.
2.13 EXERCJSE 5 - MAKING CONNECTIONS
Page2- 71

Chapter 2
Filenane To Store in:TRlHSStore Shape
150
106
PART 2: A RESISTOR
Menu :
Are
Ct1ange
Work around the transistor in lhc eenter of lhe drawing area or

Erase il wilh an <F6> Window, followed by <Del>.
Dinension
FancyLine
llatch
Line
Measure
Poinl
Sketch
Text
THEGRID
We are going lo switch on lhe Grid bul before we do, we are going
lo sel lhe Grid size. <Ctrl-E>
Oui t
Use the Arrow keys to move the

highlight to the X Grid Step
Move to Y Grid Step
Remove Pul/ Down Menu
Switch on the Grid
Men:
2021
CI
He
0 P 1
If you have not deleled lhe transistor, move lo a convenicnt free

area of the screen where you can draw lhe resistor. We will draw
lines using lhc Grid points as referenccs.
Select the Une command

ScreenPos point detinition mode
You are now asked for a rile whcrc thc drawing can be storcd.
Crcate a file called TRANS (for transistor, of coursc !)
Fi/ename To Store in
Paper: A4
Sea/e 1 : 1
NearPoint point definition mode
<N> <RETURN>
You have now saved your shape and are approximately halfway
through this cxercisc. The next step is to draw a resistor.
<L>
<S> <RETURN>
When using S.:reenPos wilh lhe Grid, the cursor will "snap" to the
nearest gricl point. Now, move the cursor close to lhe point directly
below it and press <RETURN>.
<TRANS> <RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
You are now asked to inclicate the base point. This point will be
used to eonnect the shape to other entities. Indicate thc base point
as thc lcft most cnd of thc horizontal linc by positioning the cursor
ncar this point.
<.5> <RETURN>
<.25> <RETURN>
<Ese>
<F9>
Environnent
Layers
Base Point )(
Base Point Y
>< Grid Step
Y Grid Step
.25
Zoon Magn
Pan Distance
Paper Size
Sea le
Ortho 11ode
Uindow Mode
Search Mode
Hubber Banding
Configuration
Text
0.860
0.860
0.580
5.880
50.860
A4
1.880
OFF
CLOSED
HEAR
OFF
DI
Ot
Are
Change
Dinensi on
FmcyLi ne
H..tch
Lino
11ea.surf!
Point
Sketch
Text
Ouit
""": 2821
CI
He
L 8 P 1
Page 2- 72
2. 13 EXERC/SE 5 - MAKJNG CONNECTIONS
2. 13 EXERCISE 5 - MAKING CONNECTIONS
Page2- 73
Chapter2

To continue, move to the point be/ow
and to the left
Now, be/ow and two to the right
Now, be/ow and two to the /eft
Now, below and two to the /eft
Now, below and two to the /eft
Final/y, one below
And back to the Main menu
Switch off the Grid
Hext point
Def 2pt line
..
..
ScreenPos
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
<Ese>
<F9>
152
184
~
~
Filename To Store in:

Paper: A4
Sea/e 1 : 1
<RESISTOR> <RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURf/>
Indicate the base point as the bottom of the resistor by positioning

the cursor near this point and then using the NearPoint point defini tion mode, <N><RETURN>.
This will save your drawing to the Shape Library. You are now
approximately two-thirds of the way through this exercise .
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HenrPoint
Coordsflbs
RelatiYe
Polar
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Line Pt
Hor & Rad

Ver & Rad
X & Angle
Y & Angle
lntersect
Dlgltlser
nen: 202
G
Cl
He
L 8 P 1
REDRAW
Is there a line running through your resistor shape ? This is a result

of the dots in thc Grid pattern. Press the Rcdraw Function Key,
< FS>, and TurboCAD refreshes your resistor.
SA VlNG A SHAPE TO A LIBRARY
You have now drawn a resistor. Once more, we will store the shapc
in our expanding Shape Library. We will save it in the same way
as the transistor by using a window. Move the cursor below and to
the Jeft of the resistor. Now, gencrate a window with <F6>. Use
the Arrow keys to expand the window and to enclose the resistor
fully. Save i: with <Ins>.
Store it in a file you will create called RESISTOR.
Page2-74
Page2- 75
Chapter2
PART 3: MAKING CONTACT WITH THE CIRCUITS

Quit the drawing. We will now work with the partially completed
one which is stored on System Disk 2. Hard disk users are reminded
that when they are prompled for the Work Direclory, lhey must
have a back-up copy of TurboCAD"s Syslem Disk 2 in lheir A:
drive. (Resistor and Transistor must also be on lhis disk).
<Q>
<RETURN>
<N> <RETURN>
<Y> <RETURN>
Quit
Quit (YIN) ? Y
Save Drawing (YIN) ?
Another Drawing (YIN) ?
Work Directory ?
Dual floppy disk Users
NB: Hard Disk Users
Work Drawing ?
<B:> <RETURN>
<A:> <RETURN>
<ToFinish> <RETURN>
94
107
Henu :
</ns>
/nsert a shape
34
File to insert ?
..,
124
tlenu :
Are
Change
Dinensio.-.
FancyL l ne
R3
Hatc:h
TurboCAD Dlrectory or C:'-SHDRAU. 48 Draw i ng fl les round.

DllftUlltG1 RESISTllR SHTC882 SHTC885 SHIC8116 SHIC889 SHIC818
SllIC812 SllIC013 SHIC814 SHIC815 SllIC816 SHTC817 SHI C81B
SllTC828 SHTC021 SIHC822 SHIC823 SHIC824 SHTC828 SHIC829
SllJC031 SHJC832 SIHC833 SHJC834 SHJC835 SllJC836 SHTC837
SHJC839 SHJC840 SHIC841 SHIC842 SllJC843 SHTC844 SHIC845
SHIC847 SHTC848 SHTC849 SHTC850 TllAHS IST IOFIHISll COnPLE I E
SllIC811
SllIC819
SHIC830
SHIC838
SHIC846
Sli IC851
.-.,
:;;
G-r
AS~
a~: ~ {';~~~ ~
01,........ ' \
~-..,~~~~~~~~-a--:e::-~~~~-;::o~a;---;:o;-;;;e~~o::;-:;7;--~~~~~--- ~~
07
FE
f~ ~
O li'I
G-o
D i rtenS ion
(7 ..79<)
Q9
6
1
O:;-
a-~~~~+-~~~~
FancyLine
Hatch
Llne
rleasure
Point
Sketch
Te><t
Ouit
Cl2
+
FE
Fl3
C3...4KJ
D3
Al
04
""": 152
Q.J<J
G-o
6 .....;_ (-6,.1)
6 .....; <-6..ll
..
1CI
L
He
0 P 1
You will uow be askcd which File lo inserl ? Press <Fl > and a
direclory of B: appears in a window on lhe screen. You can use
lhe Arrow Keys to selecl an option. Pressing <RET UR N> will sc lcct
il. TurboCAD will then ask you for a Referencc Poinl. Allernativcly,
you can just key TRANS in.
File to insert ?
<TRANS> <RETURN>
Use the NearPoint point definition mode
to indicate the reference point
<N> <RETURN>
o-e
07
01
Cl
He
L 8 P 1
We must make the transistor lOmm in size. W hen wc originall y

drew the transistor we made it l mm large. The advan tage o f such
a convention is now obvious. We simply make the scaling 10 in
order to obtain the required lOmm version. (Whilst this convcntion
is generally recommcnded, it is not always best ! )
Aflcr a few mmnents a drawing of an eleclrical circuil appcars on

the scrcen. You will nolice sorne blank areas. We are going lo populate lhem with the shapes of transislors and resistnrs which we have
storcd in our Shape Library.
INSERTING A SHAPE INTO A ORA WING
Move thc cursor to ncar the righl hand sidc of the line which starts
al terminal l and ends above and to the left of thc designation Q2.
Page 2- 76
2.13 EXERCISE 5 - MAK/NG CONNECTIONS
Page2 - 77
Chapter2

251
139
11enu :
Are
Change
Dinension
FnncyLine
Hatch
Line
Point
To do Lhis, move lhe cursor lo near tll' lower end of the gap to th c
lcft of R7.
Sketch
Text
lnsert a shape
Me asure
as
6
Qui t
Fl3
a-.o
07
C3.AKl
03
04
R1
""": 149
Q.;x)
(3\l)
-'V_
Cl
(-6J)
X scaling :
Y scaling :
Rotation : O
He
8 P 1
<10> <RETURN>
<10> <RETURN>
<RETURN>
You will notice how a transistor appears on lhe reference point you
dcfined. We will now inserl a series of lransislors inlo the drawing
using lhe same simple procedure bul with one extra and significant
advanlage - TurboCAD's memory.
Move the cursor lo near lhc right hand side of lhe shorl horizontal
Iine to thc left of Q9.
/nsert a shape
File to insert ?
</ns >
To see whal shapes can be inserled inlo thc drawing , prcss lh c <Fl >
Help function key. Use thc Right Arrow key to movc thc highlight
lo the file RESISTOR, and prcss <RETURN>.
o-~~~~+-~~~~
FE
lnscrl a transistor al thc righl hand cnd of cach of lhc horiwnta l

lines to lhe left of Q7, Q8 and Q 1O. When yo u ha ve fini shed, wc
will inserl lhe missing re~islors .
</ns>
<TRANS> <RETURN>
Note lhal TurboCAD has re mcmbcred thc lasl shape you inscrted.
Now, use lhe NearPoint poinl definilion mode lo indicale the Reference poinl. Again, note lhal TurboCAD has remembered the lasl
mode used .
Position the cursor exactly where you
want a shape to appear. Press
X scaling : 1O
Y scaling : 1O
Rotation : O
Use the NearPoint dcfinition mude lo indicale the Referc ncc mint.
Again, note lhal TurboCAD has remcmbercd lhc l<1sl modc you u:scd.
Press <RETURN>
X scaling : 1O
Y scaling : 10
Rotation : O
You will notice how a resistor appears on the Reference point you
defined. We will now insert a series of resislors inlo the drawing
using the same procedure.
Move the cursor to the right end of the
horizontal fine ending just above 01
File to insert ? RESISTOR
</ns >
<RETURN>
TurboCAD has remembered the last shapc thal was inserted. Use
the NearPoint definition mode lo indicale the Refercnce poinl, and
press <RETURN>. Again, note that TurboCAD has remernbercd
the last mode used.
X scaling : 1O
Y scaling : 1O
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
We now want to insert the resistor al a diffcrent oricntation or angl c.

We must changc the Rotation factor.
Rotation :
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
<-90> <RETURN>
Similarly, insert a resistor below R8.
TurboCAD has remembered thc scaling and rotation you used. The
lnscrt sequence is now a routine of <RETURN> key-presses.
Page2- 78
Page2- 79
Chapter2
11enu :
1 Are
"0
Change
2.14 EXERCISE 6- LA YERS
D i nerudon
Q9
FancyLine
Hatch
Line
Me asure
Point
Sketch
Jext
Layered drafting is a very important benefit of CAD systcais . Jt

imitates and improves upon the ID'\nual system of using multiple
sheets of clear plastic on which to draw diffcrent sections or lcves
of a complex drawing.
Qui t
Env irorv1ent
:2
Layers
Conflguratlon
Text
Dlnenslons
Other entl t
.,,.
0"0
llen: t44
GNJ
-V (-6.Jl
-
7
9 t8 ti t2
2
3
4
5
6
e
8
t
16 t7 10 t9 20 2t 22 23 24 2S 26 27 2B
32 33 34 35 36 37 39 39 40 4t 42 43 44
49 49 58 5t 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
64 65 66 b7 68 69 70 7t 72 73 74 75 76
08 et 02 B3 04 05 06 07 BB B9 911 91 92
96 97 98 99 160 t81 162 t83 164 t05 1116 t07 t8B
tt2 tt3 tt4 1t5 1t6 t17 ttB tt9 t20 t2t 122 123 124
He
CI
L 8 p t
1 Clu
i
Once you have done this the drawing is complete and should be
identical to the above drawing. lt is, in fact, an operational amplifier.
There are, however, a few things that you can still do to polish up
the drawing. Before procecding, save the completcd drawing. We
will use it for a Zooming and Panning cxerise al a later stage.
TlP: To view a drawing without the litter, ie.the dots and brokcn
lines, as well as the woolly cdges on sorne drawings, you should
refresh the screen by rcdrawing it. This will take only a few seconds.
lt is a rccommended procedure for every completed drawing. lndeed
it can be done at any time. lt is a simple process of tidying up,
like using an eraser to rub out unwanted pencil marks. Follow these
steps :
Redraw
<F5>
t3 14
15
29 30 3t
45 46 47
61 62 63
77 7B 79 '
93 94 95
169 t 10 t t t 1
t25 126 127
rilen:
gl
205
He
8 P 1
In practice, architects draw different floors of a building o n diffcrcnt

sheets of plastic, and thcn overlay them to check whether the cabling,
ducting, piping and structural supports will line up from one floor
to the next. Similarly, electrical engineers use the samc techniquc
to design the physical layout of a printed circuit board ora microchip
on one or more layers with the connections on anothc r.
TurboCAD provides designers with the same facility and impro vcs
upon it. lt allows for layering in thc same way by associating a
!ayer number with each entity in a drawing. Therc are 128 Jayers,
numbcrcd from O to 127. Each of these 128 layers can be switchcd
On or Off. This gives the same effect as removing or adding lay ers
of plastic sheeting. In effect, each !ayer could be thc floor of a
high rise building or another layer in a comple.'t microchip.
When a !ayer is active, switched "On", ali en ti ti es on that la yc r
will be displaycd and may be altered. Any attcmpt to plot or print
Page2- 80
Page 2- 81
Chapter2
a drawing will only take into consideration thc active layers. This
will allow you to produce a drawing with any combination of active
layers. Thus, TurboCAD's Layers system provides designers with
a permutation of options.
When a !ayer is made inactive, switched Off, any entity associated
with that layer can neither be altered, plotted nor printed. If an
entity is drawn on the screen and its associated layer is switched
Off, that entity will still be visible on the screen, (although it will
neithcr plot nor print). To remove the entity, the Redraw Function
Key, <FS>, must be used to clear the screen. Only then will the
screen display entities associated with active levels.
Layers are ctivated by the <F2> SetUp Function Key. Ares, lines,
tcxt and dimensions default to diffcrcnt layers but may be set to
the same !ayer. Once a layer has been set up as the default, ali
drawing elements will go to that !ayer until that default !ayer is
changcd.
NOTE
lf ali dimensions are associated with a !ayer and that !ayer is deac-
tivated, then the !ayer containing the dimensions will NOT automatically be adjusted when the drawing is changcd as is normally
the case.
2.15 EXERCISE 7 - ZOOMING AROUND A ORA WING

ZOOM IN
Al thc time of starting a new drawing, y0u set the scaling factors
to show a scrccn view corrcsponding to the choice of papcr sizc
sclectcd. Whcn working with TurboCAD, thc scrccn acts as a "win dow" into the drawing . With the Zoom In facility you can magnify
thc vicw of a drawing in a manncr similar to a telephoto camera
lens. This is particularly useful whcn you are doing work involving
fine detail.
TurboCAD magnifies your view of the drawing by a Zoom l\1ag nification factor. This determines thc dcgree by which a drawing
will be magnified evcry time thc Zoom In kcy is prcssed . Th c Zoom
Magnification factor can be adjusted to mcct your rcquircmcnts.
The dcfault value is 5 .00 in thc <F2> SelUp Environment.
Load lhe complctcd TOFINISH clectrical drawing and use it to practice Zooming and Panning
The Zoom Magnification factor is governed by thc dcgree tu which
magnification is deereased as TurboCAD Zooms Out. TurhoCAD
will allow magnification until it becomes too large for the computer
to handle . Thc location of the Zoom is indicated hy the cursor.
Place thc cursor in the rcquircd position and press thc Zoom In
key, Grey <+>. Thc scrccn is generated mu ch fastcr evcry time yo u
Zoom In .
PAN
When you havc Zoomcd In on a drawing, you can move around il
with thc Pan modc . Thc result is thc samc as if you had used the
much slower procedure of going from the magnified view of thc
drawing back to thc original screcn view, repositioned thc cursor
and then Zoomed In again.
Pan is switehed on by pressing thc Pan Function Kcy, <FUI>. The

word "Panning" will appear in lhe centre of lhe Prompl Line. Prcss
any onc of the cursor control keys to indicatc thc direction in whi c h
you wanl to Pan. The screcn will Rcdraw in thc new localion . The
Panning distance can be adjustcd with the <F2> SetUp Function
Key.
Page2- 82

2.15 EXERCISE 7-ZOOMING AROUNDA DRAWING
Page 2- 83
Chapter 2
Rcmember, Lo use Pan, you musl have Zoomed In already. You cannol use Pan in a ful! size drawing. TurboCAD will refuse to Pan
if you are loo close lo the edge of Lhc drawing area.
YOU'RE NEVER LOST IN PAN
ll is very easy lo lose your bearings when using Pan. TurboCAD
has anlicipaled this and provides a very uscful feature Lo help you
determine whcrc you are .
Simply press <Ctrl-Fl> . This providcs you with a view pos1l1on

relativc lo lhc drawing . Your position is indicaled as a box which
bccomcs smallcr as you Zoom furlhcr inlo lhe drawing . You can
prcss any key lo rcturn lo your Zoomcd In drawing . Thc Zoom
Rcturn Kcy, Lhc Grey BackSpacc, will lakc you dircctly back Lo
thc original drawing .
Al thc C:\TC\> Prompl typc SETUP <RETURN>. Follow the mes sages on the scrccn and you will be able lo:
Targcl Disk Caching
Changc lhc dcfaull Plollcr sel.
Changc Lhe dcfaull Prinlcr sel.
Changc Lhc Input dcvicc.
Changc Lhe Scrcen typc .
Changc thc Unil Syslcm .
Finish and Save Lhc changcs made .
Quil wilhoul changing anything .
Sclccl an oplion by scrolling down Lo lhc onc you wanl, highlighlin
il and pressing < RETURN>. Make lhc changcs you want. lf yo11
decide lo changc your mind, choosc Lhc lasl oplion or use < Ese >
lo a borl.
Thcrc are many ways lo use Zoom . One is lo creale an <F6> Window
around an entity or shape and lo Lhen Zoom In on il.
Rcmcmbcr: You have three diffcrenl cursor typcs . Try Lhcm out,
<Alt-C> . Is the lar ge cursor more uscful when Zooming ?
Zoom Out with thc Grey <-> kcy. This Lakes Lime as TurboCAD
will Zoom Out cqual lo Lhc numbcr of Zoom Ins. Zoom In again,
Lhcn try Lhe Zoom Rclurn key, Grey BackSpacc. This takes you
directly back lo your papcr size limits . lnvcstigatc Lhe Auto Zoom
key, <Ctrl-IlackSpace>. ll aulomalically adjusts Lhe screcn view
so thal it maximiscs Lhc view of Lhc drawing.
Rcad up on thc Zoom Kcys in thc Command Section .
EXTRA MEMORY IN EMERGENCY

In an cmcrgcncy, you can drop thc lntcgcr Iisl which is kcpt for
fasl redraws with <Alt-1>. This frces lhc mcmory lhal TurboCAD
utilizcs for fasl Rcdraws. Normally, Lhis praclice is only used if and
whcn you are aboul lo run out of RAM drawing spacc. Watch your
Status Arca when loading largc drawings.
CHANGING THE SYSTEM DEFAULTS

Thcrc will be occasions whcn you will want lo changc Lhe Systcm
Dcfaulls. You can do Lhis casily. Lcl us assumc lhal you wanl to
changc Lhc unil of mcasurcmcnl from millimclcrss to decimal inchcs.
Quil the drawing you are in ami go back lo the DOS prompl.
Page2- 84
2. 15 EXERCISE 7 - ZOOMING AROUND A DRAWING
2. 15 EXERCISE 7 - ZOOMING AROUND A DRAWING
Page2- 85
Chapter 2
2.16 CONCLUSION
Wc hope lhal lhe TurboCAD Tulorial has cxpanded your apprecialion
of TurboCAD and lhal you are now comfortablc working wilh it.
If you havc compleled this exercisc, you are no longer a neweomcr
lo CAD. Congratulations !
Our last picce of advice lo you is lo sludy the Commands Scclion.
ll contains imporlant information which is nol covered in this brief
Tulorial. You will discover lhat TurboCAD has a wealth of sophisticaled CAD features, and is capable of designing equipment infinilely more complex lhan ice cream eones, widgets, pulses(?). and
nuts! That"s your challengc now .
TurboCAD has 3 distinct methods of input - input device buttons ,

control commands invoked by pressing command keys and drawing
commands selected from screen menus. We will discuss each in
detail, bul there are a few concepts which are gcnerally applicablc.
l. Any command can be terminated by pressing lhe ESCAPE kcy
<Ese>.
2. When TurboCAD requires that you type in sorne lext ora nurnbc r,
it will oftcn display a numher or text string alrcady - usually a
previous value or clse an estimated value. lf you wish lo use lhis
value, simply press <RETURN>. You will notice lhat if you press
any other key, the old numher will be crased first and lhe new key's
characler will appear on thc screen. If you havc typed anolhcr kcy
by mistake and wish lo relrieve lhe old value, press <Ctrl-R> to
recall the old value.
3. Any line of lexl or numbers lhal is typed in musl be cndcd by
pressing the <RETURN> key or equivalenl mouse or digilizcr but lon.
4. Everytime the compulcr requests you lo type in a distancc, lhc
dislance is to be enlered in the real world scale in millimelcrs i.e.
drawing unils.
5. Whcn spccifying anglcs, TurboCAD expecls lhey are cntercd.
using thc convention of dcgrccs increasing in a counter clockwisc
dircclion.
6. Whenever TurboCAD wants you lo enlcr a number, you may usc

a valuc slorcd in the built-in calculalor's memory (rcfer to thc sec lion on the CALCULATOR <1.<'4>).
7. When spccifying cxisting lines andares, TurboCAD can work in
2 search modes (rcfer lo lhe SETUP Environmenl < F2> ).
Page2- 86
2.16 CONCLUS/ON
Page 3- 1
Chapter3
The Turbocad Commands
3.2 MAIN MENU
3.1 FUNCTION KEYS
<1'4>
<1'5>
< F6>
<F7>
<F'8>
<F9>
<FJO>
Bring up a hclp window

Spccify the drawing envimnmcnt
Specify what layers are active/inactive
Spccify the hardware conflguration
Spccify dcfaults to use for text
Spccify de fau lts to lLC for dimension'
Spccify defaults to use for poinl>, lines,
ares ami hatches
Plot
Plot a drawing to plotter or dis k
TRANSFER
Graphics print Print a drawing to prb1tcr o r disk
Rcad interface or HPGL file
Rcad
Write inte rface file
Writc
Savc, rcnamc or c rdSc drawing fi les
Files
C ALCIJLArR
Use thc calculator
REDRAW
Rcgcncratc thc scrccn vicw
Define a w ndow
WINDOW
MOVE
Move an cntity o r the c.ontcnts of a window
COPY
Copy an entity or the contents of a window
GRID
Switch the drawing grid ON/ OFF
Pan across the d rawing
PAN
<1:-..Sc>
<SpaccBnr>
<lns>
<I>el>
Grey <+>
Grey <->
< Bac kSpace>
ESCAPE
CURSOR SWAP
INSERT
ERASE
ZOOM IN
ZOOM OUT
ZOOM RF.TURN
< Fl >
<F2>
<1'3>
HELP
SETUP
Aborts any curren! activity

Swap bctwccn screcn and menu cursors
Save or inscrt a shape
Erase cntity or the contents of a window
lncrcasc magnH1cation
<Alt-K>
<All-L>
<Alt-0>
<Alt-P>
<All-Q>
<All-R>
<Alt-S>
<Alt-T >
<All-W>
Page3-2
C hange
3. 1 FUNCTION KEYS
Are
Are which is Langent to another a rc

A re given center and point on circmfmcc
Semi-circie thru 2 points (anti-clockwisc)
Join 2 Unes by means of a fillct
A rc which is Langent to a linc
A re given radius and centre
Are thmugh 3 poinl'
AnglcsRad
Flip
P enLayer
R ad Tri m
Split
T rimTo Pt
T ext
Dimcnsion
A rrow
llorizontl
Parallel
Radius
Vertical
Draws arrow pointing to indicatc<l point

Horizontal di me nsion
Dimcnsion parallcl to 2 points
RaJ ius dimcnsion
Vertica l dimension
FancyLine
Arc PtTan
Drop Une
Ellipsc
Linc2A rcs
l'aralld
p lygon
Rcctanglc
T angenl
Tm1gcnl from a point to an are

Pc ~ndicular to a linc from a point
Ellipsc using centre, major a.xi." & pnint
Tangcnt hctwccn 2 ares
D imcnsion
llatch
Line
Rcset view to who le paper sizc
Toggles cursor typcs

Une Dash Type
Calls up the <Alt> key help scrcen
Frces memory in emcrgcncy by dm pping
the intcgcr lis! kcpl for fast redraws
Togglcs the key click ON/OFF
Changes the curren! !ayer sctting
Toggles ortho mode ON/OFF
Changes the curren! pen co lor sctting
Switchcs QuickText mode ON/OFF
Switches rubber banding ON/OFF
Toggles the search modes (Near/Centrc)
Changes the curren! thickncss setting
Toggles window modes (Opcn/CI05ed)
A re Tan
C entrc&Pt
Double Pt
F illet
Line Tan
RadCcntrc
T riple Pt
Change the radius, start and/or cnd ang le

Fli p an are (swo ps start and end anglc_s)
Change the pen and/or !ayer of an are
Trim or extend radiw:; to a spccifi c<l poinl
Split an are into 2 ares al a point
T ri m an are to a spcci ficd point
Change <limcnsion paramctcrs
Change hatch angle, distance, laycr. pcn
Break a line into 2 lincs lcaving a gap
Change a line 's length
Trim 2 lines so that they mee! exactly
Change a line's layer, pcn, th icknCl<s, typc
Split a li ne into 2 lines al a point
T ri rn or extend li ne to a spccificd poi11t
Tri m or cxtcnd linc to an othcr linc
Change te xt string. pcn. s i1.e, laycr cte.
Dccrcase magnifi cation
Whenever there is a graphics cursor present you can use the fol lowing key combina tions as a short cut to changing sorne of the
SETUP key <1<'2> parameters.
<All-C>
<All-D>
<All-Fl>
<All-1>
Are
Envimn mcnt
Laycrs
C onflguralion
T exl
Dimcnsions
Othcr Entitics
llatch
Linc
l\lcasure
Point
3.2 MAIN MENU
Pa rallcl linc to an cxi.si ing li nc
Regular polygon
Rcc tangle g ivcn 2 d iagonal co mer poi nt;-;
Tangcnt to an a re
Hatch a dcfUlcd a rca
Are
D rawing lines with 2 point.s

G ivcs the centre, rad ius, start & enJ tUlgl":
Li ne
G ives thc angle and length of a linc
O utlinc
Point
T woPoints
Sketch
Tcxt
Q ui t
Break
Length
M ect 2 Lns
P enLayer
S plit
tR imToPt
Trim Line
G ivcs the a rea a nd pcrimctcr of a polygon
G ives thc co-ordinatcs of a point

G ivc di.stancc and anglc of 2 poinL..;
Define a point (sce Point Dcfinitioo
Use TurlxiCAD as a sketch pad
Draw tcxt
Tcnn inale work on currcnt Jmwing
~ kn u1
Page 3- 3
Chapter3
The Turbocad Commands
3.3 POINT DEFINITION MENU

Appears automatically whencvcr TurboCAD requires that a point
be spccified.
Accessed by pressing the <Del> key when the main menu is di;,played
ScreenPos
NearPoinl
CoordsAbs
Relative
Polar
Use cursor position, or ncarest grid point

Snap to nearest existing drawing point
Use absolute X and Y co-ordinates
Type in relative X and Y displacemenls
Type in relative polar co-ordinates
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Anglc
On Are Pt
Linc Pt
Snap to the centre of a linc

Snap to the cnd point of an are
Snap to anglc on an arcs circumference
Are
Dimension
llateh
laSt
Linc
O ops!
Point
T cxt
llor & Rad

Ver & Rad
X & Angle
Y & Angle
Relativc
Relative
Relative
Rclative
Jntcrscct
Digitiser
Page 3 - 4
3.4 ERASE MENU
Del ete an are

Delete a dimension
Delete a hatch
Dclete thc last cntity drawn
Delete a line
Restores whatcver the la<t delcte era<ed
Delete a point
Dclete text
Snap to the cl~est point on an are
Snap to the nearest point on a given linc

horizontal & radial distances
vertical & radial distances
X distance and anglc
Y distance and anglc
Are Are
Snap to intcrscction of two ares
Linc Are
X Lin Lin
Snap to in tc~cction of a linc and an are

Snap to interscction of 2 lincs
Use digitiscr
3.3 POINT DEFINITION MENU
3.4 ERASE MENU
Page 3- 5
Chapter3
3.5 WINDOW CHANGE MENU

Acccsscd by sclccting thc main mcnu Change option wilh a window
alrcady dcfined
Pcn
Layer
Thickness
Change lhe pt,-n color of ali ares

Change lhe layer of ali ares
Change lhe lhickness of ali ares
Pcn
l..ayer
Width
Hcight
Text Font
Arrows
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Decimal
Scaling
Changc lhe decimals uscd for dimer.sioris

Changc lhe scaling uscd in ali dimensions
OnAbvBel
Ext Supp
No Fil LR
Change dimensions to on, above or below

Change lhe suppression of dimension lines
Change which side non-fitting dimensions go
Pen
l,ayer
llistance
Angle
Cross YN
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
lhe pen color of ali hatches

lhc layer of ali halches
hatching distance of ali halches
lhe hatch angle of ali hatches
whether ali halches are cross
Pcn
Layer
Thickness
Vash Type
Change
Change
Changc
Change
lhe
thc
lhe
lhe
PoinL~
Pcn
l..aycr
Change the pcn color of ali points

Change the !ayer of ali poinls
Tcxl
11en
Changc
Changc
Changc
Changc
Changc
Changc
Changc
Ares
Dims
Hatchcs
Lines
I~~ycr
Width
Hcight
Anglc
Fonl
Justify
Page3- 6
4.1 BUTTONS
lf you are using an addilional input dcvicc (i.e. olhcr than the kcy board), TurboCAD utilizes the buttons on these devices by assigning
to them functions cquivalcnt to certain keyboard functions as fol lows:
lhe pen color of ali dimensions

ali dimcnsioos to new !ayer
lhe text widlh of ali dimcnsions
the text height of ali dimcnsions
lhe text font of ali dimcnsions
lhe arrow type of ali dimcnsions
lhc
thc
the
thc
lhc
lhc
thc
Mouse:
Left button
Right button
-<RETURN>
- <Ese>
Digitizers:
Butlon
Buuon
Butlon
Button
l
2
3
4
- <RETURN>
- <Ese>
- <Clrl-RETURN> (i.c. repeat last commaml)

- <Ese>
NOTE
pen color of ali lines
The number of buttons will vary from digitizer lo digilizer and will
also depend on whcther you are using a stylus pen or a puck with
your digilier. For example, a slylus with a single button will have
<RETURN> assigned lo lhal button, whereas a 4-button puck will
havc ali lhe functions shown above.
laycr of ali lines

thickncss of ali lines
line type used for ali lines
pen color of ali text

!ayer of ali texl
width of ali tcxt characlers
hcighl of ali lexl characlcrs
angle of ali tcxt
font uscd for ali tcxl
justification uscd for ali tcxt
3.5 WINDOW CHANGE MENU
4.1 BUTTONS
Page 4- 1
Command Keys
Chapter4
4.3 ESCAPE - <Ese>
4.2 CURSOR KEYS

The CURSOR keys <Home>, <Up>, <PgUp>, <Lcft>, <Right>,
<End>, <Down> and <PgDn> are used to move the cursor around
the screcn.
These keys are found on the righl hand side of the keyboard in a
group known as thc "Numcric Key Pad" or "Cursor Control Key
Pad" .
They havc dual functionality which is controllcd by pressing the
<Num Lock> kcy. In nurneric key pad rnodc (sorne cornputers rnay
indicatc this wilh a light), thcsc kcys can be uscd for cnlcring lhc
numbcrs lhal appcar on lhcm. In cursor pad rnodc, lhc arrow kcys
providc for the obvious up, down, lcft and right rnovcmcnts whilc
diagonal movemenl is achicvcd by using thc <Home>, <PgUp>,
<End> and <PgDn> keys.
This key will lcrminatc lhc currcnl activity (refcr lo thc sccti o n
under Getting Started enlitlcd Gclling Out Of Trouble) . lt can be
used al any lime e.g. when TurboCAD is aski ng for input or ln
cancel a cornmand such as using lhc calculator, a window or poin t
definilion ele .
NOTE
In sorne inslances, such as plouing or printing, prcssi ng <Ese > wil l
nol appear lo aborl lhc currcnl activily imrncdiatcly. This is hccausc
thc print buffer may be full and prinling or plolling will conlinuc
frorn this buffer evcn though TurboCAD has slo p pcd sending inforrnalion lo lhe buffer.
Thc cursor "speed" is controllcd by pressing thc numcric keys found

a long the top of thc kcyboard bctween the <Ese> and <HackSpace>
kcys. Pressing a <l> will cause lhc cursor lo movc in very srnall
incrcmenls whilsl pressing a <9> will rcsult in largc cursor slcps.
Any incremenl from 1 through 9 can be sclected al any lime. This
mcans thal you can skip quickly across the drawing or move thc
cursor very accuralely.
Page 4- 2
4.2 CURSOR KEYS
4.3 ESCAPE - <Ese>
Page4-3
Chapter4
Command Keys
4.4 CONTROL - <Ctrl>

This key is used in conjunclion wilh olhcr keys as follows:
J. To invokc AUTO ZOOM press <Clrl-llackSpacc>. This command will aulomalically adjusl lhe scrcen view so lhal it maximizcs
thc view of the drawing . lt will alter thc magnificalion and pan
posilion so lhal lhe wholc drawing fits on thc scrccn al lhc grcalcsl
possiblc magnificalion.
2. To rcpcal lhc lasl command prcss <Clrl-RETURN>. This will
rcpcal lhc Jasl command sclcclcd from lhc main mcnu. For cxamplc,
if thc last thing lhat you had done was to sclcct Changc from thc
main mc11u, followcd by Are from thc changc mcnu a11d thc11 PcnLaycr from thc are changc mcnu a11d you wishcd lo pcrform thc
same operation on anothcr are, you could simply prcss <ClrlRETURN> which would do Changc-Arc-PcnLayer in onc go
without displaying the intcrmcdiale mcnus. This can be time-saving.
6. As a short cut to calling up any of the TRANSFER pulldown

menus whenever the main menu appears on the TurboCAD drawing
screen (refer to the section nn the TRANSFER key <F3>).
<Clrl-P> - to call up the TRANSFER Plot pulldown menu
<Clrl-G> - to call up the TRANSFER Graphics print pulldown mcnu
<Clrl-R> - to call up the TRANSFER Rcad pulldown menu
<Ctrl-W> - lo call up the TRANSFER Write pulldown mcnu
<Clrl-F> - to call up t11e TRANSFER Files pulldown mcnu
3. When using Lhc calculator or mcasurc command you can prcss

<Clrl-S> to Store a valuc lo a mcmory (rcfcr lo thc scclion on thc
CALCULATOR kcy <F4>.
4. Whcnever TurboCAD givcs a dcfault value whcn prompting for
uscr input, you can press <Clrl-R> lo Rccall thc default value if
you have pressed a kcy by mistake.
5. As a shorl cut lo calling up any of lhc SETUP pulldown mcnus
whcncvcr thc main mc11u appears 011 the TurboCAD drawing screcn
(refer to the sectio11 011 the SETUP kcy <F2>).
<Clrl-E> - to call up lhc SETUP Envirorunenl pulldown menu
<Clrl-L> - to call up lhc SETUP Layers pulldown mcnu
<Clrl-C> - lo call up the SETUP Co11figuration pulldown mcnu
<Clrl-T> - lo call up the SETUP Texl pulldown mcnu
<Ctrl-D> - lo call up the SETUP Dimcnsions pulldown menu
<Clrl-0> - lo call up the SETUP Othcr cntitics pulldown mcnu
Page 4 - 4
4.4 CONTROL - <Ctrl>
4.4 CONTROL - <Ctr/>
Page 4 - 5
Chapter4
Command Keys
4.6 INSERT - <lns>
4.5 CURSOR SW AP - <SpaceBar>

The spacebar is thc long bar at thc bottom of the keyboard.
TurboCAD has 2 cursors. Pressing thc spacebar togglcs bctwccn
the 2 cursors saving step by stcp movcment betwecn 2 places. Typically, tbe one cursor will be positioncd on thc menu at the right of
the screen and the other will be in the midst of the drawing (drawing
cursor ami mcnu cursor).
Although TurboCAD's 2 cursors are intended for use as a drawing
cursor ami a menu cursor, it is possible to move both cursors into
the drawing arca. This can be uscful for instantancous jumping betwecn sections of a drawing. To illustratc this concept, considcr a
drawing consisting of a circlc an<l a polygon next to it. Place onc
cursor al the centrer of the circlc ami the other al the centre of thc
polygon . (Remember: thc <SpaccUar> togglcs bctwecn cursors).
Toggle to thc cursor situated al the centre of the circle and press
the ZOOM IN key <+>. This will rcsult in a magnified view of the
circle appearing on thc scrccn. Press the ZOOM RETURN key
<BackSpacc> to return to the original view of thc drawing. Use
thc <SpaceBar> to toggle eursors to the cursor situated al the center
of the polygon. Prcssing the ZOOM IN key <+> now will rcsult in
a magnificd view of the polygon.
The INSERT kcy <Ins> is used to load shapcs from disk and to
insert them into a drawing as well as to storc shapes to disk.
TurboCAD stores shapes as drawings. This means that something
storcd as a shape can later be loaded as a drawing and drawings
can be loaded as shapes into other drawings - a truly flexible system.
Whcn you press the INSERT kcy <lns>, TurboCAD has to decide
whcther you wish to save a shapc to disk or whcthcr you wish to
inscrt a shape into the drawing. This dccision is based on whether
you have specifie<l a win<low using the WINDOW key <F6> or not.
A TurboCAD shape is defined by enclosing any section of a <lrawing
in a window, so if you have specified a window, TurbuCAD will
save the contents of thc window to disk. Otherwise it will assume
you wish to load a drawing from disk and insert it as a shape into
the current work drawing.
With a window defined, TurboCAD will prompt for:
Filename to Store in:
This is thc drawing name in which you wish to save the shapc.
TurboCAD will save the shape in the current drawing sub-directory
specified in the TRANSFER key <F3> Files menu.
Paper A
This is the paper size to be uscd for the drawing of thc shape to
be savcd (remember that shapcs are indistinguishable from draw ings).
Scale 1:
This is the scalc to be used for the drawing of thc shape to he
savcd. This scale will not affect the shapc size if it is rc -insertc<l
into the drawing, but has effect if the shape is loaded as a drawing .
Indicate base point

This is thc point at which you would like to have a shapc i11serted
into a drawing ata later stagc. For cxamplc you may likc to spccify
thc ccntcr of a circlc as thc base point for that circlc. When a shapc
is inserted into a drawing, it is inscrted so that the base point coin -
Page 4 - 6
4.5 CURSOR SWAP - <SpaceBar>
4. 6 INSERT - </ns>
Page 4 - 7
Chapter4
Command Keys
cides with thc cursor position. Shapcs which werc created as drawings have a default base point of (0,0) i.e. the bottom lcft of the
screen . This base point can be altered using the SETUP key <F2>
Environment. Use any one of TurboCAD's point definition modes
to specify this base point.
The drawin g heing inserted will be al the correcl scale with a li lhe
en ti ti es on the same laycrs they were on lhe drawing. So e ven i f
you drew an object on A4 paper al a scale of 1:20, you can s ti 11
inserl it inlo a draw ing being done on A3 papcr al a sea le o f l: l 00
and it will be drawn at lhe correct scale.
Once the base point has bcen spccified, TurboCAD will save the
shape ' as a drawing for later insertion as a shape or loading as a
drawing. If no window is specified, TurboCAD will prompt for:
Using lhis comman d, an archilect can build a "library" of com mon ly

uscd shapcs su ch as doors, windows, balhs, sinks, etc. An clcclrica l
engineer can dra w ali lhe lypes of lra nsislors, d iodes, integralcd
circuils, cte. once a nd re-use them as ma ny times as rcquired.
File to insert ?
This is the name of the drawing you wish to insert. TurboCAD will
look for the drawing on the current drawing sub-directory specified
in the TRANSFER kcy <F3> Files mcnu. Once you havc inscrtcd
a shape, TurhoCAD will dcfaull thc file to inscrt to thc last shapc
used. You need only press < RETURN> to load thc same shape
again. You can press the HELP key to obtain a list of available
shapes.
Reference Point:
This is the pivot point about which thc object to be inserted will
be sized and/or rotated. It is specified using any of TurboCAD's
point definition modes (refer to section on point definition).
X scaling: Y scaling:
Thcse faclors allow you lo change the size of the object in the x
ami y direetions respectivel y. If you use a sealing factor grcater
than 1, the objeet will be enlarged in its inserted position, while a
fractional sealing factor will result in a redueed image. Using negative scaling factors causes mirroring about the x or y axis respectively. The default x-scaling factor is l while thc y-scaling factor
defaults to that of the x-scaling factor.
Rotation:
This parameter allows you to rotatc the object the specified number
of degrees whilc inserting il into the drawing . If you do not wish
to rotate the object, use the dcfault rotation angle which is O degrees.
Once the rotation angle has bcen specificd, TurboCAD will load
the specified drawing from disk and insert it as a shapc into the
eurrenl work drawing al the specified point.
Page 4 - 8
4.6 INSERT - </ns>
4.6 INSERT - </ns>
Page 4 - 9
Command Keys
Chapter4
4.8 ZOOM KEYS
4.7 ERASE Key - <Del>

The ERASE key <Del> is usc<l lo erase entitics. If a win<low has
bcen spccifie<l (using the WINDOW key <F6>) al the time thal thc
<Del> key is presse<l, TurboCAD will erase all thc entities cnclosc<l
in the window.
The zoom keys allow you lo see and work on certain parts of the
drawing in more detail, by "enlarging" secti0ns of the drawing. The
effect is like combining a powerful magnification glass and absolutely accurate drafting instruments.
lf no window is definc<l, then pressing thc <Del> key will cause

the TurboCAD erase mcnu to appcar. This givcs you a choice of
cntity types to erase as wcll as an un-erase facility.
The zoom comman<ls cause the screen to be redrawn (i.e . equivalen!

of using the REDRA W key <FS> ). Press any key lo hall this process
half way through. For inslance, if you are zooming in, you can
zoom in a secon<l time wilhoul waiting for lhe first zoom screcn
view to be complelely redrawn .
Erase Menu
Are
Dimcnsion
Hatch
laSt
Linc
Oops!
Poi ni
Text
Dclclc an are
Dclcte a dimcnsion
Dclcte a hatch
Dclete !he last entily drawn
Dclele a line
Rcstorcs whatcver thc last delctc crasOO
Delcle a point
Delcte text
Notice lhat with ZOOM you can change the "aspect ratio" (i.e. thc
ratio of the x-co-ordinates on the screen to the y-co-ordinatcs) of
your screen display resulting in a "flat" or "tall" view of thc <lrawing.
Do not despair, il is only the screen vicw that is <listorted - the
<lrawing is still correclly mainlained in memory.
AUTO ZOOM - <Ctrl-BackSpace>
Position your cursor near to the cntity you wish to erase (Are,
Dimension, Hatch, Linc, Point or Tcxt) anti select the corrcsponding
menu option . TurboCAD will fin<l thc closest entity ami will erase
it. The "laSt" oplion will delete the lasl entily <lrawn while lhe
"Oops!" option will "un-erase" the last <leletion.
The AUTO ZOOM kcy <Ctrl-HackSpacc> will automatically adjust

the screcn vicw so thal il maximizes the view of the drawing. lt
will alter the magnification and pan position so thal lhe wholc dra w ing fits on the scrcen al thc greatcst possible magnification.
In ccrtain circumslances, sorne drawing elements will be drawn
larger lhan the papcr sizc.
NOTES
1. Rcmcmbcr that windows operatc in OPEN a!lll CLOSED mode
(refer to thc scetion on the SETUP key <F2> Enviromnenl).
2. Refcr to the section on the WINDOW kcy <F6> for discussion
on what the critcria are for inclusion in a win<low.
3 . The "Oops" option will also "un-erase" a window if thal was the
lasl thing erased.
Page 4- 10
4.7 ERASE Key - <Del>
'
t
Thc auto zoom checks ali the entitics on your <lrawing for the largcst
and smallest X and Y co-ordinates and will zoom accordingly so
that you can view entilics oulside your normal <lrawing space, and
dclctc or modify thcm if required. This facility can be very relevan!
if you havc read in an interface file of HPGL file which does not
havc lhe corrccl scaling. You may end up wilh an apparently blank
drawing, bul by using AUTO ZOOM lhe drawing will appear. You
can then pul a window aroun<l the enlire drawing an<l scalc a!lll
shifl it to a position in lhe drawing limils (refer lo the sections on
lhe WINDOW key <F6> an<l the MOVE key <F7>).
4.8 ZOOM KEYS
Page 4 - 11
Command Keys
Chapter4
ZOOM RETURN - <BackSpace>
ZOOM OUT - Grey <->
The ZOOM RETURN key <HackSpacc> resets the zoom magnification and pan position so that thc screen view corresponds to the
full paper size of the work drawing. This is the view you had when
you started the drawing. It is most useful when you have zoomed
in a couple of times as you can return to a view of the whole
drawing by pressing only one button.
The ZOOM OUT key <-> is the complement of the ZOOM IN key
<+>. It will decrease the magnification of the view of a drawing
in a manner analogous to a telephoto lens on a camera. TurboCAD
will take as reference the zoom position you were in before you
executed the last ZOOM IN command, i.e. you can "step back" one
zoom position with each ZOOM OUT command.
ZOOM IN - Grey <+>
NOTES
The ZOOM IN key <+> will increase the magnification of the view
of a drawing in a manncr analogous to a telephoto lens on a camera.
TurboCAD magniies thc vicw of the drawing by the zoom rnagnification. lt then shifts thc vicw of thc drawing so that thc currcnt
cursor position becorncs the new ccnter of screen and draws as
much of the view of the drawing as can fil on the screen. TurboCAD
keeps track of the total magnification of ymir drawing and will only
allow successive zooming till the zoom magnification becomes too
large for the computer to handle.
1. The <Ctrl-Fl> key is useful for determining what section of the

drawing your current screen view represcnts (refer to the section
on the HELP kcy <Fl>).
2 . lf you are already viewing the full drawing (i.e. are not
zoomed position) this command will have no effect.
111
NOTES
1. lf a window is <lefined (refer to section on the WINDOW key
<F6>), then the ZOOM IN key <+> will cause the window to completely fill the screen .
2. The amount by which the drawing is magnified each time you
press the ZOOM IN key <+> (zoom magnification) can be set using
the SETUP key <F2> Environment.
3. The <Ctrl-Fl> key is useful for determining what section of the
drawing your current screen view represents (refer to the section
on the HELP key <Fl>).
Page 4 - 12
4.8 ZOOM KEYS
4.8 ZOOM KEYS
Page 4 - 13
Chapter4
l,lil!--~Jl llll
The TurboCAD HELP <Fl> key can be pressed at any time tha t
TurboCAD is waiting for input from the user. This will cause a
help window to appear on the screen containing information which
will assist the user. To remove this window and resume drawing,
press the <Ese> key or follow the instructions given in the help
window.
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
While the main menu is displayed, pressing the HELP key <Fl>
will cause the bottom half of the screen to be overwritten with a
help screen showing the keyboard usage. Pressing any key will
remove this help display and return to the original screen display.
,-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-,
Menu :
Are
Change
Dinension
FancyLlne
Hatch
Llne
Me asure
Point
Sketch
Text
n .. 1t
Help
~~
Setup
Transfer
Calculator
Redr"H
~ ~ IHndoH
Nove
Grid
~ ~ Pan
li!:!l1
Escape
Zo<>ft Retn
r~-C-tr-I~A
__Jf
. - --~
0~00
.~l
rnornozoon
00[ELJ0
Copy
SHap Cursor Pos
Out
In
~~
L
8 P 1
Pressing the HELP key <Fl> al any time that TurboCAD is expecting input from the user, will cause a context specific help window
to appear in the lower half of the screen. In sorne instances , when
TurboCAD requires you to enter a file name (drawing, font, arrow
interface or HPGL), pressing the HELP key <Fl> will cause a directory of the relevant files to be displayed. In these cases, press the
<SpaceBar> or <Lert> or <Right> key to shift the highlight to
the desired file, then press the <RETURN> key to select it.
Page 4- 14
4.8 ZOOM KEYS
5HELP
Page 5 - 1
Chapter5
The Help Facility

5. Zoom Position tells you how many times you have zoomed in .
Each time you zoom in, this number is incremented. It is decremented each time zoom you out.
NOTE
The TurboCAD HELP messages are ali kept in a file called TURBOCAD.HLP which is supplied on System Disk 2. lf this file is
not found, TurboCAD will give an error message when yo u try to
use the HELP facility. If you press <Ctrl-Fl> while the main menu
is displayed, you will gel a display which indicates where the current
view of the drawing is relative to the actual drawing.
6. Zoom Magnification tells you the amount by which the drawing

will be magnified or reduced each time you zoom in or out.
7. Pan Distance tells you the distance your view will movc across
the drawing with each pan.
Vlew posltlon relativa to papar
(Refer to the TurboCAD INPUT section to find out more about

zooming and panning as well as how to change the zoom magnification and pan distance.)
A4
CJ
Screen Linits :
167.62
92.22
Zoon Posltlon : 2
Zoon 11agnlficntlon :
'
167.62
134.22
5.118
Pan Dlstnnce
58.08
The following information is displayed on the above screen:

1. The double line rectangle represents the paper size of your drawing.
2. In the top left hand comer of this rectangle is an indication of
the current paper size.
3. The small rectangle in the middle of the screen represents the
area on the drawing to which the current screen view corresponds.
If you have not zoomed your drawing, this rectangle will be the
same size as the double line drawing rectangle and the more you
ZOOM IN the smaller it will gel.
4. Screen Limits gives in order the x and y cartesian co-ordinates
of the bottom left comer of the current screen view, followed by
the cartesian co-ordinates of the top right comer of this view.
Page 5-2
5HELP
5HELP
Page5-3
Cha ter5
6.1 INTRODUCTION
The SETUP key <F2> will cause a series of pull clown menu options
to appear at the top of the screen as shown below.
This Pagc Intentionally Left Blank

Envlronnent
Layers
Conflguratlon
Text
Dlnenslons
Other enti tles
r-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~--,
Are
C'1""90'
Dinension
FencyLlne
Hatch
Llne
Mea.sur e
Point
Sketch
Text
Oui t
Men: 205
Cl
He
L 8 P 1
These options will allow you to change a number of system

parameters using a system of pulldown menus.
To change a parameter:
1. Select a pulldown menu by doing either of the following:
Press the <SpaceBar> or <Lefl> or <Right> key to shift the high light at the top of the screen to the desired option and thcn press
<RETURN> or the <Down> cursor key to select the highlighted
option.
OR
Press the first letter of the desired option .
Page 5 - 4
SHELP
6. 1 INTRODUCT/ON
Page 6- 1
Chapter6
Setup
2. Once a pulldown menu appears, use the <Up> and <Down> cursor
keys to sclect the parameter you wish to change. If you wish to
change to another pulldown menu al this stage, use any of the
methods described in. (l.) above .
3. Press <RETURN> to alter the value of the highlighted parameter.
Depending on what parameter is selected, you will be able to alter
its value in one of two ways:
1. The parameter value will be restricted to a set list of values. In
this case, the value displayed on the screen ehanges as soon as you
press the <RETURN> key. Simply eontinue pressing <RETURN>
and the displayed value will toggle through ali the possible values
for that parameter. Continue this process until the desired value
appears .
up a pull down menu. This is aehieved by pressing the <Alt> key

simultaneously with the Jetter pertaining to that parameter. For ex ample, you can change the pen color in the midst of a line dnw
command by using <Alt-P>. To find out what parameters can be
altered, press <Alt-Fl>.
NOTE
Pressing the <Home> key shifts you to the start of any pull down
menu e.g., first entry in directory help or top line of Config pull
down.
2. The highlight will vanish and a small blinking underscore will

appear immediately to the right of the displayed value. You must
type in either the number or text string you wish to assign and then
press <RETURN> to accept this value. If you have typed in a new
value, but have not yet pressed <RETURN> to aeeept it, you can
restore the old value by pressing <Ctrl-R> .
If at any stage you are not sure for what a parameter is used, press
the HELP <Fl> key with that parameter highlighted. This will bring
up a help window with information on that parameter.
When you are satisfied ali the parameters displayed are set to the
values you desire, press the <Ese> key to exit the SETUP screen.
This will cause ali parameters to be set to whatever value was displayed at the time the <Ese> key was pressed.
SHORTCUT
Once you are familiar with TurboCAD, you can access any of the
SETUP pulldown menus directly by pressing the <Ctrl> key simultaneously with the first letter of the desired SETUP menu option
al any time that the main menu appears on the TurboCAD drawing
screen e.g., <Ctrl-C> will bring up the Configuration pulldown
menu.
EXTRA SHORT CUT

TurboCAD allows the advanced user to alter sorne of the system
parameters governing the working environment without even calling
Page 6-2
6. 1 INTRODUCTION
6. 1 INTRODUCTION
Page 6-3
Chapter6
Setup
6.2 ENVIRONMENT PULLDOWN MENU

Envlronnent
Layers
Base Point )(
Base Point V
)( Grld Step
Y Grld Step
2oon Magn
Pan Distance
Paper Size
Sea le
Ortho Mode
Ulndow Mode
Se,,rch Mode
Rubber Banding
Configuratlon
Text
Dinensions
8.8011
11.0011
5.9411
4.2811
5.808
511.81111
When the grid is active and the ScreenPos mode of point definition
is used, TurboCAD will use the grid poinl closest to the cursor
position as the defined point.
Other entities
Are
TurboCAD sets the grid steps aulomatically under the following

conditions:
Change
Dinension
FancyLine
Hatch
Line
t1easure
Point
Sketch
rext
A3
1.800
OFF
CLOSED
HEAR
l. When TurboCAD starts up, it chooses a default grid size based

on the relative scale and paper size selected for the drawing so as
to create a grid exactly 50 by 50.
e.g., an A4 drawing (297mm x 210mm) drawn to a l: 1 scale will

ha ve:
Ouit
OFF
X grid step ~ 297/50
5.94
Y grid step = 210/50 = 4.20

2. When a new drawing is started, the grid steps will retain their
current setting.
Me": ~851
Cl
He
L 8 P 1
3. When a drawing is saved, the grid steps active at the time are
saved with the drawing.
BASE POINT X & BASE POINT Y

These two values give the cartesian co-ordinates of the point that
TurboCAD will use as reference point if the drawing is inserted as
a shape into another drawing. Remember that TurboCAD uses the
bottom left hand comer of the drawing screen (x-co-ordinate O and
y-co-ordinale O) as system reference point.
4. When an old drawing is loaded, the grid sleps are set to thosc
saved with the drawing.
ZOOMMAGN
This factor determines the amount by which a drawing is magnifiecl
each time the ZOOM IN key is pressed. lt similarly governs the
amount by which magnification is decreased when using the ZOOM
OUT key.
(The default values are both O)
X GRID STEP & Y GRID STEP

These are the X and Y distances of the grid intervals (refer to the
GRID key <F9>). Remember that the grid should be wide enough
to be displayed. If you are in a low zoom leve) (i.e. you can see
most of the drawing) and the grid sleps are too small, then the grid
cannol be displayed as it would be solid.
(The default value is 5)
PAPER SIZE
This variable is used to set the size of the output to the plotter.
TurboCAD can work with A4, A3, A2, Al and AO paper sizes.
Remember that the size to be used may be restricted by the actual
plotting device used.
Similarly, if the grid step is large and you zoom in at high magnification, you may display an area of drawing between the grid
poinls. For this reason, a "G" in the bottom right of the screen is
used to indicate whether the grid is on or off.
(The default value is the drawing paper size as created or saved).

1
Page 6-4
6.2 ENV/RONMENT PULLDOWN MENU
Page 6- 5
Chapter6
Setup
SCALE
To illustrate this concept, considcr a square with a window which

only endoses one side.
This shows the relalionship between the number of millimeters on

paper and the number of millimelers in reality. Note thal screen
ca-ordinales are always given in real scale. Changing this parameter
will cause TurboCAD lo re-scale the drawing as soon as you exil
the selup screen.
241
11enu :
Are
Change
Dinension
FancyL!ne
""tch
(The default value is what was entered at time of drawing crealion

- see seclion under STARTING TurboCAD) .
Line
Me asure
Point
Sketch
Te><t
ORTBOMODE
q]
The orthogonal mode uses the lasl regislered point to constrain lines
to being cither horizontal or vertical. Thc cursor will snap to the
point ncccssary to achieve this. The <Alt-0> kcy combinalion can
be uscd to toggle this mode in thc midst of other commands.
Ouit
If ortho mode is active, an "O" will appear in the status arca at the
bottom righl of the scrcen.
11en: 284
(The defaull value is OFF)
Cl
He
L 8 P t
Consider moving the window to the right. The only enlity complelcly
enclosed within the window is the right vertical line. Thus in window
CLOSED mode, the result will be:
WINDOWMODE
There are a number of operations that can be performed in conjunction with a window (rcfer to the section undcr commands on
the WINDOW <F6> key) . Windows can operate in OPEN or
CLOSED mode. Thcse modes are designed to handle thc problem
of drawing entities that slraddle thc window boundaries .
278
75
11enu :
Are
Change
Dinension
FancyL!ne
""tch
OPEN - window opcralions apply to ali entities thal have any parl
cnclosed in the window.
Line
Me asure
Point
Sketch
Te><t
CLOSED - window operations only apply to enlities thal are entirely

enclosed in thc window.
Qui t
11en: 284
Cl
He
L 8 P 1
1
1
Page 6 - 6
6.2 ENVJRONMENT PULLDOWN MENU

J
Page 6- 7
Setup
Chapter6
However, lhe 2 horizonlal lines each have one of lheir endpoinls

enclosed, so lhe result in window OPEN mode would be:
235
33
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-'-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
(The defaull val ue is NEAR).
tlenu
Are
Chenge
Dinension
F"ncyLine
Hntch
Llne
11eas.ure
Point
Sketch
Text
Quit
""" ' 204

IJp
The currenl search mode is indicated by the presence of a "C e" or

an "Ne" in the status area at the bouom right of the scrccn.
He
8 P l
The <Alt-W> key combination can be used in the midst of another

command to toggle the window mode.
The current window mode is indicated by the presence of a "CI"
or an "Op" in the status arca al the bottom right of the screen.
(The default value is CLOSED).
RUBBER BANDING
This mode of operation drags lines around the screen as you move
the cursor around the screen. The commands wh ich use rubber banding are the Line command (when using a poinl definition modc
which uses cursor movement to establish the endpoints) and FancyLine-Rectangle. lf rubber banding is off, lhe commands which use
rubber banding will work exac tly thc same as usual, cxcept for thc
rubber band portian. In the case of drawi ng a rectanglc usi ng FancyLine-Rectangle, you will simply show two corncrs of the reclangle
and the rectangle will be drawn. There will be no rubber ban ding
rcclangle shown while you are choosing the second point.
Rubber banding also affects window move and copy commands in
lhal a rubber band line is drawn from lhe souree poinl to the destination poinl if rubber banding is on. The window will still opcralc
as us ual.
You can use the <Alt-R> key combinalion lo loggle rubber banding
ON/OFF in the midsl of o lher commands.
lf rubber banding is aclivated, this will be indicaled by an "R" in
the status area al the bottom ri ghl of the screen.
(The default value is OFF).
SEARCBMODE
When TurboCAD promplS you to select an are, line or hatch it will
scarch far the are, line or halch closest to the current cursor position
in one of two ways. In NEAR search mode, it will search far lhe
are, line or batch to which the cursor is closest. In CENTER mode,
it will search far the are, line or batch whose cenler point is closest
to the current cursor position. The near search mode requires more
calculation and is lhus the slower of the two methods. The center
search mode, however, gives resullS which may appear erroneous
to the uninitiated.
The <Alt-S> kcy combinalion can be used to toggle the search mode
in lhe midst of anolhcr command.
Page 6- 8
Page 6- 9
Chapter6
Setup
6.3 LA YERS PULLDOWN MENU

Envlronnent
Layers
Confl9uratlon
Text
Dlnensions
2. Thc act of making a layer inactive docs not in itsclf cause that
laycr to be removed from the screcn. lt is neccssary to REDRAW
the drawing <FS>. This will rcdraw only active laycrs.
Other entl t les
3. Thc status of all layers is saved witb a drawing, so lo ading an

existing drawing will set the active layers to thosc that were active
at the time thc drawing was saved.
4
7
0
1
2
3
5
6
8
9 te 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 ~
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
49 49 se 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
64 65 66 67 69 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 79 79
80 81 82 93 94 85 96 87 88 99 96 91 92 93 94 95
96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 109 109 110 111
112 113 114 115 116 117 119 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127
(The default is that all layers are active for a new drawing)
. '"Jei(f
Oui t
Men: 2051
O Q R
Cl
L
He
8 P 1
This givcs an indication of what laycrs are currcntly active.

TurboCAD caters for 128 layers numbered from O through 127.
Numbers which appear indicatc active laycrs whilst those not displayed are inactive layers. To change the status of any layer, use
thc <Left>, <Right>, <Up> and <Down> cursor keys to shift the
highlight to the dcsired layer number. Then press the <RETURN>
key. This will cause the status to toggle from active to inactive and
vice versa. Pressing the <ESC> key at any stage will return you
to your drawing and the status of all layers will be as displayed at
the time this key was pressed.
When working with this SETUP pulldown window, the <Left> and
<Right> cursor keys move you around within the window unlcss
you are al an edge. In this case, thc ncxt pulldown mcnu will appear.
To access the other pulldown menus directly, press the <SpaceBar>,
<Ctrl-Lert> or <Ctrl-Righl> keys or else press the first letter of
the dcsired SETUP menu option appearing at the top of the scrccn.
NO'fES
l. Only active layers are takcn into considcration by TurboCAD
whcn searching for, changing, deleting, drawing, plotting or printing .
Inactive layers will, however, still exist and will be savcd if thc
drawing is saved.
Page 6 10
r
1
Page 6 11
Chapter6
Setup
Prompts
Borders & cursors
User input
Background
Highlighted values
6.4 CONFIGURATION PULLDOWN MENU

Layers
Configur.,tlon
Te><t
Dlnensions
Other entltles
Environnent
~----------=-------_.:;.----------------------i Are
ICey Click
OH
Change
1
Dinension
~., !efte HU;;ter

1
Ca lbrate
Cursor Type Sf1ALL
Plotter
HP 75808 At
Printer
Epson F><A3HI
t1S Mouse
OH
F"ncyLine
Hatch
Llne
Screen Co lour
DIJtise~
-pink
-white
-light blue
-bright blue
-light blue on white background.
Entities drawn in pen color 1 will be light blue

2 will be in pink
3 will be in white.
tleasure
Point
Sketch
Te><t
NOTES
1. This value is ignored if you are using a monochrome monitor.
Quit
2. This value is stored with your drawing so that loading an existing

drawing may cause the display color to change.
3. The IBM color screen only allows three different foreground
colors on the screenwhen running in graphics mode. Thus pen colors
greater than 3 will be displayed as a pen color from 1 to 3 although
they will plot correctly.
"""' 205
CI
He
L 0 P t
KEYCLICK
PALETTE NUMBER
This toggle value determines whether the computer "clicks" when

a key is pressed or not.
This parameter allows you to select any of palettes supported by

the IBM color display if you are running the display in low-res
multi-color mode. Pressing <RETURN> will toggle through the 4
possible palettes. This value is ignored if you are running in any
other configuration.
SCREEN COLOR
If you are running TurboCAD on a system with an IBM color display,
this parameter will allow you to operate your system in any color
you wish. Pressing <RETURN> will toggle through the 16 possible
color combinations supported by an IBM color display. The effect
will depend on which of the IBM modes you have installed your
lBM screen using TurboCAD's INSTALL program.
The default colors are:

Prompts
Borders & cursors
User input
Background
Highlighted values
l. IBM Color Graphics (high-res, single colour)
TurboCAD will toggle the foreground color through ali the possible
colors. (The default color is pink.)
-pink
-white
-light green
-bright black
-red on white background.
Entities drawn in pen colour 1 will be light green

2 will be in pink
3 will be in white.
2. IBM Color Graphics (low-res, multi color)

TurboCAD will toggle the background color through ali the possible
colors.
The dcfault colors are:
Page 6- 12
6.4 CONFIGURA TION PULLDOWN MENU
- -
'
Page 6- 13
--
- - --- ~
------
Chapter6
Setup
NOTES
l. The IBM color screen only allows three different foreground
colors on the screen when running in graphics mode. Thus pen colors
greater than 3 will be displayed as a pen color from 1 to 3 although
they will plot correctly.
3. If you do not calibrate your digitizer, TurboCAD will assumc

that the digitizing area corresponds to 300 drawing units by 300
drawing units.
2. This value is stored with your drawing so that loading an existing

drawing may cause the display color to change.
Once the digitizer has been calibrated . TurboCAD will exit the
SETUP screen. From then on, you can use the Digitizer option on
the point definition menu to digitize points whenever TurboCAD
requires the definition of a point.
DIGITIZER
CURSORTYPE
If you ha ve one of the supported digitizers attached to your system

and it has been installed using the TurboCAD INSTALL program
you will be able to move thc cursor around the screen and use the
buttons for input (rcfer to the BUTTONS section under TurboCAD
INPUTS).
TurboCAD has three types of cursor which may be se lected for

drawing purposes . They are SMALL, LARGE and DIAMOND . Th c
large cursor is useful when you wish to do drawing projcc tio ns
from one point to another while the diamond cursor <loes not obsc urc
thc point situatcd at the cursor position (e.g. an intcrsection) . You
can use <Alt-C> to toggle cursor type in the midst of other com mands.
If you wish to use the digitizer to input a drawing, it is necessary

to calibrate the digitizer. If you press <RETURN>, TurboCAD will
prompt you for Screen Point l and the point definition menu will
appear. Use a point definition mode other than Digitizer to selcct
a point on the drawing screen (we recommend you use the CoordsAbs mode). You will then be asked to indicate the corresponding
point on the digitizer. Move the digitizer stylus or puck to the
relevant place on the digitizer tablet and press button 1. The above
process must be repeated for a second point.
These 2 points are used to calculate the correct scalc and translation
of the drawing tablet relative to the screen coordinates. Por this
reason, the points you use should be selected with care. Por examplc,
you can achieve automatic scaling of a drawing as you digitize it
by defining two points on the screen a certain distance apart and
using a different distance when indicating the corresponding points
on the digitizer.
(The default value is SMALL).
PLOTTER
This parameter value is the name of the plotter driver to be used
when sending output to the plotter. Pressing <RETURN> will toggle
through the 5 plotters selected when using the TurboCAD installation program (INSTALL) . Sorne plotters cater for paper size selection under software control. In these cases, TurboCAD allows you
to install thc plotter in more than one mode, for example, A3 and
A4 mode.
(The default will be the last plotter selected when using thc IN STALL program. As shipped, the default is HP7475A A3).
PRINTER
NOTES
1. The two points specified cannot be the same point and must not
be exactly vertically above each other or horizontally next to each
other as TurboCAD has to calculate the scaling factors in both thc
horizontal and vertical directions when calibrating.
2. Por the greatest accuracy, we recommend that you specify points
which are at diagonal extremes of the drawing to be digitized.
Page 6- 14
6.4 CONFIGURA T/ON PULLDOWN MENU
This parameter value is the name of the printer driver to be used

when sending output to the printer. Pressing <RETURN> will toggle
through the five printers selected when using the TurboCAD instal lation program (INSTALL).
(The default will be the last printer selected when using the INSTALL program. As shipped, the default is IBM Proprint.).
6.4 CONFIGURATION PULLDOWN MENU
Page 6- 15
Setup
Chapter6
MOUSE
6.5 TEXT PULLDOWN MENU
If you have a Microsoft compatible mouse altached to your system,

you can select/deselect use of this input device by means of this
toggle parameter. Remember, the mouse requires that you first run
the software supplied by the mouse manufacturer.
Make sure that you have executcd MOUSE.COM before running

TurboCAD. If you specify that you wish to use a mouse when using
the TurboCAD lNSTALL program, TurboCAD will automatically
try to load the driver MOUSE.SYS when booting your computer.
Por this automated loading to be successful, the file MOUSE.SYS
must be on the root sub-dircctory of the disk with which you boot
your computer.
Environnent
Layers
Conflguratlon
Text
Dlnenslons
Pen Colour
Layer
Uldth
Helght
Angle
Font
.Justify
Quick text
1
1
:J.880
:J.880
8.888
HORnAL
1
OFF
Other entl tles

- - - - , Are
Change
Dinension
FancyLlne
Hatch
Llne
Mensure
Point
Sketch
Text
Ouit
Refcr to the section on BUTTONS under the TurboCAD INPUTS

to see what effect the buttons on the mouse have on TurboCAD.
DO NOT switch the mouse on if you do not have one altached or
have not run the necessary preparation software. If you do switch
the mouse on without having one connected, TurboCAD will switch
this toggle back to OFF. You may "hang" the system if you have
another device connected to the relevant communication port.
(The default value will correspond to what was specified when using
the TurboCAD INSTALL program. As shipped, the default is OFF.)
"""' 284
Cl
He
L 8 P 1
PENCOLOR
This value denotes the pen number or color to be used as text is
added to the drawing. This value only affects new text (Use the
CHANGE command to change the color of existing text).
(The default value is 1).
LAYER
This value determines the !ayer on which text will be placed as it
is created. This value only affects new text (Use the CHANGE command to change the !ayer of existing text).
(The default value is O).
WIDTH
This is the width in drawing units that the widcst text character
will occupy as it is added to the drawing. Characters are spaced
proportionally, so not ali characters will occupy the same space.
This value only affects new text (Use the CHANGE command to
change the width of existing text). (The default value is 3.000).
Page 6- 16
Page 6- 17
Setup
Chapter6
HEIGHT
FONT
This is the height in drawing units that text will occupy as it is

added to the drawing. This value only affects new text (Use the
CHANGE command to change the height of existing text).
This value defines the font which will be used when text is added
to the drawing. This value only affects new text (Use the CHANGE
command to change the font of existing text).
(The default value is 3.000).
This value is the name associated with a font file stored on disk.
You simply type in the name of this file. Different fonts can be
used on the same drawing. In addition to the normal context sensitive
help available, if the HELP <Fl> key is pressed when the blinking
underscore cursor appears, a window will open in which the list of
available font files is displayed.
ANGLE
This is the anglc al which the text will be placed on the drawing
as it is added to the drawing. This value only affects new text (Use
the CHANGE command to change the angle of existing lext).
Envlronnent
(The default is 0.000 i.e . horizontal).
Layers
Conflguratlon
Text
Dlnenslons
Other entltles
Are
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Pen Colour
Change
Dinension
Uldth
3.888
3.888
FencyLlne
Hatch
He!
TurboCAD Dlrectory of C:,TCSPEC.

COMPLEX IIALIC
NORMAL
SlnPLEX
Layer
S Font files found .

JXJ
"
Ouit
Men: 204
CJ
He
L 8 P t
Press the <SpaceBar> or <Left> or <Right> key to shift the highlight to the desired font. Press the <RETURN> key to select the
highlighted font. This will cause the HELP window to disappear
and the selected font will appear in the text pulldown menu .
TurboCAD is supplied with five font files (COMPLEX, ITALIC,
NORMAL, SIMPLEX and TXT). It is important to note that ali
font files must be in the same sub-directory as the TurboCAD program files.
(The default is the NORMAL font) .
Page 6- 18
Page 6- 19
Setup
Chapter6
6.6 DIMENSIONS PULLDOWN MENU
JUSTIFY
This is the justification point to be used for text as it is added to
the drawing. Text ha.s nine possible justification points numbered
as follows :
*3
*2
*1
Environnent
Layers
Conflguratlon
I S: S I
Dlnenslons
Pen Colour
Layer
Text Uldth
Text Helght
Text Font
*9
lit)
Text
Other ent l tles

1 ~e
sion
yLlne
3 . 088
Arrow lype
To t al Digits
Decl""l Places
*8
Labe 1
Abov e Ln
Suppress ExtLn tlo Supp
For Ho Fit
Go Right
*7
lf you use point 5 as the justification point for the text "ISSI" as
in the above example, the text will be drawn so that it is centered
around the point specified when creating the text.
The justification point used here only affects new text (Use the
CHANGE command to change the justification of existing text).
Men: 205
Cl
He
L 8 P 1
PENCOLOR
QUICKTEXT
The quick text mode is used to speed up redraws. Generating text
on a graphics screen requires a vast amount of ealculation and thus
appears slowly. In Quick Text mode, TurboCAD will draw a box
around the arca that would be occupied by text rather than drawing
the text itself. This process is very much faster and is useful while
you are finalizing your drawing as you probably only need to know
where the text is rather than the detail of what it says at this stage.
If quick text mode is active, a "Q" will appear in the status arca
at the bottom right of the screen.
(The default value is OFF).
This value denotes the pen number or color to be used as dimensions

are added to the drawing. This value only affects new dimensions
(Use the CHANGE command to change the color o f existing dimensions).
LAYER
This value determines the !ayer on which drawing dimcnsions will
be placed as they are creatcd. This value only affocts new dimensions
(Use the CHANGE command to change the !ayer of existing dimensions).
TEXTWIDTH
This is the width in drawing uni ts that the widest text character
used in the dimension label will occupy as dimensions are added
to the drawing.
Page 6-20
Pag e 6 - 21
...
Chapter6
Setup
Numbers are spaced proportionally, so not ali numbers will occupy
the same space. This value only affects new dimensions (Use the
CHANGE command to change the text width of existing dimensions). (The default value is 3.000).
Press the <SpaceBar> or <Left> or <Right> key to shift the highlight in the window to the desired font, then press <RETURN> to
select the highlighted font. This will cause the HELP window to
disappear and the selected font will appear in the dimension
pulldown menu. TurboCAD is supplied with five font files (COMPLEX, ITALIC, NORMAL, SIMPLEX and TXT). It is important to
note that ali font files must be in the same sub-directory as the
TurboCAD program files .
TEXTHEIGHT
This is the height in drawing units that text used as labels in dimensions will occupy as dirnensions are added to the drawing. This
value only affects new dimensions (Use the CHANGE cornmand to
change the text height of existing dirnensions). (The default value
is 3.000).
(The default is the NORMAL font) .
ARROWTYPE
This value defines the type of arrow which will be used when dirnen sions are added to the drawing. This value only affects new dirnen sions (Use the CHANGE comrnand to change the arrow type of
existing dimensions). This value is the name associated with an
arrow file stored on disk. You sirnply type in the name of this file .
Different arrow types can be used on the same drawing.
TEXTFONT
This value defines the font which will be used for dirnension labels
when dirnensions are added to the drawing . This value only affeets
new dirnensions (Use the CHANGE cornmand to change the font
of existing dirnensions) . This value is the name associated with a
font file stored on disk. You simply type in the name of this file.
Different fonts can be used on the sarne drawing.
In addition to the normal context sensitive help available, if the

HELP <Fl> key is pressed when the blinking underscore cursor
appears, a window will open in which the list of available arrow
files is
displayed.

appears, a window will open in which the list of available font files
is displayed.
Environnent
Envlronnent
Lnyers
Conrlgurntlon
Text
D 1""" lons
Layers
ConF lgurnt Ion
Other entl tles
Text
Dl""flsions
Other entl tles
Pen Colour
Lnyer
Pen Colour
Lnyer
Text Uidth
Text Hel<lht
Text Uldth
Iext Hel~t
IurboCAD Dlrectory oF C:,IC .

5 Font Files Found .
CCJ11PLEX ITALIC
HORMAL
SIMPLEK lKI
TurboCAD Dlrectory oF C:,TC.

HORMAL
t Arrow File Found.

e
11e": 284
ne":
CI
204
Cl
L
Page 6-22
He
8 P t
- ----
He
8 P t
Page 6-23
Setup
Chapter6
Press the <Spacellar> or <Lert> or <Right> key to shift the highlight in the window to the desired arrow file and then press the
<RETURN> key to select the highlighted arrow type. This will
cause the HELP window to disappear and the selected arrow type
will appear in the dimension pulldown menu.
TurboCAD is supplied with l arrow file (NORMAL).
It is important to note that all arrow files must be in the same
sub-directory as the TurboCAD program files.
(The default is the NORMAL arrow type).

Each arrow type is kept in a separate text file on disk. This meaos
that it is possible to create your own arrow types using any text
editor (Simply create a file with a file extension .ARO that conforms
to the necessary formal).
For example, the arrow file NORMAL.ARO that comes wilh
TurboCAD contains the following:
File
Contents
o
o
-3
0.5
o
o
-3
-0.5
Wider
Arrow
Meaning
This arrow consists

Relative X position
Relative Y position
Relative X position
Relative Y position
Blank line between
Relalive X position
Relative Y position
Relative X position
Relative Y position
of two lines
3
of start of firsl line
O
of start of first line
O
of end of first line
-3
of end of firsl line
1.5
line specifications
of start of second line O
of start of second line O
of end of second line -3
of end of second line -1.5
-3
1.5
-3
-1.5
Page 6-24
6.6 DIMENS/ONS PULLDOWN MENU
NOTES
1. All X and Y coordinates give a position relative to the point at
which the arrow will be drawn in TurboCAD
2. You ALWAYS define an arrow pointing hoiizontally to the right.
TurboCAD will rotate it where necessary.
3. The name you use for the file will be the name you specify in
the setup screen to actvate that arrow type.
4. The right hand column shows the specification for a wider arrow
with a closed back.
TOTAL DIGITS
This value determines thc number of places that will be uscd whcn
displaying the cursor position in thc top right of the TurboCAD
drawing scrcen. It is designcd for use if you are using a large scalc
factor and the cursor coordinates become large numbers.
DECIMAL PLACES
This value determines the number of decimal places that will be
displayed in any dimension added to the drawing. This value only
affects new dimensions (Use the CHANGE command to change thc
number of decimals of existing dimensions). This valuc also affects
the display of the cursor position as reflected in the top right of
the TurboCAD drawing screen.
LABEL
This value determines where the dimension labels will be placed
rclative to the dimension line as dimensions are added to the drawing. This value only affects new dimensions (Use the CHANGE
command to change the !abe! position of existing dimensions). The
!abe! can be above (Above Ln), below (Below Ln) or on the line
(On Line).
Page 6-25
Chapter6
Setup
Dlnensions
Dlns:
Arrow
Horizontl
Parall"l
Radlus
Vertlc"I
~~~~-'.200~~~~~
Hint: If you do not want extension lines at ali, draw a separate linc
as the dimension line, the extremities of which are in line with
thosc of lhe line to be dimensioned.
(The dcfault value is No Supp).
FORNOFIT
2210
e:-= ~ =::_::_
____ .___ .___ ____ ______.______
- ~I
If you are drawing lo a largc scalc or are requesting a largc numbcr
"
[~~~~~~- - --- -~-~~- ---.---------- -~I

On,
ar
Above
Bela-w
11en:
of decimal places for dimensions, TurboCAD may nol be able lo

fit lhe dimension !abe! between the two dimension extension lines.
If this happens, TurboCAD will place the !abe! outside the extension
lines. This value tells TurboCAD whether to put the !abe! on the
right or lcft in this case.
1831
Op
L 8 ""
P 1
(The default value is Above Ln).
Dlnenslons
263
65
Dins:
Arrow
Horizontl
p.,r.,llel
Radlua
v..rtlcal
r100c0-
L________________ ___I
SUPPRESS EXTLN
This value gives you the option of suppressing either of the exlcnsion
lines which are drawn from lhc drawing lo eilher end of the dimension line . You use "Lcfl" lo suppress lhe lcfl, "Righl" lo supprcss
thc righl, or "No Supp" lo include bolh exlension lines .
146
Menu :
Are
Change
Dl,...nslon
FancyLine
471-i_ ______ __r
1-- ------ --- r61

Go
Left
o2
ar
Right
Hatch
~~~~~~200
Li,,..
tee
He
L BP 1
neasure
- ------------ ------------ ---- -- ---- -----
Men:
Op
Point
Sketch
Text
l-- - --- - - --- - ----~~---- - - ----------
(The default value is Go Right).
Quit
200
L______________ ___
_________ _____________ I
Suppress
1
Page 6-26
ar
R
1
~:"~ ;~
6.6 D/MENSIONS PULLDOWN MENU
Page 6-27
Chapter6
Setup
6.7 OTHER ENTITIES PULLDOWN MENU

Env ir<>ntlent
Layers
Conf lguratlon
Text
Dlnensions
Given enough magnification on the screen (zooming) you will be

able to see the actual separate lines. Line thicknesses of O through
255 can be specified. This setup parameter applies to ares as we ll
as lines.
Other enti tles
Pen Colour
Layer
Thlckness
Line Type
"'--
1
8
8
8
on
ne
(The default is O i.e. an infinitely thin line).
J..108
t1easurD
Point
Sketch
Text
Qui t
Men: 285
CI
Ha
8 P 1
PENCOLOR
This value denotes the pen number or color to be used as drawing
entities other than text or dimensions are added to the drawing.
This value only affects new entities (Use the CHANGE command
to change the color of existing entities).
LAYER
This value determines the !ayer on which drawing entities other
than text or dimensions (e.g. lines, ares, hatches) will be placed as
they are created. This value only affects new entities (Use the
CHANGE command to change the !ayer of existing entities).
THICKNESS
TurboCAD draws thick lines by drawing multiple parallel lines on
either side of the defined line. These lines are spaced <0.2mm apart
so that even using a fine plotter pen (0.3mm) they appear as single
solid lines when plotted.
Page 6- 28
6.70THER ENTITIES PULLDOWN MENU
6.7 OTHER ENTITIES PULLDOWN MENU
Page 6-29
Chapter6
LINETYPE
This is the number of the line type to be used when a line is drawn
using TurboCAD. Different line types can be used on the same drawing.
Line type O will always be a solid line, but line types 1 to 100 are
user definable. They are ALL stored in a file called LINETYPE.LIN.
TurboCAD is supplied with four line types in this file. Simply edit
this file (using any editor in non-document mode) to create your
own line types making sure any additions conform to the necessary
forma t.
- 41111
The TRANSFER key <F3> will cause a series of pull down mcnu
options to appcar at the top of the screen as shown bclow.
Plot
Craphlcs prlnt
Read
Urite
Files
Are
Chnn9<0
Dinension
FnncyL!ne
Hatch
Line
Me asure
As supplied, the file LINETYPE.LIN contains the following:

File
Contents
Point
Sketch
Text
Meaning
Ouit
There are 8 line types in the file

Blank line before lst line type definition
4
4
2
4mm dash, 2mm gap, 4mm dash
2
2
1
2mm dash, lmm gap, 2mm dash
Blank line between line specifications
"""'
2851
O O
R
Cl
H.,
L 8 P 1
8
2
8mm dash. 2mm gap, 2mm dash
2
Blank llne between Une specifications
9
5
2

1
1
8

8
1
2
8mm dash, 2mm gap, lmm dash
21
1
2 l mm dash, 2mm gap, l mm dash
Blank line between line speclfications

2
Blank Une between line specifications

9
3
2
To add a fifth line type, change the 4 in the first line to a 5 and add
another 3 numbers giving the Jength of dashl, dash2, and the gap in
that sequence (Remember to leave a blank line between line
definitions). (The default value is O).
Page 6- 30
6.lOTHER ENTITIES PULLDOWN MENU
These options will allow you to perform a number of transfers using

a system of pulldown menus. You can print or plot your drawing
or save it to disk. In addition, you can read or write interface files
as well as deleting or renaming drawing files already saved to disk.
The TRANSFER pulldown menus allow you lo initiate transfers as
well as setting up parameters which govem these transfers. Options
on the pulldown menus which are enclosed in boxes are options
which perform actions whilst the other options represent parameters.
To effect a transfer or change a parameter value:
1. Select a pulldown menu by doing either of the following:
Press the <SpaceBar> or <Left> or <Right> key to shift the highlight at the top of the screen to the desired option, then press
<RETURN> or the <Down> cursor key to select the highlightcd
option; OR ...
Page 7- 1
Chapter 7
Transfer Utilities
Press the first letter of the desired option. 2. Once a pulldown menu
appears, use the <Up> and <Down> cursor keys lo select the action
you wish to perform or the value you wish to change. If you wish
to change to another pulldown menu al this stage use any of the
methods described in (1) above.
3. Press <RETURN> to perform the highlighted action or to alter
the value of the highlighted parameter.
Depending on what parameter is selected, you will be able to alter
its value in one of two ways:
7.1 PLOT PULLDOWN MENU

Plot
Gr.,phlcs prlnt
Read
Urlte
Files
Are
Cliange
Plotter Port
LPll
Baud R"te
4900
Parlty
Odd
Data Bits
8
Stop Bits
1
1
Plot to File
1
Plot File
cieno
Dlr
A:
Dinension
FancyLine
Hatch
Llne
tleasure
Point
Sketch
Text
Qui
1. The parameter value will be restricted to a set list of values. In

this case, the value displayed on the screen changes as soon as you
press the <RETURN> key. Simply continue pressing <RETURN>
and the displayed value will toggle through all the possible values
for that parameter. Continue this process until the desired value
appears.
Hen: 205
2. The highlight will vanish and a small blinking underscore will

appear immediately to the right of the displayed value. You must
type in either the number or text string you wish to assign and then
press <RETURN> to accepl this value. If you have typed in a new
value, but have not yet pressed <RETURN> to accept it, you can
reslore the old value by pressing <Ctrl-R>.
If al any stage you are not sure for what a parameter is used, press
the HELP <Fl> key with that parameler highlighted. This will bring
up a help window with information on that parameter.
When you are salisfied lhat ali the parameters displayed are set to
the necessary values, move lhe highlighl lo lhe aclion you wish lo
initate and press <RETURN>. This will cause an additional window
to appear which confirms that lhe selected transfer has been initiated.
Once the transfer is complete, TurboCAD will exit the TRANSFER
screen.
You can access thc TRANSFER pulldown menus directly by pressing
lhe <Ctrl> kcy simullaneously with lhe first letter of lhe desired
TRANSFER menu option al any time the main menu appears on
the TurboCAD drawing scrcen e.g. <Ctrl-G> will bring up the
Graphics Print pulldown mcnu.
Page 7- 2
a a
Cl
He
L 0 P 1
TurboCAD will plot the current screen view. This means lhat to
plot the whole drawing, the screen view must correspond to thc
paper size (you can use the ZOOM RETURN key <Ctrl-BackSpace> to ensure this). If you are zoomed in, TurboCAD will plot
a magnified view of the section of the drawing corresponding to
the screen view al that time.
NOTE
It is not necessary to complete a redraw operation of lhe screcn
view in order lo plot. You musl just be al the right zoom posilion.
PLOTTOPORT
This option is used lo plol the currenl drawing. If you are sure lhe
parameters in this pulldown menu are correcl for lhc hardware configuralion you are using, press <RETURN> wilh lhis oplion highlighted. This will make the following sub-window appear:
Page 7-3
Chapter 7
Plot
Transfer Utilities
Crllphics prlnt
Read
Urite
Files
Are
Clu1nge
Di,_,., ion
FnncyLlne
press REIURtl
!#>en plotter is ready.
Hntch
'arl~y
Data Bits
8
Stop Bits
1
1
Plot to File
Plot File
deno
Dir
Llne
Measura
the default (O). TurboCAD will then send the plotter commands
required for the plotter currently selected (refer to section on the
SETUP key <F2> Configuration) to the selected port. Once the dra w ing has been plotted, TurboCAD will exit the TRANSFER screen
and return you to your drawing.
Point
Sketch
A:
le>et
NOTE
Quit
To interrupl plotting at any stage, press the <Ese> key. TurboCAD

will stop plotting as soon as the contents of the plot buffer have
been completed.
PLOTTER PORT
"""' 2115
o o
CJ
He
L 8 P t
Check lhal your plotter is powered on and lhat it is selecled, lhen

press <RETURN>. TurboCAD will lhen prompt you for a pen
velocity.
Plot
Graphics prlnt
RP.ad
Urlte
Are
Dinension
FancyLine
Hntch
'ari1y
Data Bits
Stop Bits
1
Plot to File
Plot Fi Je
Dlr
8
1
1
DEl10
A:
(The default value is LPTl).
Files
Change
Pen Yelocity : 0
This is the port to which output to the plotter will be sent. Refer
to your hardware manual to establish with what ports you have
been supplied. In general, if you have a single parallel interface
card, this will be LPTl and a single serial interface card will be
COMl. Pressing the <RETURN> key will toggle through the possible values (LPTl, COMI, COM2, LPT2, LPT3).
Llne
11easure
Point
Sketch
le>et
Quit
BAUDRATE
This is the rate al which data will be transferred to the plotter port
if you are using a serial port as the plotter port. If you are using
a serial plotler, refer to your plotter manual to see whal this baucl
rate setting should be. Pressing <RETURN> will toggle through
the possible baud rales (110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600).
PARITY
"""' 2115
o o
Cl
Ha
L 8 P t
This is the parity which will be used when sending elata if you are
using a serial port as the plotter port. If you are using a serial
plotter, rcfer to your plotter manual to see what the parity setting
should be. Pressing <RETURN> will toggle through the possible
parity settings (Odd, Even, None)
(The default value is Odd).
This value which affects lhe plotter drawing speed will be senl lo
the plotter as a plotter velocily command (refer lo your plotter
manual to find out whal value is best). Type in the desired value
followed by <RETURN> or simply press <RETURN> to accepl
Page 7- 4
Page 7- 5
Transfer Utilities
Chapter 7
Plot
DATA BITS
Craphles prlnt
Read
Urite
Files
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-.
This is the number of bits which are used for data transfer if you
are using a serial port as the plotter port. lf you are using a serial
plotter, refer to your plotter manual to see what number of data
bits are used. Pressing <RETURN> will toggle through the possible
data bit settings (8, 7).
Are
Chnnge
Dinension
FancyLine
Hateh
Llne
LPT1
Plotter Port
Baud Rate
Parlty
4980
Odd
Me.asure
Point
Sketch
Text
press REIURli
Qui t
STOP BITS
This is the number of stop bits which are used for data transfer if
you are using a serial port as the plotter port. If you are using a
serial plotter, refer to your plotter manual to see how many stop
bits are used. Pressing <RETURN> will toggle through the possible
data bit settings (1, 2).
"""' 205
Cl
Ha
L 8 P 1
(The default value is l ).
Check that your disk drive is ready, then press <RETURN> .

TurboCAD will then prompt you for a pen velocity.
PLOTTOF1LE
This option allows you to send the plotter output to a disk file
rather than to the plotter. This can be useful if you wish to spool
to the plotter or plot multiple copies of the same drawing.
Plot
Craphles prlnt
1. Plot the drawing to a disk file .
4988
Odd
Pen Yeloeity : 0
2. Quit TurboCAD.
Urlte
Files
Are
Chnnge
LPT1
Plotter Port
Baud Rate
Parlty
To spool a drawing:
Re ad
Dinension
FancyLine
Hatch
Llne
Me asure
Point
Sketch
Text
Qui t
3. Use the DOS PRINT command to plot the drawing. The DOS
PRINT command is a print spooler and so the DOS prompt will
reappear before the drawing has been completely plotted. At this
stage, you can restart TurboCAD and start on a new drawing while
the old one is being plotted. Refer to your DOS manual for more
information on the PRINT command such as how to place multiple
plots in a queue.
"""' 205
Cl
L
He
8 P t
This value which affects the plotter drawing speed will be stored
on disk as part of the plotfile and will be sent to the plotter as a
plotter velocity command if the plotfile is plotted (refer to your
plotter manual to find out what value is best). Type in the desired
value followed by <RETURN> or simply press <RETURN> to
Page 7- 6
7. 1 PLOT PULLDOWN MENU
Page 7- 7
Chapter 7
Transfer Utilities
accept the default (O). TurboCAD will then send the plotter commands required for the plotter currently selected (refer to section
on the SETUP key <F2> Configuration) to a disk file with the
specified name.
Plni
cr .. phics print
P lotter Port
Baud Rate
Parlty
Read
llrite
Files
LPJ1
Du1nge.
Are
n..asure
Plotting
Point
Sketch
Je>Ct
Plot
Gr .. phlcs print
Read
Dinens1on
F"ncyLine
""tch
Line
4888
Odd
7.2 GRAPHICS PRINT PULLDOWN MENU

Prjnt to fod- ---]
Printer Port
LPJ1
Baud Rnte
9688
P"rity
Odd
Data Bits
8
Stop Bits
1
1
Prjnt to File
1
Print File
Dcno
Dlr
A:
llri te
Files
Dlange
Are
Dinension
FancyLine
""tch
Llne
He asure
Point
Sketch
Jext
Quit
Quit
Cl
2851
Cl
He
""" ' 2112

L
Men:
8 P t
He
8 P t
NOTE
TurboCAD will prinl the current screen view. This means that to
print the whole drawing, the screen view must correspond to thc
paper size (you can use the ZOOM RETURN key <Ctrl-BackSpace> to ensure this). If you are zoomed in, TurboCAD will prinl
a magnified view of the section of the drawing corresponding to
the screen view at that time.
To interrupl plolling al any stage, press the <Ese> key. TurboCAD

will stop plotting as soon as the plot buffer is emplied.
NOTE
PLOTFILE
lt is not necessary to complete a redraw operation of the screen

view in order to print, you must just be al the right zoom position .
This is the name which will be used for the plotfile if you plot
your drawing lo disk. You can use any eight lellers as the file name
and TurboCAD will append a .PLT file extension.
PRINT TO PORT
Once the drawing has been sent to a plolfile, TurboCAD will exil
the TRANSFER screen and relurn you to your drawing.
(The default is the name of your current drawing)
DIR
This oplion is used to print the current drawing. If you are sure
the parameters in this pulldown menu are correct for the hardware
configuration you are using, press <RETURN> wilh this option
highlighted. This will make the following sub-window appear:
This is the directory where TurboCAD will store the plotfile if you
plot your drawing to disk. You can use any DOS sub-directory which
has already been created on your system.(The default is the subdirectory of your current drawing)
Page 7- 8
Page 7- 9
Chapter 7
Plot
Transfer Utlties
Crephlcs prlnt
Read
llhen printer is ready.
Urite
Files
Are
Change
Dinension
FnncyLine
Hntch
Llne
press REJURH
<irlfy
Data Bits
8
Stop Bits
t
1
Print to File
1
Print File
DEMO
Dlr
A:
Mea.gura
Point
Sketch
Text
Quit
scans giving you an indication of how much of the drawing has

been converted.
Plot
Read
Crnphlcs prlnt
Printing .. busy on sean

'l!lr l ty
16
rtone
Data Bits
7
Stop Bits
1
1
Print to F lo
1
Prlnt File
DEMO
Dlr
C:
Urlte
Files
Change.
Are
Dinens1on
FnncyLlne
Hntch
Llne
tleasure
Point
Sketch
Jext
Quit
l1e1.: 285
Cl
L
He
8 P t
"""' 284
Check that your printer is powered on, then press <RETURN>.

TurboCAD will then prompt that it is busy printing.
Plot
Crarhlcs rrlnt
Read
Prlntlng
llrlte
Files
Are
Clwmge
Dinension
CI
He
L 8 P t
Once the drawing has been printed, TurboCAD will exit the TRANSFER screen and retum you to your drawing.
FancyLine
ar1ty
Dete Bits
?
Stop Bita
1
1
Prlnf fo F lle
1
Prlnt File
DEMO
Dlr
C:
Hatch
Llne
t1eaure
NOTE
Polnt
Sketch
Text
To interrupt printing at any stage, press the <Ese> kcy. TurboCAD

will stop printing as soon as the print buffer is empticd.
Qult
PRINTER PORT
ne..:
284
CI
lle
L 8 P 1
In order to print a drawing on a dot matrix printer, TurboCAD has

to convert the drawing into a raster sean. This process requires a
large number of calculations so picase be patient. TurboCAD will
send the printer commands required for the printer currently selected
(refer to section on the SETUP key <F2> Configuration) to the
selected port. TurboCAD will count down to zero as it prints and
Page 7- 10
--
This is the port to which output to the printer will be sent. Refer
to your hardware manual to establish what ports you have been
supplied with. In general, if you have a single parallel interface
card, this will be LPTI and a single serial interface card will be
COMI. Pressing the <RETURN> key will togglc through the possible values (LPTI, COMI, COM2, LPT2, LPT3).
(The default value is LPTI ).
BAUDRATE
This is the ratc al which data will be transferred to thc printcr port
if you are using a serial port as the printer port. lf you are using
a serial printer, refer to your printer manual to scc what this baud
--- - - --
Page 7 - 11
Chapter 7
Transfer Utilities
rale selling should be. Pressing <RETURN> will loggle through

the possible baud rales (110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600).
2. Quit TurboCAD.
3. Use the DOS PRINT command to print the drawing . The DOS
PRINT command is a print spooler and so the POS prompt will
reappear before the drawing has been completely printed. At this
stage, you can restart TurboCAD and start on a new drawing while
the old one is being printed. Refer to your DOS manual for more
inforrnation on the PRINT command such as how to place multiple
prints in a queue.
(The defaull value is 9600).
PARITY
This is the parily which will be used when sending data if you are
using a serial port as the printer port. If you are using a serial
printer, refer to your ploller manual to see what lhe parily selling
should be. Pressing <RETURN> will loggle through the possible
parity sellings (Odd, Even, None) .
(The default value is Odd) .
Plot
Craphlcs prlnt
RelKI
Urlte
Printer Port
Baud Rate
PBrlty
LPTl
9688
Odd
DATA BITS
This is the number of bits which are used for data transfer if you
are using a serial port as lhe printer port. If you are using a serial
printer, refer to your printer manual lo see whal number of data
bits are used. Pressing <RETURN> will loggle through the possible
data bit sellings (8, 7).
Files
.-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-,
llhen disk is rsady.
press RETURll
Are
Chenge
Dinension
FBncyLlne
Hatch
Llne
f1ettSurn
Point
Sketch
Text
(]uit
STOP BITS
11en: 205
This is the number of stop bits which are used for dala transfer if
you are using a serial porl as the printer port. If you are using a
serial printer, refer lo your prinler manual lo see how many stop
bits are used . Pressing <RETURN> will toggle lhrough lhe possible
data bit sellings (1, 2).
CI
L
Ha
8 P t
Check that your disk drive is ready, then press <RETURN> .
(The defaull value is l).
PRINT TO FILE
This option allows you lo send the printer output lo a disk file
rather than to the prinler. This can be useful if you wish to spool
to the printer or print multiple copies of the same drawing.
To spool a drawing:
l. Print the drawing to a disk file .
Page 7- 12
Page 7- 13
r
1,
Chapter 7
Plot
Transfer Utilties
Gr .. phles prlnt
Read
Urlte
Files
t
Are
Changa
Printer Port
B<lud Rafe
P.. rl ty
Once the drawing has been printed, TurboCAD will exit the TRANSFER screen and retum you to your drawing.
Dineosion
FancyLlne
Ll'll
9688
Odd
Hatch
NOTE
Llne
He asura
Printing ..
Point
Sketch
Text
To interrupt printing al any stage, press tbe <Ese> key. TurboCAD

will stop printing as soon as tbe contents of tbe print buffer have
been completed.
Qult
PRINTFILE
This is the name which will be used for tbe print file if you print
your drawing to disk. You can use any eight letters as tbe file name
and TurboCAD will append a .PRN file extension.
"""'
1931
Cl
He
L
8 P t
In order to print a drawing on a dot matrix printer, TurboCAD has

to convert the drawing into a raster sean. This requires a large number of calculations so be patient. TurboCAD will send the printer
commands required for the printer currently selected (refer to section
on the SETUP key <F2> Configuration) to a disk file with the
specified name. lt will count down to zero as it prints to disk and
scans giving you an indication of how much of the drawing has
been converted.
Pin+
Gr .. phles prlnt
Read
Urlte
Files
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Printer Port
LPll
B<lud Rate
P.. rlty
9688
Odd
(The default is the name of your current drawing).
DIR
This is the directory where TurboCAD will store the printfile if
you print your drawing to disk. You can use any DOS sub-directory
which has already been created on your system.
(The default is the sub-directory of your current drawing) .
Are
Changa
DirMmcion
F .. ncyLlne
Hatch
Llne
Me asure
busy
on sean
37
Point
Sketch
Text
Qui t
Men:
2831
Cl
He
L 8 P t
Page 7- 14
Page 7- 15
Chapter 7
Transfer Utilities
READ HPGL FILE
7.3 READ PULLDOWN MENU

Plot
Llrite
R~ad
Crephlcs prlnt
This option reads in a file which is in HPGL. HPGL is the plottcr

language designed by Hewlett Packard for transmi tting drawings to
their plotters. This language has become an industry standard and
so many plotters on the market operate with these commands or
can be set to respond to these commands.
FI les
l "1.!:tn~.1!'" I =~
1FI le "-e
llefto
1 FancyLlne
A:
Dlr
Hatch
Llne
Heasura
Any drawing from any computer graphics or drawing package which

provides a means of writing its plotter output to disk can be read
into TurboCAD in this way provided the output was written to disk
using a plotter driver conforming to the HPGL formal. When you
press the <RETURN> key, TurboCAD will respond as follows and
read in the HPGL file.
Point
Sketch
Text
Quit
Plot
Crephlcs prlnt
Read
Urite
Files
I' .... ' \\::''"' '" 'I

Read 1
"-e
Dlr
""": 284
Cl
DEnO
DEnO
C:
8 P t
Point
Sketch
Text
Qui t
This option will read a TurboCAD interface file using the file name
and sub-directory specified in the read pulldown menu. (Refer to
the section on Interface Files under Advanced Topics for information
on interface files and their uses).
Plot
, ......1o.
Read
.
Dinension
FencyLine
Hatch
Llne
ne..........
H"
READ INTERFACE FILE
Change
Are
Urite
R"nd ing . .
Files
DEnO
m
....
Dlr
"""
1
C:'
1 ...
11en: 284
:;~:;:
ci:>ange .
Hatch
Llne
He asure
Point
Sketch
Text
Quit
Cl
L
He
8 P t
FILENAME
This is the name of the file which you wish TurboCAD to read. A
file extension of .INT will be assumed for TurboCAD interface files
whilst one of .PLT will be assumed for HPGL p!ot files.
11en: 186

appears, a window will open requesting on what type of file you
want help.
CI
He
L 8 P t
Page 7- 16
~-
Page 7- 17
Chapter 7
Plot
Transfer Utilities
Gr.,phics print
1j
Urite
11..ad
D-.....t
1.-.4.--1"
I'"; 1-
Files
j j
Are
Plot
Gr .. phles prlnt
llead
Urlte
Files
Are
1 Qlange
Ch..-.ge
Dinension
Dinensi or
F"ncyLine
f.,ncyLI ......
Hatch
Hatch
TurboCAD Dlrectory of A: .
Llne
Do you .... nt Interface or Plot Filas 7
(l~P)
ne..........
Point
Sketch
Text
llui t
lluit
11e": 283
"""' 283
Cl
He
L 8 P t
Simply press <RETURN> if you wish to use TurboCAD's own

interface files, or else typc in "P" followed by <RETURN> for thc
plot files. TurboCAD will then display in the window a list of ali
files found with the relevant file extension in the currently selected
READ directory.
Press the <SpaceBar> or <Left> or <Right> key to shift the highlight in the window to the desired file name and then press Lhe
<RETURN> key Lo select the highlightcd file. This will cause Lhe
HELP window to disappear and Lhe selected file name will appear
in the read pulldown menu .
CI
L
Plot
Graphles prlnt
llead
Urite
He
8 P t
Files:
Are
Ch..-.ge
TurboCAD Dlreetory of C:,ERIC.

OILRJG
Dinension
r.,ncyLlne
Hatch
llui t
"""' 205
Cl
He
L 8 P t
DIR
This is the direclory where TurboCAD will search for the TurboCAD
Interface files or HPGL plot files when attempting to read them in .
You can use any DOS sub-directory which has already been created
on your system.(The default is the sub-directory of your current
drawing)
Page 7- 18
Page 7- 19
Chapter 7
Transfer Utilties
Plot
7.4 WRITE PULLDOWN MENU
Crnphlcs prlnt
Read
llrlte
Files
llritlng
Plot
Crnphlcs prlnt
Read
llrlte
Files
Llne
Me asure
Point
Sketch
Text
Llne
ne asure
Point
Qult
Sketch
Text
Quit
"""' 194
Cl
He
L 8 P 1
Me": 284
Cl
L
He
8 P 1
FILENAME
This is the file name which TurboCAD will use when writing out
an interface file. A file extension of .INT will be assumcd.
WRITE INTERFACE FILE

This option will write a TurboCAD interface file using the file name
and sub-directory specified in the write pulldown menu.
(Refer to the section on Interface Files under Advanced Topics for
information on whal interface files are and their uses).
DIR
This is the directory to which TurboCAD will write thc TurboCAD
interface file. You can use any DOS sub-directory which has already
been created on your system.
(The default is the sub-directory of your current drawing).
Page 7-20
Page 7-21
Chapter 7
Transfer Utilities
7.5 FILES PULLDOWN MENU

Plot
Read
Craphlcs prlnt
NOTE
Urlte
You can use this option to save a different copy of a drawing to

the original by specifying a different sub-director; and/or drawing
name to what was used when creating or loading the drawing. Changing this directory does not affect the drawing directory specified at
the time you started or loaded a drawing, so TurboCAD will always
save a drawing lo lhe same sub-direclory from which it was loaded
if you lake lhe oplion lo SAVE the drawing when you QUIT.
Files
asure
Point
Sketch
Text
Plot
Craphlcs print
Read
Qui t
Urite
Files
Ready to Reoane
tteo.
:DOODLE
"""
ne.. ,
284
Ouit
Cl
tle
L 8 P t
The files pulldown menu lets you save, rename or erase a drawing
SAVE DRAWING
ne.. :
This menu option will save the current drawing using the drawing
name and sub-directory specified in the Files pulldown menu.
Plot
Read
Craphlcs prlnt
Urite
Saving
FI les
r.rase urawina
Drawlng
Dlr
Cl
tle
L 8 P t
RENAME DRAWING
"-~
DEl10
1
1
204
ion
ine
DD10
C:'
neasura
This menu oplion will rename a drawing file and all its associated
files. Pressing <RETURN> with lhis menu option highlighted will
cause TurboCAD to request the new name to be used for the drawing
as follows:
Point
Sketch
Text
Oui t
nen:
2021
Cl
tle
L 8 P t
Page 7-22
Page 7-23
Chapter 7
Transfer Utlities
NOTE
You can use this option to save a different copy of a drawing to
the original by specifying a different sub-directory and/or drawing
name to what was used when creating or loading the drawing. Changing this direclory does not affect the drawing directory specified at
lhe time you slartcd or loaded a drawing, so TurboCAD will always
save a drawing to the same sub-directory from which it was Joaded
if you take the option to SAVE the drawing when you QUIT.
Plot
cr ..phlcs print
Re ad
Mrlte
Simply lype in lhe name you wish to use and press <RETURN>
to get TurboCAD to rename the relevant files.
Plot
cr .. phlcs prlnt
Re ad
Mrite
Files
OILRIG
asure
Point
Sketch
Files
rext
lleady to Reo"""
tleH nat1e :DOODLE
Qui t
asure
Point
Sketch
rext
Me": 204
Quit
Cl
L
If you try lo renamc a drawing that doesn't exist, TurboCAD will

respond with an error message as shown below. Simply follow the
screen inslructions to continue (i.e., press <RETURN>).
Me": 284
Cl
L
He
8 P t
He
8 P 1
Plot
Graphlcs prlnt
Read
Mrite
Files
Ready to Ren8ne
RENAME DRA WING
Drawing does not exist

Press REilJRH to cont lnue
This menu oplion will rename a drawing file and ali its associated
files . Pressing <RETURN> with this menu option highlighted will
cause TurboCAD to request the new name lo be used for the drawing
as follows:
11--...-t
IU:'NI
asure
Point
Sketch
Text
Quit
"""' 204
Cl
He
L 8 P 1
Pape 7-24
7.5 FILES PULLOOWN MENU
7.5 FILES PULLOOWN MENU
Page 7-25
Transfer Utlities
Chapter 7
Plot
ERASE DRAWING
Graphlcs prlnt
Read
Graphlcs prlnt
Re ad
Urlte
Files
lleady to Erase
DEl'I()
Are you sure C \l/H) ?
This menu option will delete a drawing file and ali its associated
files from disk. TurboCAD will delete the drawing specified from
the specified sub-directory. Pressing <RETURN> with this menu
option highlighted will cause TurboCAD to request confirmation
before it actually deletes as follows:
Plot
Urite
asure
Point
Sketch
fext
FI les
Quit
Ready to Erase
DEl10
Are you sure C \l/H) ?
Men: 284
Cl
He
L 8 P 1
Ouit
If you try to delete a drawing that doesn't exist, TurboCAD will
respond with an error message as shown below. Simply follow thc

screen instructions to continue (i.e., press <RETURN>).
Men: 284
Cl
L
Plot
Graphlcs prlnt
Read
Urite
Files
e
Ready to Renane
DEMO
Drawing does not exist
Press RETURH to contlnue
Ha
8 P 1
n.... .=.L&tnn
If you press <RETURN> without entering anything or after typing
"Y" or press <Ese>, TurboCAD will not delete the drawing files .
You must type in "Y" followed by <RETURN>, in which case
TurboCAD will confirm the deleting action as follows:
llJOHll
asure
Point
Sketch
fext
Qui t
Men: 204
Cl
L
Page 7-26
He
8 P 1
Page 7-27
Chapter 7
DRAWING
This is the name of the file which TurboCAD will erase or rename
or to which TurboCAD will save the curren! drawing.
lf the HELP <Fl> key is pressed when the blinking underscore
cursor appears, a window will open in which the list of available
drawing files is displayed.
Craphics print
Plot
Read
llrite
--~11
The CALCULATOR key <F4> brings up a window in the middle
of the screen whieh is the TurboCAD built in scientific calculator.
Files
[Cale
TurboCAD Directory of C:'llAVID.
MICRO
GRAPH
HATCH
DEl10
5 Drawlng
BOLT
:O
HH
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Functlons :
-.
COS,
JAtl.
<Ctrl> S
.
/,
ARCTAH, Ltl.
to store In
A.
LOG,
ABS.
SQRT.
SOR. SIH.
E><P.
FACT.
MIJ1.
"""'ry
reglsters
.,...
Ouit
..
Men: 284
tlen: 285
CI
CI
tia
8 P t
Press the <SpaceBar> or <Left> or <Right> key to shift the highlight to the desired drawing, then press the <RETURN> key to
select the highlighted drawing. This will cause the HELP window
to disappear. The selectcd drawing will appear in the files pulldown
menu.
DIR
This is the directory which TurboCAD will use when erasing, renaming or saving a drawing. You can use any DOS sub-directory which
has been created on your system.
He
8 P 1
This calculator can be used for ali standard arithmetic as well as

trigonometric and log functions. To use the calculator, simply type
in the expression to be evaluated and press <RETURN> to cause
TurboCAD to evaluate the expression.
Numbers can be expressed in decimal (e.g. 310.526) or scientific
(e.g. 3.10526E2) notation.
Calculations are performed to 11 significant figures but a maximum
of 10 decimal places will be displayed.
The calculator also provides 10 memory registers for storing values.
The arithmetic operators, in order of precedence, are as follows:
Page 7-28
* and /
Multiplication and division (same preccdence)
+ and -
- Addition and subtraction (same preccdence)
8 CALCULA TOR
Page 8- 1
The Calculator
ChapterB
Arithmetic expressions are evaluated left to right if multiple

operators of the same precedence are used. To change the order. in
which the operations are performed, use parenthesis. Operations
within parenthesis are performed first, while the usual order of
operations is maintained within the parenthesis. Consecutive
operators must be separated by parenthesis e.g. 2*(-2) giving -4.
The TurboCAD calculator provides the following predefined functions:
ABS
SQRT
SQR
SIN
cos
TAN
ARCTAN
LN
LOO
EXP
FACT
MEM
- power
- absolute value
- square root
- square
- sine of angle (degrees)
- cosine of angle (degrees)
- tangent of angle (degrees)
- arelan of angle (degrees)
- base e logarithm
- base 10 logarithm
- base e exponent
- factorial
- recall one of the memories numbered from l through 10
at the input prompt. Simply type in the number of a mcmory registcr

and TurboCAD will substitute the contents of that register for thc
numeric value e.g. if you are using the CoordsAbs point defini ion
rnode, press <F4> when prornpted for the X co-ordinate. Then enter
the number of thc mernory register in which the value you requirc
is stored followed by <RETURN>.
Likewise, use the <F4> key when prompted for a scaling factor
when copying, moving or inserting or when changing a numeric
parameter in a pull down menu.
Functions are used with brackets e.g. SIN(45)

To store a value, press the <Ctrl> and <S> keys simultaneously.
TurboCAD will prompt for a "Register no:". Enter a number from
O to 9 to designate the memory in which you wish to store the
value.
Pressing <Ctrl-S> will also store the results of the measure command as follows. You will be prompted for "Start register no:".
Type in the register number you wish to use followed by
<RETURN>. If there is more than one value, they will be stored
in the registers following this one.
Values stored in a memory register can be recalled and used at a
later stage in either of two ways:
1. When using the calculator, use the MEM function e.g. 2*MEM(9)
will result in an answer of twice the contents of register number
9.
2. Whenever TurboCAD requires a number as input, press the CALCULATOR key <F4>. This will cause the word "Mem" to appear
Page 8-2
8 CALCULA TOR
8 CALCULA TOR
Page 8 - 3
ChapterB
--
The REDRAW key <FS> will clear the screen and then redraw the
drawing.
This Page lntentionally Left Blank
A TurboCAD drawing is stored in memory in TurboCAD's interna!

drawing formal. Whenever the drawing has to appear on an output
device such as a screen, printer or plotter, TurboCAD uses this information stored in memory to generate the best possible output
taking into account the resolution limitations of the relevant output
device. Thus a REDRAW simply displays a view of the drawing
utilizing the resolution capabilities of the installed screen. In most
instances, TurboCAD will automatically initiate a redraw when
necessary e.g. when zooming or panning. However, it may be necessary to refresh your screen in the following instances:
INCOMPLETE REDRA W
In order to optimize your actual working time, TurboCAD allows
you to interrupt the redraw process as soon as there is sufficicnt
detail for you to establish what to do next. Pressing any command
key will stop the REDRAW proc',ss as soon as what is in the buffer
has been completed. This wil' result in an incomplete view of the
drawing appearing on the se1een. This <loes not affect the drawing
in any way, as what is stored in memory remains intact (Remember:
what appears on the screen is simply a representation of what is
stored in memory). This can save time when performing operations
such as successive zooming (simply interrupt the REDRAW when
there is sufficient detail for you to establish where to position the
cursor for the next zoom). It is also not necessary to have a completely drawn view of the drawing on the screen in order to print
or plot it as the output to these devices will be calculated dircctly
from what is storcd in mcmory.
CHANGE IN ACTIVE LAYERS

Whcn you activate or deactivate layers (see the rclevant section
under the SETUP key <F2>), the display on the scrcen will rcmain
constant although sorne of the cntitics on the display should actually
not be visible due to thc change in status of laycrs. A redraw will
only display active layers.
PageB-4
8 CALCULA TOR
9REDRAW
Page 9 - 1
Chapter9
PIXEL DISPLAY LIMITATION
:::::::
When using a pixel display, images are displayed by drawing dots

to the screen. An enlity is removed from the display by redrawing
it in the bac;cground color. This leads to complications where two
or more lines cross as the computer does not remember how many
lines pass through the interseclion point. To illustrale this concept,
consider the case of two lines intersecting. When one of these lines
is erased, the computer will redraw the line in background color.
This will erase the point of inlersection resulting in the remaining
line having a point missing in lhe middle. A redraw will rectify
this.
:'::::: :::::
,,,,,,
:::::::
::::::
,,,,,,
,,,,,,
::::::: ::::::
.;.:.:
:::;:: :,:,:,: :,:,:,:
''''''''' ''''''''''''''''
,,,,,,
,,,,,
>::::
,,,, ,,,,,,
:::1
:::::: ::::::: :::::: ::::::
::::::
:::::::::::::::::::::::
'.'.'.::.::.
::::.:
,,,,,
::::::: :::::::
,,,,,,
:::::::
::::::: ::::::: ::::::: :::/:

,,,,,, ::::::: ::::::: :::::: :/:':
/ '::::::/ :
::::: :;::::: ::;:::: ::::::: ::::::::
:::::=::::=::=::;::::
,,,,,, ::::::::
;:;::>: :::;:::
:::::::
::>?:\ '
:::::: ::::::;::
ili
The WINDOW key <F6> allows one to define a window around a

selecled porlion of a drawing. This is lhen used in conjunclion wth
olher command keys or the Change menu oplion lo :
ZOOM <+>
MOVE <F7>
COPY <F8>
INSERT <lns>
DELETE <Del>
CHANGE <C>
NOTE
Displaying a view of a drawing lo the screen requires complex calculations as TurboCAD musl establish how much of the drawing is
lo appear in the screen view (depending on zoom and pan position)
as well as computing what pixels to actvate in order to display
this view. If a new view of a drawing has to be generated (e.g.
when zooming), TurboCAD must do ali these calculations (a relatively slow process). If, however, the REDRAW displays a view
which has already been calculated, TurboCAD does not need to
waste time rec'!lculaling the drawing limits etc. and will do the
REDRAW very much faster. TurboCAD automatically keeps track
of what needs to be recalculaled and lhus oplimizes REDRAW performance.
lo zoom a window to lhe ful! screen

lo move the conlents of a window
lo copy lhe contents of a window
lo save lhe contents of a window lo disk as a shapc
lo delete lhe conlenL<; of a window
do global changes lo ali entities wilhin a window
To define a window, move lhe cursor to a position which will becomc

a comer of lhe window. Press the WINDOW key <F6> which will
cause a small square whose bollom lefl comer corresponds lo thc
posilion where you placed lhe cursor. The cursor will have becn
shifled lo appear al the top righl of this square.
Use lhe cursor keys (or pointing device if inslallcd) to alter thc
window size and shape till it endoses the desired drawing arca . To
perform any of the above operations, simply press thc appropriate
COMMAND kcy al lhis slage, or else press the <Ese> key lo abort
the window operation (refer to the relevanl COMMAND key scction
or the section on the CHANGE WINDOW command to see the
effecl that can be achieved).
NOTES
l. Zooming a window will zoom the defined window such that it
fills the entire screen. Since the X and Y resolutions are not the
same, zooming a window may cause different magnifications in lhe
horizontal and vertical directions resulting in a distorted display.
The drawing will, however, slill be accurately kept in memory.
2. The SETUP command key <F2> Environment has a parameter

which defines whether windows operate in OPEN or CLOSED mode .
In closed mode, only drawing entities entirely enclosed in the window will be affected by any window operation. In open mode, drawing entities which are partially enclosed will be affected (refer to
the relevant command for ramifications).
Page9-2
REDRAW
10WINDOWS
Page 10- 1
Chapter 10
3. Ares are defined as being "inside" a window if the centre point

and/or radius are contained wilhin the window.
4. Text is defined as being "inside" a window if its justification
poinl is inside the window.
The MOVE key <F7> allows you to move seclions of a drawing .
In order to use this command, you must first define what entilics
constitute the object to be moved. This is done by de fining a WIN DOW which includes the relevant drawing entities (refer to thc discussions on WINDOWS under the WINDOW key <F6> and thc
SETUP key <F2>Environment) .
If you neglect to define a window, TurboCAD will draw a small
square window itself and use lhe contents of this window as th e
entilics lo move. This small window may be adequatc cspeciall y in
the case of moving texl where you only have to include lhe text
justification poinl in order lo move it.
Having defined lhe window, press lhe MOVE key <F7 >.
TurboCAD will now prompt you for the:
,.,
REFERENCE POINT
This is the pivol point from which the object lo be moved will be
scaled and/or rolated . It is specified using any of TurboCAD"s poinl
dcfinition modes (refer to section on point definition) .
DESTINATION POINT
This is the poinl lo which the reference poinl will be moved (also
specified using the point definition menu) .
WARNING
Often it is convenient to specify a point that already exists on thc
object to be moved as the Reference point. This is usually conveniently specified using the NearPoint option on the point definition menu. If you do this and then do not remcmbcr to changc point
definition modes when specifying the Destination Point, TurboCAD
will "snap" to the nearest point as the destination point usually
results in lhe object being "moved" to its original position .
Page 10 - 2
10WINDOWS
11 MOVE
Page 11 - 1
Chapter 11
X SCALING : Y SCALING
These factors allow you to change the size of the object in the x
and y directions respectively. If you use a scaling factor greater
than 1, the object will be enlarged in it's new position, while a
fractional scaling. factor will result in a reduced image. Using negative scaling factors causes mirroring about the x or y axis respectively. (Both defaults are 1).
ROTATION
This parameter allows you to rotate the object the specified number
of degrees whilst moving it to its new position. lf you do not wish
to rotate the object, use the default rotation angle which is O degrees.
NOTE
TurboCAD cannot distort the shape of a circle when moving, so if
you specify different X and Y scales, it will use the X scale as the
scaling factor. If the circle is hatched, the hatching will be scaled
differently in the X and Y directions as the hatching boundary is
a polygon approximation to the circle.
,,,,,,
,,,,,
,,,,,,,
'''"
,,,,,,
,,,,,,
,,,,,,
,,,,, ,,,,,, ,,,,,,
,,,,,,
,,,,,,
"'' ,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,
,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,
,,,,,,
,,,,,,
/o' :o/o: ,,,,,, ,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,, , ,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,
The COPY key <1<'8> allows you to copy sections of a drawing .

In order to use this command, you must first define what entities
constitute the objecl to be copied. This is done by defining a WINDOW which includes the relevant drawing entities (refer to the discussions on WINDOWS under the WINDOW key <F6> and the
SETUP kcy <F2> Environment).
If you neglect to define a window, TurboCAD will draw a small
square window itself and use the contents of this window as thc
entitics to copy. This small window may be adequate especially in
the case of copying text wherc you only have to include the tcxt
justification point in order to copy the text. Having defincd thc
window, prcss tlie COPY key <F8> .
TurboCAD will ask what kind of copying you wish to do (Linear

/ Radial/ Array). These 3 options allow complete flexibility in your
copy operation.;. We will discuss them in sequence using a rectangle
as the sample object to be copied.
243
91
t1enu :
Are
Change
D i l"60S ion
FnncyLine
Hatch
Llne
Me asure
Point
Sketch
Text
Oui t
""": 2041
Op
He
L 8 P 1
Page 11 - 2
11 MOVE
Page 12- 1
Copy
Chapter 12
Destlnatlon Polnt
12.1 LINEAR COPY
ScreenPos
Copy
155
116
PolntDef:
ScreenPos
He11rPoint
Coordsflbs
Relath..,
Polar
You will be prompted for a Reference Point:
MidPt Lin
This is the pivot point from which the object to be copied will be
sized and/or rotated. lt is specified using any of TurboCAD's point
definition modes (refer to section on point definition). For the purposes of this example we will use the bottom \eft corner of the
rectang\e as the reference point.
Reference Polnt :
Copy
ScreenPos
187
183
CJ
PolntDef:
ScreenPos
He11rPoint
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
Hor & Rad

Ver & Rad
X & Angle
Y & Angle
Coordsflbs
lntersect
Dlgltlser
Relatlve
Polar
nen: 28\ .
nidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
-P
EndPt Are
Hor & liad

Ver & liad
X & Angle
Y & Angla
lntersect
Dlgltlser
nen: 201 '
CI
L
He
8 P 1
Once the reference point has been defined TurboCAD will ask you
to define the Destination Point:
CI
L
He
8 P 1
This is the point to which the reference point will be copied (also
specified using the point definition menu).
WARNING
Often it is convenient to specify a point that already exists on the
object to be copied as the reference point. This is usually conveniently specified using the NearPoint option on the point definition mcnu .
lf you do this and then do not remember to change point definition
modes when specifying the Destination Point, TurboCAD will "snap"
to the nearest point as the destination point usually resulting in thc
object being "copied" to its original position.
Having specified the destination point, you will be prompted for
"X scaling :" and "Y scaling :" These factors allow you to change
the size of the object in the x and y directions respectively. lf you
use a scaling factor greater than 1, the object will be enlarged in
its new position, whilst a fractional scaling factor will result in a
reduced image. Using negative scaling factors causes mirroring
about the x or y axis respectively. The default x-scaling factor is
1 while the y-scaling factor defaults to that of the x-scaling factor.
TurboCAD cannot distort a circle when co;ying, so if you specify
different X and Y scales when copying a circle, TurboCAD will
use the X scale.
Next, you will be prompted for a "Rotation :" angle.
Page 12-2
12.1 LINEAR COPY
12.1 LINEAR COPY
Page 12-3
Chapter 12
Copy
This parameter allows you to rotate the object the specified number
of degrees while copying it to its new position. If you do not wish
to rotate the object, use the default rotation angle which is O degrees.
Finally, you will be asked how many "Repetilions :" you wish to
ha ve.
This allows you to make multiple copies of the object. TurboCAD
will copy the first copy at the specified destination point. All subsequent copies will be placed at the same relative displacement from
the last copy as the first copy was from the original. For the purposes
of illustration, we have assumed 3 repelitions.
12.2 ARRA Y COPY

The array copy is similar to the linear copy, except that it ma kes
row and column copies of the object. You will be prompted for a
Reference Point:
Reference Polnt :
Copy
ScreenPos
186
PolntDef:
ScreenPos
97
HearPoint
CoordsAbs
RelatlYe
Polar
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
The result of the copy will be the following:

294
Llne Pt
-P
Hor & Rad

Ver & Rad
Angle
Angla
)( &
!/ &
CJ
lntersect
Dlgltlser
CJ
CJ
[..:..=J
Men: 281
Quit
CI
He
8 p 1
Once the reference point has been defined, TurboCAD will ask you
to define the Destination Point:
"""' 283
Cl
He
8 P 1
Destinatinn Pnln+
Copy
ScreenPos
153
116
Po intDe f :
ScreenPos
HearPoint
CoordsAbo;
RelatiYe
Polar
CJ
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
Hor & Rad
Ver & Rad
)( & Angle
!/ & Angla
lntersect
Dlgltlser
"""' 281
Cl
L
Page 12-4
12.1 LINEAR COPY
12.2 ARRA Y COPY
He
8 P 1
Page 12-5
Copy
Chapter 12
and "X scaling :" and "Y scaling :" in exactly the same way as
described in the Linear Copy section. Thereafter, you will be
prompted for the number of "Columns (X) :" and "Rows (Y) :" you
wish to have. Simply enter the desired number of rows and columns.
For example, chciosing 4 columns and 3 rows would result in the
following:
258
25
If you had specified a destination point that was horizontally in the

sawe position as the reference poiut,
Destination Polnt
Copy
ScreenPos
153
PointDef
ScreenPos
HearPoint
CoordsAbc
Relatlve
Polar
99
11enu :
Are
Changa
HidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Line Pt
Dinension
FnncyLine
Hntch
Llne
11easurD
c::J
c::J
CJ
CJ
CJ
C::::J
c::J
CJ
CJ
c::J
CJ
c::J
Point
C=:J
Sketch
Text
Hor 1 Rad
Ver 1 Rad
)( 1 Angle
11 & Angle
Qui t
lnt.,rc..ct
Dlgltlser
~.
L
"""' 281 1
Cl
HD
L 8 P 1
8 P 1
the copy would have resulted in the following:

291
..-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~,
WARNING
11enu :
Are
Ch"'1gll
Dirtension
FnncyLlne
When doing an array copy, TurboCAD uses the x displacement between the reference point and the deslination point as the distance
to use between columns and the y displacement between the reference point and the destination point as the distance to use between
rows.
Hntch
Llne
11easure
Point
Sketch
Text
C=:J CJ
CJ
c::J
Qui t
"""' 283
Cl
He
L 8 P 1
TurboCAD has made 3 copies of each rectangle, one on top of the

other. Although there are actually 12 rectangles, we can only see
4.
Page 12-6
12.2 ARRA Y COPY
12.2 ARRA Y COPY
Page 12- 7
Copy
Chapter 12
Centre Point
12.3 RADIAL COPY
ScreenPos
Copy
97
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
CoordsAbs
Relatlve
Polar
Tbe radial copy will copy defined enlilies around a specified cenler
point in a circular fashion. Firslly, you must specify lhe "Reference
Poinl :" in the same way as lhe olher methods of copying.
Reference Polnt :
97
ScreenPos
Copy
131
97
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
PolntDet:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
Coorda:flbs
Relatlve
Polar
[=:J
HidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
lntercect
Dlgltlser
"""' 2811
CI
He
Hor & liad

Ver & liad
X & Angle
Y & Angle
lntersect
Dlgltlser
""": 281 1
CI
He
L
8 P t
Nexl you will be prompled for a cenler point. This is similar lo lhe
destinalion poinl used for lhe linear and array melhods of copying.
The difference is thal it represents the cenler of a radial pattern.
Hor & R&d

Ver & R&d
X & Angle
V & Angle
8 P t
You musl lhen enler lhe "X scaling :" and "Y scaling :" faclors
which operate in lhe same way as before wilh lhe same significancc.
Next you will be prompted for:
Angular Slcp:
This represcnts the angular displacemenl lo be uscd between copies
of the object. Type in thc dcsircd angle in degrccs. The dcfault
valuc is 45 dcgrecs.
Rolalc Y/N:
This oplion givcs you lhe choice of rolaling each copy to compensa le
for lhe radial angle al which it has been drawn . Refer to the fol lowing illustralions which cxplain this conccpt.
Repelilions :
This is thc numbcr of copies of thc object you wish TurboCAD to
gcncralc. By dcfaull, TurboCAD will do thc most rcpctition s it can
wilhoul ovcrlapping the original copy. For cxample, if thc angular
stcp uscd was 45 dcgrces. lt will set the number of rcpetitions to
7.
Thc radial copy cxamplcs bclow both use an angular stcp of 90
dcgrccs alltl 3 rcpctitions with thc rcfercncc point alltl dcstination
point spccificd as in thc preccding stcps.
Page 12-8
12.3 RADIAL COPY
12.3 RADIAL COPY
Page 12- 9
Chapter 12
With rotate:
2B?
tt
11enu :
Are
Change
Di,_,,, ion
FencyLine
Hatch
Llne
11J11111&.- "~
The GRID key <F9> switches the TurboCAD drawing grid ON or
OFF. The grid is provided as a drawing aid which can be used as
a guide when drawing intricate shapes or positioning entities.
n............
D
D
Sketch
Te><t
1
ll is simply a grid of dots on the drawing screen that can be displayed

al will. The horizontal and vertical grid steps can be set independently using the SETUP Environment (See section on the SETUP
key <F2>).
Ouit
An indication of whether the grid is active or not is given by the

presence or absence of a "G" in the status area of the TurboCAD
drawing screen al the bottom right of the screen below the menu
(see section on "The TurboCAD Drawing Screen"). This is necessary, as the grid will not appear on the screen in the following 2
instances:
L_
llen: 283
He
Op
8 p 1
Witbout rotate:
1. The grid st~p is so small that if TurboCAD were to draw it at

the current drawing scale, the grid would appear solid and would
completely obscure the drawing on screen.
11enu :
Are
2. The ZOOM magnification is so large that the screen view of the

drawing lies in between the grid points.
Ch__,
Di,_,,, ion
FancyLine
Hatch
Llne
NOTE
n............
Point
Sketch
Te><t
TurboCAD will snap to the closest grid point if the grid is active
when a point is specified using the "ScreenPos" or "Digitizer" point
definition modes. This is useful when trying to draw intricate layouts
such as printed circuit boards.
()ui t
D
"""' 283
Op 8 ""
L
P 1
NOTE
The reference point on each object is always the same distance
away from the center point.
Page 12- 10
12.3 RADIAL COPY
13 THEGRID
Page 13- 1
Chapter 13
,,,,,
,,,,,,, ,,,,,,
,,,,,,
,,,,,,,
,,,,,,
,,,,,,
~ i~ ~J ~ ~ ~ ..,
,,,,,, ,,,,,
,,,,,, ,,,;
,,,,,, ,,,,,,, :o/ ,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,, o/ o/ o:o/ .,oo:.,

,,,,,, ,,,,,,, ,,,,,,, ,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,, o:o:o: ,,,,,,, ::0{000:
,,,,,,,, ,,,,,
,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,
:o/o ,,,,,,,,:,
:o:o:o: :0:00000
The PAN key <FlO> is used to move the screen view of a drawing
to anothcr section of the drawing.
When you have zoomed in on a part of a drawing, you can pan

across to another section just like the panning techniques used with
cameras. The result is the same as if you had gone from your magnified vicw of the drawing back to a non-magnified vicw, moved
across and then magnified the new section.
Pressing the PAN key <FHJ> will rcsult in thc word " Panning "
appearing in thc centcr of the prompt linc at thc top of thc TurboCAD
drawing screen. You must then press any of the cursor control keys
to indicate to TurboCAD in what direction you wish to pan (don't
forget that you can achieve diagonal movement - rcfer to the section
on the cursor keys). Once the <FI O> key has been presscd, you
may now use your mouse or arrow keys to move the rcctangle cursor
to the arca to which you wish to pan. When you are satisficd with
the position of the rectangle cursor, press <RETURN >.
NOTES
1. TurboCAD will not pan if you are too near thc cdge o f the papcr.
2. You cannot pan if the scrcen view shows the entire drawing .
3. The <Ctrl-Fl> command is useful for dctermining what portion
of the drawing your scrccn vicw represents (rcfer to the section on
thc HELP kcy <Fl>).
Page 13-2
13THEGRID
14PAN
Page 14 - 1
Chapter 14
lmlll-Wfllll I!
The menu options available al any stage appear down the right band
side of the TurboCAD drawing screen. Tbese menu options can be
invoked by moving the menu cursor over tbe relevant option (using
tbe curs or keys, a mouse or a digitizer) and tben press ing
<RETURN>. Altematively, simply type in the letter corresponding
to the first capital letter of the option as it appears on the screen .
In many cases, selection of a menu option will cause another men u

to appear. If you are a skilled operator of TurboCAD and can anticpate tbe options which will appear, you ean type ahead of the
program. In this case, TurboCAD will not waste time displaying
intermediate menus, but will go straigbt to the final option selected
(e.g. CA F will do a ebange-are-flip without displaying tbe Change
and Are menus).
In the explanations of the menu commands whicb fo llow, lhe sequence of menu options which must be selected in order to access
the command is indicated by specifying each option separated by
hyphens. For example, in order to use the Are Tan command, you
must first call up the Are menu by selecting the Are option from
the main menu. Then you can select the Are Tan option from the
Are menu. This sequence of events is indicated as Are - Are Tan.
nenu :
ftrc
Change
Dinension
FancyLlne
Hatch
Llne
.,.......,...,
Point
Sketch
Text
Quit
11en:
285 1
CI
He
Page 14-2
14PAN
15MENUS
8 P 1
Page 15-1
Chapter 15
--~--111
16.1 ARC - ARCTAN
This command draws a circle tangent to an are. It will be drawn

using the currently selected pen color and line thickness on the
currently selected layer.
USE
TurboCAD will prompt you to indicate the are. Indicate this are by
placing the cursor near the desired line and pressing the <RETURN>
key. The are will flash if TurboCAD manages to locate it, or else
the speaker will beep and you will have to indicate the are again
with the cursor closer to lhe are.
Once the are has been indicaled lo TurboCAD, you will be promplcd
lo enler the radius of the circle lo be drawn. Type in lhe required
radius followed by <RETURN>. You musl then indicale lhe poinl
al which you wish lo have lhe circle drawn . Use any one of
TurboCAD's point definition modes to specify the point at whieh
you wish to have the circle tangent to the are and press <RETURN>
to specify it.
OPERATION
TurboCAD will draw a circle which is tangent to the are at the
point on the are where a radial line from the eenter of lhe are
through lhc specified point would interseet the are.
Page 15-2
15MENUS
16.1 ARC-ARCTAN
Page 16- 1
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _.....:1i:..:.h=e
Chapter 16
244
Are tan to are
lndlcate Are
08
Are Command
16.2 ARC - CENTRE&PT

This command draws an are whieh is specified by giving its center,
a point on its cireumferenee, as well as the slart and end angles .
It will be drawn using the currently sele~ted pen color and line
thickness. on the currenlly selected layer.
Existing
USE
TurboCAD will prompl you lo indicate the center poinl of the are .
lndicate the eenter using any one of TurboCAD's poinl definition
modes (remember that pressing <RETURN> speeifies a point).
Int. Poinl
Radius
Are-Are
Tan.gent
20
Once lhis eenter poinl has been specified, TurboCAD will ask you
to specify a point on the cireumferenee. Use any of TurboCAD's
point definition modes to do this. TurboCAD will then requesl lhe
slart angle. Type in the desired start angle in degrees followed by
<RETURN> or simply press <RETURN> to accept the default
value . The end angle is entered in the same way.
11en: 172
0p
He
8 P 1
NOTE
TurboCAD has two methods of searehing for the nearest are - NEAR
and CENTER seareh modes (refer to seetion on the SETUP key
<F2> Environmenl).
OPERATION
TurboCAD will draw an are eentered al the specified point whose
circumferenee passes through the specified point using the start and
end angles requested.
Pt on clrcunf
Are Cent & pt
ScreenPos
269
110
PolntDef:
ScreeoPos
HearPoint
Coordsflbs
Relatlve
Polar
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
Hor & Rad

Ver & llM
X & Angle
V & Angle
lntersect
Dlgltlser
11en: 184
Centre
and
Point
0p
Page 16-2
16.1 ARC - ARCTAN
He
8 P 1
Page 16- 3
The Are Command
Chapter 16
16.3 ARC - DOUBLE PT
NOTE
The slarl angle .defaults lo lhe posilion where lhe circumference
poinl was specified relalive lo lhe horizontal and lhe end angle to
this angle plus. 360 degrees (i.e. a complete circle).
This command draws a semi-circle through any 2 given points. lt

will be drawn using the currenlly selecled pen color and line thickness on the currently selected layer.
USE
TurboCAD will prompt you for a first point. Use any one of
TurboCAD's point definition modes to specify lhis point (remember
lhat pressing <RETURN> specifies a point). TurboCAD will lhen
request specification of lhe second point. Once again, you have lhe
choice of any point definition mode to specify lhis second point.
OPERATION
TurboCAD will draw a semi-circle through lhe two specified points
slarting at the first point and going to lhe second point in a counter
clockwise manner.
Second polnt
- ScreenPas
___ --- __
Are 2 Pt on Rad
__ _
276
42
PolntDef:
Se raen Pos
HearPoint
Coardsflbs
Relatlve
Polar
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
Pl 2
Her & Rad

Ver & Rad
X & Angle
Y & Angle
lntersect
Dlgltlser
Pt 1
Double
Point
Are
"""' 184
Op
He
8 P t
NOTE
If you have specified the points in lhe wrong order and the semi-
circle cnds up on lhe wrong side, you can use lhe FLIP option on
lhc CHANGE ARC menu to easily change the semi-circle to lhe
other side.
Page 16-4
16.3 ARC - DOUBLE PT
Page 16- 5
The Are Command
Chapter 16
lndlcate flrst l lne
16.4 ARC - FILLET

This command connccts two lines using a smoothly fitted are and
trims or extends the lines to their intersection with the are. The are
will be drawn in the currently selected pen color on the currently
selected )ayer using the currently selected line thickness.
OPERATION
TurboCAD will draw an are of the specificd radius whose starl and
cnd angles will be determined by the points al which the are would
be tangent to the two specified lines. lt will then either trim or
extend the two specified Iines so that they meet the are al their
respective points of tangency.
16.4 ARC - F/LLET
62
After
11
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the first line. To do this, move
the cursor to near the line and press <RETURN> to specify this
line. The line will flash if TurboCAD manages lo locate it, or else
the speaker will beep and you will have to indicaetc the line again
with the cursor closer to the linc.
Once the line has been indicated to TurboCAD, you will be prompted
to indicate the second line. Do this in exactly the same way. Once
this second linc has been successfully indicated to TurboCAD, you
will be asked to indicate the vertex. Simply move the cursor lo a
point betwcen the 2 lincs which will be on the inside of the are
which will make up the fillel. Once this verlex has been indicated
to TurboCAD you will be prompted for the fillet radius. Enter the
required number of drawing units followed by <RETURN>.
266
Befare
Vertex
USE
Page 16- 6
FI llet
12
R~:-7
Fillet
Are
"""' 181
Op
He
L 8 P 1
NOTES
1. TurboCAD has two methods of searching for the nearest line NEAR and CENTER search modes (refer to section on the SETUP
key <F2> Environment).
2. When filleting two lines that intersect, the ends of the line on
the opposite side of the intersection from the vertex will be the
ends trimmed.
3. lf the 2 lines to be filleted do not intersect, TurboCAD will
extend them to the necessary length so DO NOT specify parallel
lines.
16.4 ARC - FILLET
Page 16- 7
The Are Command
Chapter 16
NOTES
16.5 ARC-LINE TAN
l. The circle will be drawn on the side of the line where the cursor
was when the tangency point was specified.
This command draws a circle tangent to a line at a specified point.

It will be dr'awn using the currently selected pen color and line
thickness on the currently selected !ayer.
2. A common pitfall of this command is forgetting that you are

working in NEARPOINT mode . This can result in the circle no t
being drawn where you want itas the cursor will snap to the ncarest
existing drawing point when the tangency point is specified.
USE
TurboCAD will prompt you to indicate a line. Do this by placing
the cursor near the desired line and pressing the <RETURN> key.
The line will flash if TurboCAD manages to locate it, or else the
speaker will beep and you will have to indicate the line again with
the cursor closer to the line.
3. lf you specify a tangency point beyond the end of the linc,

TurboCAD will draw a circle that is tangent to that linc if it were
extended .
lndlcate l lne
Are tan to 1 ine
Once the line has successfully been indicated to TurboCAD, you

will be prompted to indicate the point on the line at which you
wish to have the circle tangent to the line . Use any one of
TurboCAD's point definition modes to specify this point (remember
that pressing <RETURN> specifies a point). TurboCAD will then
ask you what radius you wish the circle to be. Type in the required
number of drawing units followed by <RETURN>.
OPERATION
TurboCAD will draw a circle which is tangent to the line at the
point on the line closest to the specified point.
R..dlus :
Are t"n to line
28
145
Ind. Line
94
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
CoordsAbs
Relatlve
Polar
~
Ind. Line
Are
Tan
Ind. Pt
to
Line
""": 194
0p
He
8 P 1
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are
~gle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
R=20
Ind. Pt
Are
Page 16-8
Tan
Hor & Rad

Ver & Rad
>< &
~gle
Y & ~gle
lntersect
Dlgltlser
to
Line
""": 182
Op
He
L 8 P 1
16.5 ARC - UNE TAN
16.5 ARC - UNE TAN
Page 16- 9
Chapter 16
The Are Command
16.6 ARC - RADCENTRE
End angle :
16.7 ARC - TRIPLE PT
This command draws an are which is specified by giving its center,

radius, start and end angles. It will be drawn using the currently
selected pen color and line thickness on the currently selectcd !ayer.
This command draws an are lhrough any 3 given points. ll wil l be

drawn using lhe currently selecled pen color and line lhickness on
the currently selected !ayer.
USE
USE
TurboCAD will prompt you to indicate the center point of the are.
Indicate the center using any one of TurboCAD's point definition
modes (remember that pressing <RETURN> specifies a point). Once
this centre point has been specified, TurboCAD will ask you for
the radius you require. Type in lhc desired number of drawing units
followcd by <RETURN> . TurboCAD will lhen requesl the start
and end angles which are enlered in the same way.
TurboCAD will prompt you to indicale the firsl point. Use any onc
of TurboCAD's point definilion modes lo specify lhis poinl (rcmcm bcr thal pressing <RETURN> specifies a point) . Once this po int
has bccn successfully specificd, TurboCAD will thcn rcqucst in dicalion of lhe sccond point. Once again, you havc th c choi ce o f
any point dcfinilion modc lo spccify lhis sccond point. Fina lly, yo u
will have lo indicale lhe third poinl in exaclly thc samc way.
OPERATION
OPERATION
TurboCAD will draw an are cenlered al the specified point with

the required radius usinp, the start and end angles requesled.
TurboCAD will draw an are through lhe 3 spccificd points starting

at the first poinl, going lhrough lhe second poinl and lcnninating
al lhe third point.
188
Are Centre liad
151
108
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
CoordsAbs
Relative
Polar
lndieate third point
Are 3 points
ScreenPos
End=180
Radus
Centre
Radius=20
&
Start=O
Centre
Hor
Ver
& Rad
& liad
MidPt Lin
F.ndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Lino Pt
P1
Hor & liad
Ver & liad

)( & Angle
Y & Angle
& Angla
lntero;ect
Dlgitlser
lntersec t
Dlgitiser
11en : 176
Op
He
8 P 1
PointDef:
CoordsAbs
Relatlve
Polar
)( & Angle
61
ScreenPos
HearPoint
11idPt Lin
F.ndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Lino Pt
218
Men: 184
Triple
Point
Are
Op
L
NOTE
The start angle defaulls lo O dcgrces and the ene! angle to 360
dcgrees, so if you wish lo draw circles, il is not necessary lo key
in lhese values - simply press thc <RETURN> kcy lo acccpt thcm.
Page 16- 10
16.6 ARC - RADCENTRE
He
8 P 1
NOTE
The three points spccified cannol be co-linear (i.c. lic on a straighl
line).
16.7 ARC-TRIPLE PT
Page 16- 11
Chapter 16
r-Jill\tlliillll'I
17.1 CHANGE - ARC - ANGLESRAD
This command allows you to change the radius as well as the start
and end angles of an are.
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the are. Move the cursor to
near the are and press <RETURN> to specify this are. If TurboCA D
manages to locate the are it will be erased. lf it does not, the speaker
will becp and you will have to re-indicate the are with the cursor
closer to the are.
TurboCAD will then prompt you for the radius, giving the current
radius as default. Type in the required radius followed by
<RETURN> or simply prcss <RETURN> to keep thc current radius.
In the same way, you will then be prompted for the start ami end
angles in turn. In both cases, the value will dcfault to the cxisting
value. Type in the desired angle in degrees followcd by <RETURN>
or just prcss <RETURN> to aceept the dcfault.
OPERATION
TurboCAD will erase the existing are and will draw a new are with
the spccified radius, start and end angles. The are will be drawn in
a counter-clockwise manner from thc start angle to thc end anglc.
Page 16- 12
16.7 ARC- TRIPLE PT
17.1 CHANGE - ARC - ANGLESRAD
Page 17- 1
Chapter 17
The Change Command

276
Change Are
lndlcate Are
98
17.2 CHANGE - ARC - FLIP

This command swaps the start and end angle of an are. This gh es
the effect of flipping a semi-circle (e.g., an are drawn from O degrees
to 180 degrees will be flipped to one starting at 180 degrees and
ending at O or 360 degrees).
After
Before
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the are. To do this, move the
cursor to near the are and press <RETURN> to specify this are.
The are will flash if TurboCAD manages to locate it, or else the
bell will beep and you will have to indicate the are again with the
cursor closer to the are.
_/
Hen: 181
Change
Are
An.gle
Op
Ha
8 P 1
lndicate Are
Change Are
256
08
NOTES
l. TurboCAD has two methods of searching for the nearest are NEAR and CENTER search modes (refer to section on the SETUP
2. Pressing the <Ese> key in the midst of this command will abort
and the are will be restored in its original forro.
Bef ore
f)
Mter
~
Hen : 183
Change
Are
Flip
Op
Ha
8 P 1
OPERATION
TurboCAD will erase the existing are and will draw a new are which
starts at the old arc's end angle and ends at the old arc's start angle .
Page 17-2
1Z1CHANGE-ARC-ANGLESRAD
Page 17-3
The Change Command
Chapter 17
17.3 CHANGE- ARC - PENLAYER
NOTES
1. TurboCAD has two methods of searching for the nearest are NEAR and CENTER search modes (refer to seclion on the SETUP
This command allows you to change thc layer, pen color aJ1 d/or
thickness of an are.
2. This command is useful in conjunction with ares drawn using

the Double Pt option on the Are menu. It can be used to flip the
semi-circle if it is drawn on the wrong side.
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the are. Move the cursor to
near the are and press <RETURN> to specify this are. The are will
flash if TurboCAD manages to Jocate it, or else the speaker will
beep and you will have to indicate the are again with the cursor
closer to it.
3. lf a circle is flipped, the resultant are will be infinitely short.

For example, a circle from O degrees to 360 degrees will be flipped
to a circle from 360 degrees to O degrees.
TurboCAD will then prompt you for the radios, giving the current
radios as default. Type in the required radios followcd by
<RETURN> or simply press <RETURN> to keep the currcnt radios .
In the s:ame way, you will then be prompted for the start and end
angles in turn. In both cases, the value will default to the existing
value. Type in the desired angle in degr'!es followed by
<RETURN>.
OPERATION
TurboCAD will erase the existing are and will draw a new are with
the specified radios, starl and end angles. The are will be drawn in
a counter-clockwise manner from the starl angle to the end angle .
tte
Ch11nge PenLayer
Are Thick :3
Before
93
After
11en: 174
Change
Thickrress
CJp
Page 17-4
17.3 CHANGE - ARC - PENLA YER
He
8 P t
Page 17- 5
The Change Command
Chapter 17
17.4 CHANGE -ARC - RAD TRIM
NOTE
TurboCAD has two methods of searching for the nearest are - NEAR
and CENTRE search modes (refer to section on the SETUP key
<F2> Environment).
This command allows you to increase or decrease the radius of an

are so that are will pass through a specified point.
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the are. Move the cursor lo
near lhe are and press <RETURN> to specify this are. The are will
flash if TurboCAD manages to locate it, or else the speaker will
beep and you will have to indicale the are again with the cursor
closer lo il.
Once the are has successfully been indicated to TurboCAD, you
will be prompled lo indicale the point to which you want lhe arc's
rarlius trimmed. Use any one of TurboCAD's point definition modes
to specify lhis point (rcmember that pressing <RETURN> specifies
a point).
OPERATION
TurboCAD will erase the existing are and will draw a new are whose
radius has been shortcned or extended so that the radius of the are
is lhe same as the distance from the center of the are to the specified
poinl.
lndieate Polnt
Radlus Jrln
ScreenPos
2ftll
118
.....-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PointDer:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
Coordsflbs
Relatlve
Polar
After
Befo re
ox
HidPt Lin
Pt
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Line Pt
Hor & Rad
Ver & Rad
)( & Angle
V & Angle
Trim
Radius
to
Pt
lntenoect
Dlgitlser
"""' 176
Op
Page 17- 6
17.3 CHANGE - ARC - PENLA YER
17.4 CHANGE - ARC - RAD TRIM
He
8 P 1
Page 17- 7
The Change Command
Chapter 17
17.S CHANGE-ARC - SPLIT
NOTES
l. TurboCAD has lwo melhods of searching for lhe nearesl are NEAR and CENTER search modes (refer lo seclion on lhe SETUP
key <F2> Environmenl).
This command splits an are into lwo ares al a spccified poinl.
USE
2. TurboCAD calculales lhe distance of lhe poinl from lhe centre

of lhe are and alters lhe radius accordingly. So, if a poinl is specified
which does not lie belween the slart and end angles of lhe are, lhe
are will still be lrimmed.
TurboCAD will ask you lo indicale lhe are. Move lhe cursor lo
near the are and press <RETURN> lo specify lhis are. The are will
flash if TurboCAD manages lo locale il, or else lhe speaker will
beep and you will have to indicale lhe are again wilh lhe cursor
closer lo il.
Once lhc are has successfully been indicaled lo TurboCAD, you
will be promplcd lo indicale lhe poinl al which you wanl lhc are
splil. Use any one of TurboCAD's poinl definilion modes lo spccify
lhis poinl (remembcr lhat pressing <RETURN> specifies a poinl).
OPERATION
TurboCAD will split lhe existing are inlo lwo ares al thc point
where a radial line through lhe specified poinl would inlcrsecl Lhe
are.
Indicate Point
Spl i t Are
ScreenPos
225
132
.---~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
f)Pt
Before
After
Al~
( )A2
PointDef:
ScreenPos
tfearPoint
CoordsObs
Relative
Polar
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Line Pt
llor & Rad
Ver & Rad
X & Angle
1/ & Angle
lntersect
Digitiser
Split
Are
Men:
182
Op
He
Page 17- 8
17.4 CHANGE - ARC - RAD TRIM
17.5 CHANGE - ARC - SPLIT
0 P 1
Page 17- 9
The Change Command
Chapter 17
17.6 CHANGE- ARC -TRIMTOPT
NOTES
l. TurboCAD has two methods of searching for the nearest are NEAR and CENTER search modes (refcr to section on the SETUP
key <F2> Environment) .
2. This command is useful if you wish to remove part of an are.
First split the are so that the section you wish to remove is a scparate
are and then delete tbis are .
This command shortens or extends the end of an are to a speci ried

point.
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate tbe are. Move tbe cursor to
near the end you wish to trim and press <RETURN> to specify
this are. The are will flash if TurboCAD manages to locate it, or
else the speaker will beep and you will have to indicate the are
again with the cursor closer to it.
Once the are has succcssfully been indicated to TurboCAD, you
will be prompted to indicate the trim point. Use any one of
TurboCAD's point definition modes to specify the point to whicb
you want the uc trimmed (remember tbat pressing <RETURN>
specifies a point).
OPERATION
TurboCAD will shorten or extend the are to where a radial line
through the specified point would intersect the are.
lndlcate Irln Polnt
Trln Are To Pt
161
ScreenPos
55
..-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Before
After
')
Ptv
/'-
Trirn
Are
to
Pt
Po lntDe f:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
CoordsAbs
Relatlve
Polar
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
Hor & Rad
Ver & Rad
X & Angle
Y & Angle
lntersect
Digitlser
Men: 183
Op
Page 17- 10
17.5 CHANGE - ARC - SPL/T
17.6 CHANGE - ARC - TRIMTOPT
He
8 P 1
Page 17 - 11
The Change Command
Chapter 17
17.7 CHANGE - DIMENSION
NOTE
TurboCAD has two methods of searching for the nearest are - NEAR
and CENTER search modes (refer to section on the SETUP key
<F2> Environment).
This command allows you to change the parameters used for a1

existing dimension.
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the dimension to be changed .
Move the cursor to near the dimension to be changed and press
<RETURN> to indicate the dimension. TurboCAD will remove the
dimension closest to the cursor from the drawing.
Once thc dimension has bcen removed, TurboCAD will prompt you
for the various parameters affecting thc dimension. These parameters
correspond to the paramcters which are set up using the Dimensions
pulldown menu of the SETUP kcy <1'' 2> (refer to this section of
the manual for a detailed description of each paramcter). For each
parameter, type in thc new value followed by <RETURN> or else
just press <RETURN> to accept the default value (the default values
displayed will be those that are currently used for the dimension) .
Pen Color
This denotes thc pen number or color to be used for the dimension .
Layer
This value determines on which layer the dimension will be drawn.
Text Widtb
This is the width in drawing units that the widest text character in
the dimension label will occupy.
Text Height
This is the height in drawing units of text used in thc dimension.
Text Font
This is the text font which will be used for the dimension label.
ArrowType
This defines the type of arrow which will be used for the dimension .
Page 17- 12
17.6 CHANGE - ARC - TRIMTOPT
17.7 CHANGE - DIMENSION
Page 17- 13
Chapter 17
The Change Command

Decimal Places
This value determines the number of decimal places that will be
displayed in the dimension.
On/Above/Below Line
This value determines where the dimension label will be placed
relative to the dimension line. The !abe! can be On, Above or Below
the dimension line.
Supprcss (L/R/N)
This value gives you the option of suppressing eithcr of the extension
lines which are drawn from the drawing to either end of the dimension line. You use "L" to suppress the left, "R" to suppress the right
or "N" to include both extension lincs (i.e. no supprcssion).
No Fil (L/R)
This value determines which side of the dimension the !abe! should
be placed if it cannot fil between the extension lines.
Scaling
TurboCAD dimcnsions havc an indcpendcnt scalc to the drawing
scalc.
To speci y a dimension gap, simply add two lincs to the end of

your arrow dcfinition as follows:
-3
-0.5
2
OPERATION
TurboCAD will rcdraw lhc dimcnsion using the ncw paramctcrs
you havc spccificd .
NOTES
1. TurhoCAD will always sclcct thc dimcnsion closcst lo thc cursor.
lf thc "wrong" dimcnsion gcts sclcctcd by mistakc, prcss thc < E~c >
kcy lo abort lhc changc-dimcnsion command ami TurboCAD will
rcdraw it.
2. If you prcss <Ese> to abort thc changc-dimcnsion in the midst
of using thc command, TurboCAD will reinstale thc dimcnsion . Ali
paramclcrs which havc alrcady becn changcd will be changcd whilc
thosc not ycl changcd will rctain thcir old valuc. This mcans that
you do nol havc to go lhrough ali lhc paramctcr valucs whcn changing dimcnsions.
Consider an object lOOmm long in reality. This will appear on a

drawing drawn to a scalc of 1:10 as lOmm. Howevcr, TurboCAD
will dimension it as bcing 100 i.e. its real world size. You can
change thc scale of thc dimension (from its dcfault value of 1: 1)
so that thc dimcnsion <loes not represen! real world sizc using this
para meter. Using a scalc of 1:2 in the examplc above, the dimcnsion
will read 50.
Dimcnsion Gap
You can spcciy a spacc betwcen thc dimcnsion cxtcnsion lines and
thc cntity bcing dimcnsioncd. Thc sizc of this gap is detcrmincd as
a multiple o thc width of the arrow uscd for the dimcnsion. If you
rcfer to thc width of the arrow used for the dimcnsion . lf you refer
to your manual on page 6-24, you will scc that thc dcfault arrow
file (NORMAL.ARO) shipped with TurboCAD eontains a series of
numbers, cnding in:
-3
-0.5
Page 17- 14
17. 7 CHANGE - DIMENSION
17. 7 CHANGE - DIMENSION
Page 17 - 15
The Change Command
Chapter 17
17.9 CHANGE-LINE-BREAK
17.8 CHANGE-HATCH
This command allows you to change the parameters used for an
existing hatch pattern.
This command will break a line into lines Jeaving a gap.
USE
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the hatch to be changed. Move
the cursor so that it lies in the hatch pattern and press <RETURN>
to indicate the hatch. TurboCAD will remove the hatching from the
drawing if it manages to locate it, or else the speaker will beep
and you will have to re-indicate the hatch with the cursor in the
hatch pattern. Once TurboCAD has removed the hatch, you will be
asked to specify a new hatch angle. Type in the desired angle in
degrees (- 180 to + 180) followed by <RETURN> .
TurboCAD will then ask for the new hatch distance. Type in the
spacing you desire between batch lines in drawing units. Next you
will be asked wbether you want to cross hatch or not. Type in <Y>
or <N> followed by <RETURN> to indicate your choice . lf you
select cross hatching, TurboCAD will draw a second set of hatching
lines at 90 degrees to the lines drawn al the specified batch angle.
Next you will be prompted to enter the !ayer on which you want
the hatching . Type in a !ayer number (O to 127) followed by
<RETURN>. Finally you will be promptcd for a peo color.
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the break line . Move the cursor
to near the line you wish to break and press <RETURN> to indicate
it. The line will flash if TurboCAD locales it. The speaker will
beep if you do not Jocate it and you will have to re-indicate the
line with the cursor closer to it.
Once the line to be broken has beco indicated to TurboCAD, you
will be prompted to indicate thc first intersccting line . In the samc
way as before, move thc cursor to near thc intersecting linc and
press <RETURN> to indicate it. Finally, you must indicate th c
second intersecting line in the same way as the first intersecting
line.
OPERATION
TurboCAD will break the line into two lines and will remove the
section of the original line which lay bctween the two intersecting
lincs specified.
lndlcate Break Line
Break Line
281
96
OPERATION
.T urboCAD will now redraw the hatching using thc ncw paramcters
you havc specified.
Befare
After
I1
--- -- ---)(- ---- ---- -../.'.'.:. ____ _
NOTES
1. lf you selcct the wrong hatching by mistake, press the <Ese>
key to abort the change-hatching command and TurboCAD will
redraw it.
2. If you pnss the <Ese> kcy to abort the change-hatch operation
in the midst of using the command, TurboCAD will reinstale the
hatching. Ali parameters which have already been changed will be
changed, whilc thosc not yet changcd will retain their old values.
B
X ---7-----------------------IZ--
Break
Line
"""' 182
Clp
He
L 8 P t
3. TurboCAD will search for hatches in NEAR and CENTER search

modes.
Page 17- 16
17.8 CHANGE - HATCH
17.9 CHANGE - UNE - BREAK
Page 17- 17
The Change Command
Chapter 17
17.10 CHANGE - LINE- LENGTH
NOTE
TurboCAD has two methods of searching for the nearest line - NEAR
and CENTER search modes (refer to the section on the SETUP key
<F2> Environment).
This command will stretch or shorten a line to the desired leng b.
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the line whose length you wish
to change. Move the cursor to near tbe line and press <RETURN>
to indicate it. The line will flash if TurboCAD manages to locate
it. Tbe speaker will beep if it does not locate tbe line and you will
bave to re-indicate tbe line witb tbe cursor closer to it.
Once the line has been indicated to TurboCAD, you will be asked
to what lengtb you want the line to be cbanged. Type in tbe dcsired
length in real world scale and press <RETURN>. Next, you will
be prompted to indicate tbe move point. Move the cursor to near
the end of the line wbich you wisb to bave moved and press
<RETURN>.
OPERATION
TurboCAD will shorten or lengthen tbe line to tbe specified length
by moving tbe specified end point.
Length
08
Change Length
88
131
Befo re
L~th
80
f'JovePoot
Aft.er
Cha.nge
Line
Length
tle":
1761
Op 8 ""
L
P 1
Page 17- 18
17.9 CHANGE - UNE - BREAK
17.10 CHANGE - UNE - LENGTH
Page 17- 19
The Change Command
Chapter 17
NOTE
17.11CHANGE-LINE-MEET2LNS
and CENTER search modes (refer to the section on the SETUP key
<F2> Environment).
This command will stretch or shorten two lines so that they interscct
exactly.
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the first line. Move the cursor
to near the line and press <RETURN> to indicate it. The line will
flash if TurboCAD manages to locate it.
The speaker will beep if it does not and you will have to re-indicate
the Jine with the cursor closer to the it. Once the line has been
indicated to TurboCAD, you will be asked to indicate the second
line. Indicate this line to TurboCAD in exactly the same way as
you did the first line.
OPERATION
TurboCAD will shorten or lengthen the lines so that they meet exactly at a point.
,,
- -
Change Line
'2lJ7
After
Eefore
7Meet
Co.se
Co.se
T-wo
Lin.es
124
Llne:
Break
Length
11eet 21.ns
PenLayer
Spllt
1 tRlnToPt
Jrin Line
11en: 178
Op
Page 17-20
17.1 OCHANGE - UNE - LENGTH
17.11 CHANGE - UNE - MEET 2LNS
He
8 p 1
Page 17-21
The Change Command
Chapter 17
17.12 CHANGE-LINE- PENLAYER
NOTES
l . lf you try to meet two intersecting lines, TurboCAD will retain
the portions of the line on the side of the extension where your
cursor was when you indicated the lines.
2. TurboCAD has two methods of searching for the nearest line NEAR and CENTRE search modes (refer to the section on the
SETUP key <F2> Environment).
This command allows you to change the !ayer, pen color, line thid ness and line type of an existing line.
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the line whose color and !ayer
you wish to change. Move the cursor to near the line and press
<RETURN> to indicate it. The line will flash ifTurboCAD manages
to locate it.
The speaker will beep if it does not and you will have to re-indicate
the line with the cursor closer to the line. Once the line has been
indicated to TurboCAD, you will be prompted to enter the new
parameter values. Type in the desired value followed by
<RETURN>. The parameters which gel prompted for are:
Layer
This value determines on what !ayer the line will be drawn .
Pen
This value denotes the pen number or color which is used for the
line.
LineType
This value determines what line type to use for drawing the line.
Line'fhick
This value determines how thick the line is drawn.
Refer to the SETUP key <.F 2> Other entities to for detailed descriptions of the above parameters as well as the possible values.
OPERATION
TurboCAD will redraw the line using ali the new parameter values.
Page 17-22
17. 11 CHANGE - UNE - MEET 2LNS
17.12 CHANGE - UNE - PENLA YER
Page 17-23
The Change Command
Chapter 17
17.13 CHANGE-LINE-SPLIT
NOTES
This command will split a line into lines at a designated point.
1. TurboCAD has two metbods of searching for the nearest line NEAR and CENTER search modes (refer to the section on the
SETUP key <F2> Environment).
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the line you wish to split. Move
the cursor to near the line and press <RETURN> to indicate it.
The line will flash if TurboCAD manages to locate it.
2. lf you press the <Ese> key lo abort the change-line-penlayer

operation in the midst of using the command, TurboCAD will redraw
the line. Ali parameters which have already been changed will be
changed, while those not yel changed will retain their old values.
This means that you do not have lo go through ali tbe parameter
values.
The speaker will beep if it does not and you will have to re-indicatc
the line. Once the line has been indicated to TurboCAD, you will
be asked to indicate the point at which you wish lo split thc line.
Use any onc of TurboCAD's point definition modes to specify this
point (remember that pressing <RETURN> specifies a point) .
OPERATION
TurboCAD will split tbe line into two lines at tbe specified point.
lndlc .. te Polnt
Spllt Line
ScreenPos
194
68
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
CoordsAbs
RelatlYe
Polar
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Befo re
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
'/
Hor & Rad

Ver & Rad
X & Angle
V & Angla
A:fter
lntersect
Dlgltlser
Splt
Two
Lines
Man :
1881
Op
He
L 8 P 1
NOTE
TurboCAD has two metbods of searching for tbe nearest line - NEAR
and CENTER search modes (refer to tbe section on the SETUP key
<1!'2> Environment).
Page 17- 24
17. 12 CHANGE - LINE - PENLA YER
17.13 CHANGE - LINE - SPLIT
Page 17-25
The Change Command

Chapter 17
NOTE
17.14 CHANGE- LINE -TRIMTOPT

This command stretches or shrinks a line so that its one end lies
al a specified point.
and CENTER search modes (refer to the section on the SETUP k<:y
<F2> Environment).
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the line you wish to trim. Move
the cursor close to the end you wish to have moved and press
<RETURN> to indicate the line. The line will flash if TurboCAD
manages to locate it.
The speaker will beep if it docs not and you will have to re-indicate
the linc with thc cursor closer to it. Once the line has been indicated
to TurboCAD, you will be asked to indicate thc point to which you
wish to trim thc linc. Use any one of TurboCAD's point definition
modes to specify this point (remember that pressing <RETURN>
specifies a point).
OPERATION
TurboCAD will shift the end of the linc that was closest to the
cursor when the line was spccified to the specified trim point.
lndlcate Irln Llne
Jrln Llne To Pt
Eefore
Trm
96
After
---X_,,__- ease
192
Cose 2
To
Pont
""'"' 1791
Cl
L
Page 17-26
Ce
8 P t
17. 14 CHANGE - LINE - TRIMTOPT
17.14 CHANGE - L/NE - TRIMTOPT
Page 17-27
Chapter 17
The Change Command
17.15 CHANGE - LINE-TRIM LINE
NOTE
This command will shortcn or lengthen a line so that it will intersect

another line exactly.
TurboCAD has two methods of searching for tbe ncarcst line - NEAR
and CENTER search modcs (refcr to the section on tbc SETU P kcy
<F2> Environment).
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the line you wish to trim. Move
the cursor t near the line (near the end you wish to retain) and
press <RETURN> to indicate the line. The line will flash if
TurboCAD manages to locate it.
If it does not locale the line, the speaker will beep and you will
have to re-indicate it with the cursor closer to the line. Once the
linc has bcen indicated to TurboCAD, you will be askcd to indicale
tbe intcrsection line to which you wish to trim the linc. Spccify
this linc in the samc way as you did the trim linc.
OPERATION
TurboCAD will shift the end of the line that was furthest from the
cursor when the linc was specified so that the spccified linc intersccts thc intcrscction linc exactly.
lndlcnte Jrin Line
Jrin Llne
Eefore
241
to
After
/
Trirn
Line
l'len: 181
Page 17 - 28
Cl
Ce
8 P 1
17. 15 CHANGE - LINE - TRIM LINE
17.15 CHANGE - LINE - TRIM LINE
Page 17-29
Chapter 17
The Change Command
17.16 CHANGE - TEXT
Font
This is the font which will be used for the text.
This command allows you to change the parameters used for an

existing text string.
Justify
This indicates thc text justification to be used for the text.
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the text to be changed. Move
the cursor to near the text to be changed and press <RETURN> to
indicate the text. TurboCAD will remove the text closest to the
cursor from the drawing. Once the text has been removed, Turbocad
will prompt you for the various parameters affecting the text string.
These parameters correspond to the parameters wbich are set up
using the Text pulldown menu of the SETUP key <F2> (refer to
this section of the manual for a detailed description of each
parameter). For each parameter, type in the new value followed by
<RETUKN> or else just press <RETURN> to accept thc default
value (the dcfault values displayed will be thosc that are currcntly
used for thc text).
OPERATION
TurboCAD will rcdraw the text using the ncw parametcrs you have
specified.
NOTES
l. TurboCAD will always select the text closest to the cursor. lf
the "wrong" text gets selccted by mistake, press the <Ese> key to
abort the change-text command and TurboCAD will tedraw_ it.
2. lf you press <Ese> lo abort the change-text in the midst o f usi ng
the command, TurboCAD will reinstale the tex t. Ali parame ters
which have already been changed will be changed while thosc not
yet changed will retain their old value. This means that you do uot
have to go through ali the parameter valucs whcn cbanging tcx t.
Text
This is the actual text string displayed.
Pen Color
This value denotes the peo number or color to be used for the text.
Laycr
This value determines on which !ayer the text will be drawn.
Width
This is the width in drawing units that thc widest text character in
the tcxt string will occupy.
Height
This is the hcight in drawing units of thc text.
Angle
This is the angle to thc horizontal at which the text is drawn.
Page 17-30
17. 16 CHANGE - TEXT
Page 17- 3 1
Chapter 17
111&1-llllliltl
18.1 DIMENSIONS IN GENERAL
This Page Intentionally Lefl Blank
TurboCAD allows you lo spccify dimensions by simply indicaling

the two points of refcrcnce for the dimension.
The following rules apply:
1. Whcn you changc the size of somcthing which is dimensioncd
using thc MOVE key <F7> or the COPY kcy <F8>, TurboCAD
will automatically adjust the relcvant dimensions so that thcy corrcctly rclcct the new sizc of the cntity. Only <limensions which are
on a currcntly active layer will be altercd.
2. Dimensions will NOT changc if you use the CHANGE command
to alter an cnlily which is dimcnsioned.
Page 17-32
18.1 DIMENSIONS IN GENERAL
Page 18- 1
Dimension
Chapter 18
18.3 DIMENSION - HORIZONTL
18.2 DIMENSION - ARROW

This command will draw an arrowhcad pointing to a specified point.
It will be drawn using lhe currcnt parameter seltings as indicaled
in lhe SETUP key <F2> Dimensions pulldown menu. ll is intended
lo caler for free fonnat dimcnsioning or indication.
This command draws a horizontal dimension which indicatcs 1.hc

horizontal distance between two reference points. The dimension
will be drawn using the current parameter settings as indicated in
the SETUP key <F2> Dimensions pulldown menu.
USE
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicatc the first point and will default
lo the NcarPoinl point definilion mode. Use any of TurboCAD's
point dcfinilion modes to indicate the point from which you wanl
lhc arrow drawn (rcmember that prcssing <RETURN> specifics a
point). Once this point has becn spccified, TurboCAD will ask you
to indicate the second point. Specify the point to which you want
lhe arrow drawn in exactly the same way as you <lid the first point.
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the first point and will default
to the NearPoint point definition mode . Use any of TurboCAD's
point definition modes to indicale lhis point (remember that pressing
<RETURN> specifies a point). Once this point has been specified,
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate lhe second point. This is done
in exactly the same manner as the first point. Finally, you must
indicate a point for the dimension line and TurboCAD will default
to the ScreenPos point definition mode. Once again, use any of
TurboCAD's point definition modes to indicate this point.
OPERATION
TurboCAD will draw an arrow whose head Iies on !he second poinl
spccified. Thc arrow will facc away from !he firsl point specificd.
221
59
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~1
PlX
OPERATION
TurboCAD will draw a horizontal dimension line indicating !he
horizontal distance between the two reference points specified (lhc
dimension label will reflect the real world distance and not !he
actual scaled down drawing dislance).
Menu :
Are
Change
Dinension
FancyLine
Hatch
Line
Me asure
Point for din line
Point
Sketch
Text
~2
P2
Dirn
Me": 183
278
C::(J
P3
Quit
Arro-w
Horis Dinension ScreenPos
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~--.
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
Pl
Op
Ce
L 0 P 1
Horizontal
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
CoordsObs
Relatlve
Polar
Dim
& Rad
& Rad
Hor
Ver
X & Angle
V
& Angle
lntersec t
Digitiser
Me":
1881
Op
He
Page 18-2
18.2 DIMENSION -ARROW
18.3 DIMENSION- HOR/ZONTL
0 P 1
Page 18- 3
Dimenson
Chapter 18
18.5 DIMENSION - RADIUS
18.4 DIMENSION -PARALLEL

This command draws a dimension which indicates the distance between two referencc points parallel to a line betwecn the two points.
The dimcnsion will be drawn using the current parameter settings
as indicated in the SETUP key <F2> Dimensions pulldown menu.
This command draws a d imension which indicates the radius o l a

specified are . The dimensi on w ill be drawn us ing t he cu rrent
parameter scttings as indicated in the SETUP key <F2> Dimensions
pulldown menu.
USE
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the are. To do this, move thc
cursor to near the are and press <RETURN> to specify it. T hc are
will !lash if TurboCAD manages to locate it, or e lse the speaker
will beep and you will have to re-indicate the are with the c ursor
el o ser to the a re.
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the first point and will default
to the NearPoint point definition modc. Use any of TurboCAD's
point definition modes to indicatc this point (remember that pressing
<RETURN> specifies a point). Once this point has becn specified,
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate thc second point. This is done
in exactly the same manncr as thc first point. Finally, you must
indicate a point for the dimcnsion line and TurboCAD will default
to the ScreenPos point definition mode. Once again, use any of
OPERATION
TurboCAD will draw an arrow to the are with a labcl indicati ng
the radius of the are. The dimension label will re!lect the real world
distance and not the actual scaled down draw ing distance.
OPERATION
TurboCAD will draw a dimension line indicating the distance between thc two refcrcnce points spccificd parallel to a line bctween
the two points al thc distance specified by defining thc point for
thc dimcnsion linc (The dimension labcl will re!lect the real world
distancc and not the actual scalcd down drawing distance) .
Point for din line
Parallel Din
SereenPos
298
185
Jndicate are
Radlus din
PointDef :
ScreenPos
HearPoint
CoordsAbs
Relative
Polar
HidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
Hor & Rad
Ver & Rad
X & Angle
Y & Angla
Pa.ra.llel
Dirn
Radius
Dim
Men:
182
Op
He
8 P 1
lntersect
Dlgl t i ser
Men: 188
Op
L
Page 18- 4
He
8 P t
18.4 DIMENS/ON - PARALLEL
18.5 DIMENSION - RADIUS
Page 18- 5
Chapter 18
18.6 DIMENSION - VERTICAL

This command draws a vertical dimcnsion which indicates the vertical distance between two rcference points. Thc dimension will be
drawn using the current paramctcr settings as indicated in the SETUP
key <F2> Dimensions pulldown menu.
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate thc first point and will default
to the NcarPoint point definition mode. Use any of TurboCAD's
point definition modes to indicate this point (remember that pressing
<RETURN> specifies a point). Once this point has bcen specified,
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the second point. This is done
in exactly the same manner as the first point. Finally, you must
indicate a point for the dimension line and TurboCAD will default
to the ScrcenPos point definition mode. Once again, use any of
OPERATION
TurboCAD will draw a vertical dimcnsion line indicating the vertical
distance bctween thc two rcfcrence points specified. The dimension
label will rcflcct the real world distancc and not the actual scalcd
down drawing distancc.
- j i r - - - - lll
19.1 FANCYLINE - ARCPTT AN
This command draws a line tangent to an are from a specified point
(i.e. perpendicular to the radius at that point). ll will be drawn
using the currently selected line type, peo color and line thickness
on the currently selected !ayer.
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the point from which you want
the tangent drawn. Use any of TurboCAD's point dcfinition modes
to in<licatc this point (remember that pressing <RETURN> specifies
a point). Once this point has been specified, TurboCAD will ask
you to indicate the are to which you want a line drawn tangent.
Move the cursor to ncar the are on the side of thc are you wish to
have the tangent drawn and press <RETURN> to specify this are.
The are will flash if TurboCAD manages to locate it, or else the
speaker will beep and you will havc to indicate the are again wilh
thc cursor clm:er to thc are.
OPERATION
Point for din 1 ine
Vert Dinension
ScreenPos
234
121
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
TurboCAD will draw a line from the point to the are such that the
line is tangcnt to the are.
CoordsAbs
Relatlve
Polar
P3
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
P2
LO
Hor & Rad

Ver A Rad
X A Angle
Y & Angle
Pl
Vertical
Dim
Jnterseet
Digitlser
Me": 188
Op
He
L 8 P 1
Page 18- 6
18.6 DIMENSION- VERTICAL
19.1 FANCYLINE -ARCPTTAN
Page 19- 1
The Fancy/ine Command
Chapter 19
254
Pt-Arc tan
lncllcat" Ar"
7S
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~--,
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HenrPoint
Coordl;Abc
Relatl.,.,
Polnr
nidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Pt
Are Angle
On Are Pt
19.2 FANCYLINE - DROPLINE

This command draws a line perpendicular lo an exisling line. Tht
new Iine will be drawn from a specified poinl to lhe exisling line.
lt will be drawn using lhe currenlly selecled line lype, pcn color
and Iine thickness on lhe currently selected !ayer.
Line Pt
Hor & Rad
Ver & Rad

X & Angle
Y & Angla
lntersect
Digitlser
Are
Pt
Tan
"""' 171
Op
Ne
8 P 1
NOTE
TurboCAD has lwo melhods of searching for lhe nearest are - NEAR
and CENTER search modes (refer lo seclion on the SETUP key
<F2> Environmenl).
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the line to which you want a
line drawn perpendicularly. To accomplish this, move lhe cursor lo
near the line and press <RETURN> to specify this line.
The line will flash if TurboCAD manages lo locate il. The speaker
will beep if it does not and you will have lo re-indicatc thc linc
with lhe cursor closer lo il. Once the line has bcen indicatcd to
TurboCAD, you will be prompled to indicale the point from which
you wanl the perpendicular lo be drawn. You can use any of
TurboCAD's poinl definilion modes lo specify lhis poinl (rcmember
lhal pressing the <RETURN> key specifies a poinl).
OPERATION
TurboCAD will draw a line from lhe specified poinl lo the specificd
line which is perpendicular lo the original line
lncllcate polnt :
Perpendicular
ScreenPos
262
184
PointDef:
ScreenPos
ttearPoint
Coordsflbs
Eefore
After
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
p~~
xt
Drop
RelatlYe
Polar
llor & Rad

Ver & Rad
)( & Angle
Y & Angle
Lin.e
lntersect
Dlgltlser
""": 188
Clp
Ne
L e P t
Page 19-2
19.1 FANCYLINE - ARCPTTAN
Page 19- 3
Chapter 19
The Fancyline Command
NOTES
19.3 FANCYLINE - ELLIPSE
1. If the poinl you specify is beyond lhe end of lhe line, lhen
TurboCAD will draw lhe dropline from lhe specified poinl lo where
lhe extended Jine would meel lhe dropline.
2. TurboCAD has lwo melho<ls of searching for lhe nearesl Jine NEAR and CENTER search mo<les (refer lo seclion on lhe SETUP
This command draws a polygon which approximales an ellipse. 1 \Je

polygon will be drawn using the currenlly selccted line type, pcn
color and Jine thickness on thc currently selected !ayer.
USE
TurboCAD will ask you lo indicate the center of the ellipsc. You
can use any of TurboCAD's point definition mo<les to specify this
point (remember that pressing the <RETURN> key specifies a
point). Next, you will be prompted to indicate a poinl al lhe en<l
of lhe major axis.
Use any poinl definilion mo<le lo specify lhis point. You will lhen
be asked lo in<lieale a point for lhe minor axis. Use one of
TurboCAD's poinl definition mo<les lo specify this point. TurboCAD
will calculate the perpendicular distance from the major axis to this
point an<l use itas the length of the minor axis. Finally, TurboCAD
will ask you how many sidcs yo u wish the polygon which approximatcs the ellipsc to ha ve. Enter any number from 1O to 999
followe<l by <RETURN>.
OPERATION
TurboCAD will gcnerate a polygon approximation toa n ellipse with
the specified number of si<les
lndicate Minor Point
El 1 ipse
ScreenPos
287
105
PointDef :
ScreenPos
ttearPoint
CoordsObs
Relative
Polar
Mn
Mid P t Li n
EndPI Are
Xc
Mi
Are Ongle
On ftrc Pt
Llne PI
llor & Rad

Ver & Rad
X & ftngle
V & Angle
Ellipse
lntersecl
Digitiser
Men:
IE!tl
Op
tle
L 0 P 1
Page19-4
19.3 FANCYLINE - ELLIPSE
Page 19- 5
Chapter 19
NOTES
19.4 FANCYLINE - LINE2ARCS
1. The greater the number of sides, the better will be the approximation, but the Ionger will be the time taken to draw the ellipse. The
default value of 100 sides should in most cases give adequate results.
2. Be wary of the amount of memory available if you try to increase
the number of sides used for the ellipse approximation.
This command draws a Iine which is tangent to two ares.
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the two ares to which you want
a line drawn tangent (First Are and Second Are) . For each are,
move the cursor to near the are and press <RETURN> to specify
the are.
In each case, the are will flash if TurboCAD manages to locate it,
or else the speaker will beep and you will have to indicate the are
again with the cursor closer to the are. Once both ares have been
indicated to TurboCAD, you will be prompted to indcate a ncar
point. Movc the cursor to a point on the drawing on the side of
the ares that you want the tangent to be drawn and press
<RETURN>.
OPERATION
TurboCAD will draw a line which is tangent to both the ares from
the point of tangency of the one are to the point of tangency of
the other on the side of the two ares specified by the near point
indicated.
lndicate Second Are
Are tangent
146
184
Al
Line
Page 19- 6
19.3 FANCYUNE - ELL/PSE
19.4 FANCYUNE - LINE2ARCS
Ares
"'"" 1118
Op
Ha
L 8 P t
Page 19- 7
Chapter 19
19.5 F ANCYLINE - PARALLEL
NOTES
This command draws a line parallel lo an exisling line. The new

line will be the same lenglh, have the same line lype, use the same
pen and be on the same !ayer as the original line.
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicale the line to which that you wanl
a line drawn parallel. To do lhis, move the cursor lo near the line
on the side of the line you wanl the parallel line to be and press
<RETURN> lo specify lhis line.
1. The parallel line will be drawn on the side of lhe original line
that the cursor was positioned when il was indicaled.
2. The default distance for parallel lines is 10 drawing units unless
otherwise specified. TurboCAD will remember any other distance
you specify for the duration of the work session.
3. TurboCAD has two methods of searching for lhe nearesl line NEAR and CENTER search modes (refer lo section on the SETUP
The line will flash if TurboCAD manages to locale il, or else the
speaker will beep and you will have lo indicale lhe line again wilh
the cursor closer to the line. Once the line has been indicaled to
TurboCAD, you will be prompled to enler the dislance you wish
lo have lhe parallel line drawn from lhe original. Enler lhe required
number of drawing units and press <RETURN>.
OPERATION
TurboCAD will draw a new line parallel lo the original Iine al the
requested dislance.
155
Parallel llne
Distance :38
----
----------><-~-
Parallel
186
D=30
Line
""": 181
Op 8 ""
L
P 1
Page 19-8
19.5 FANCYLINE - PARALLEL
19.5 FANCYLINE- PARALLEL
Page 19- 9
Chapter 19
19.7 FANCYLINE- RECTANGLE
19.6 FANCYLINE - POLYGON
This command draws a rectangle which is specified by defining

two diagonally opposile corners. The rectangle will be drawn using
the currently selected line type, pen color and Iine lhickness on the
currently selected )ayer.
This command draws 4 regular polygon wilh lhe requesled number

of sides. ll will- be drawn using lhe currcnlly selecled line lype,
pen color aud Iine lhickness on lhe currently selcctcd layer.
USE
TurboCAD will prompt you lo indicate the center of the polygon.
You can do lhis using any of TurboCAD's poinl definition modes
(remember lhat pressing <RETURN> specifies a poinl). Once this
poinl has been indicated lo TurboCAD you will be asked to enter
lhe radius of lhe polygon. Type in lhe required number of drawing
units and press thc <RETURN> key. TurboCAD will lhen requcsl
the number of sidcs you wanl the polygon to have. Type in any
number from 3 to 1000 followed by <RETURN>. TurboCAD will
lhen ask you to specify the angle relative to thc horizontal at which
you wanl the firsl apex to be located. Type in lhe required angle
measured in degrees and press the <RETURN> key.
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the first point. You can use any
of TurboCAD's point definition modes to specify this point (remember that pressing the <RETURN> key specifies a point). Next you
must indicate the second point in exactly the same way.
OPERATION
TurboCAD will draw a rectangle which uses the two specified poinls
as diagonally oppositc corners.
lndicate Flrst Point
Reetangle
ScreenPos
TurboCAD will draw a polygon with the requcsted number of sides

wilh each apex at lhe specificd radius from the specified cenler.
Thc first apex will be situated al the requested angle to the horizontal.
6
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
Polygons
141
124
Relatl....,
Polar
Ee:fore
After
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
Coordsflbs
Relatlve
Polar
e
X
R=20
S=6
A=O
Polygon
llor & Rad

Ver & Rad
>< & Angle
&
Angle
lntersact
Dlgltlser
"""' 179
Op
Rectangle
MidPt Lin
EndPt Rrc
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
11
Page 19- 10
120
Coordsllbs
OPERATION
Si des
271
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Lino Pt
Hor & Rad

Ver & Rad
>< & Angle

Y & Angle
lntersect
Dlgit iser
"""' 1791
Op
Ha
L 8 P 1
NOTE
You can choose whether to draw Iines using "rubber banding" using
the SETUP key <}'2> Environment pulldown menu . This allows
you to intcractively view the rectangle while deciding on a final
position.
Ha
8 P 1
19.6 FANCYLINE - POLYGON
19.7 FANCYLINE - RECTANGLE
Page 19- 11
Chapter 19
The Fancy/ine Command

lndleate polnt
19.8 FANCYLINE-TANGENT
This command draws a line which is tangent to an are (i.e. perpendicular to the radius at that point). lt will be drawn using the currently selected line type, pen color and line thickness on the
currently selected layer.
Are tangent
ScreenPos
Once the are has been indicaled to TurboCAD, you will be prompled
lo indicale lhe poinl al which you wanl the tangenl drawn. Use any
of TurboCAD's point definition modes lo specify lhis point (remember that pressing <RETURN> specifies a point). Once lhis point
has been successfully specified, TurboCAD will requesl the line
length. Enter the required number of drawing units and press
<RETURN>.
112
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
CoordsAbs
RelatlYe
Polar
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
Are Pt
L=70
On
Llne Pt
USE
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the are to which you want a
line drawn tangent. To do this, move the cursor to near the are and
press <RE'fURN> to specify this are. A portion of lhe are will
flash if TurboCAD manages to locale il. The speaker will beep if
it does nol and you will have to re-indicale the are with lhe cursor
closer to it.
278
Hor & liad

ller & Rad
X & Angle
Y & Angle
Are
lntersect
Dlgltlser
Ta.ngent
to
Are
11en: 179
Op
He
8 P 1
NOTE
TurboCAD has two methods of searching for lhe nearest are - NEAR
and CENTER search modes (refer to section on the SETUP key
<.1<'2> Environment).
OPERATION
TurboCAD will draw a line which is perpendicular to a radial line
drawn from the center of the are lhrough the specified point. The
center of this line will be at the point where a radial line from the
center of the are passing through the specified point would inlersect
the are.
Page 19- 12
19.8 FANCYUNE - TANGENT
19.8 FANCYLINE - TANGENT
Page 19- 13
Chapter 19
- - -1
This command hatches any closed polygon. The hatching lines are
drawn using the currently selected pen color on the currently
selected layer.
This Page lntentionally Left Blank
USE
TurboCAD will prompt you for a batch angle. Type in the desired
batch angle in degrees (-180 to +180) followed by <RETURN>.
TurboCAD will then prompt for the batch distance. Type in thc
spacing you desirc between batch lines in drawing units.
Next TurboCAD will ask whether you want to cross hatch or not.
Type in <Y> or <N> followed by <RETURN> to indicate your
choice to TurboCAD. If you select cross hatching, TurboCAD will
draw a second set of hatching lines at 90 degrees to the lines drawn
at the batch angle you specified.
Finally, you will be prompted to indicate the outline to be hatched
and TurboCAD will display the Outline menu. You must specify
the outline you wish to batch by defining a series of points starting
and ending al lhe same poinl thus defining lo TurboCAD a closed
polygon. The outline menu provides a means of defining these
points.
Use the Poinl option lo select a mode of operation which allows
you lo explicitly define points in a manner analogous to the NearPoinl point definition mode (i.e. when you press <RETURN> to
specify a poinl, TurboCAD will snap lo the closesl existing drawing
point).
The Erase oplion allows you lo erase any point which has bcen
defined in error. This option will sequentially remove the most recent
point specified.
The Are option will automatically place a series of points on an
are to generale a polygon approximation to that are.
Page 19- 14
19.8 FANCYLINE - TANGENT
20HATCH
Page20- 1
Hatch
Chapter 20
Notice that the outline boundary is defined by two overlapping lincs

2-3 and 7-8. In this case, this merely results in an infinitely tbin
gap in the hatching. However, if tbe outline points had been spccified
as depicted below, the same effect would give rise to a batchivg
boundary crossing an unhatched area i.e. the inside of the smaller
rectangle. This will cause a "ghosting" effect as TurboCAD will try
to batch the arca between the two lines 2-3 and 7-8.
OPERATION
As soon as you specify the starting point for the second time,
TurboCAD will batch the polygon cnclosed witbin the series of
points which . you bave specified.
NOTES
l. The batching function requires that a polygon be specified in
sequence with the starting and ending points being the same point.
Outline :
224
.---~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~,
31
Outllne:
Polnt
"'0
11
4
5
2
3. The polygon whicb defines the outline to be batcbed can be a

complex polygon. For example, to batch tbe area between two rectangles you could specify a complcx polygon by specifying points
as depicted in thc scqucncc bclow.
Point
258
2. TurboCAD indicates each point that has been specificd by placing

a little cross al tbat point. It does this by reversing tbe existing
color of each pixel needed to draw the cross. As a result, if you
specify a point twice, TurboCAD will draw a blank cross over the
first cross for the second point. However, botb points are still
specified.
Hatch
Polnt
Are
Erase
This causes problems in tbc case of hatcbing a circle. In order to

hatch a circle, specify tbc center point of the circle as tbe starting
point. Then use tbe are option to place a series of points on the
are. Finally, select tbc point option again and spccify tbe ending
point as bcing thc center of tbe circlc again.
Outl ine
Hntch
BB--~~~~~~~~~~Jg
Men:
t99J
Cl
He
8 P t
To clearly see this effect, try the above two examples using a batch
pattem which is cross hatched.
Outllne:
Polnt
Are
Eras.e
11
"'0
4
8
Men:
1!191
Cl
He
Page 20-2
8 P t
20HATCH
20HATCH
Page20-3
Chapter20
1111r.m1111111111111111111111
This command draws a line which is specified by defi ning its two
end points. It will be drawn using lhe currently selecled line typc,
pen color and line thickness on lhe currenlly seleclcd !ayer as set
up in lhe O lher enlilies puffdown menu.
USE
TurboCAD will ask you lo indicale a "Firsl poinl". Use an y of
TurboCAD's poinl definilion modes lo indicale lhis poinl (remcmbcr
lhal pressing <RETURN> specifies a poinl). Once lhc first poin t
has been specified, TurboCAD will ask you to indicale lhc "Next
poinl" . Once agai n use any of TurboCAD's point dcfin ition modcs
lo accomplish lhis.
OPERATION
!:
Once the nexl poinl has becn specificd, TurboCAD wi ll draw a linc
joining lhe lwo poinls. ll will lhen prompt for definilion of anothcr
" Ncxl poinl" and wilf draw a line from lhe lasl end point of thc
previous fine to lhis new " Next point".
'
In this way a "chai n" of lincs may be drawn. You can break thc
sequcncc by prcssi ng <RETURN> so as to define the ncxl point
as being on the samc poinl as lhc last poinl. Th is wiff cause
TurboCAD to ask for a firsl poinl again and in lhis way, you nccd
nol cxil thc UNE menu option lo slarl drawing a second set of
lincs. Prcss thc <Ese> kcy whcn you ha vc finis hcd drawing fines.
NOTES
1. Any linc can be conslructed in lhe abovc fashion, bul thc FancyLine option on thc main mcnu catcrs for a num bcr of useful automalic conslructions.
2. You can choosc whcthcr to draw lincs using "rubbcr bandin g"
using lhe SETUP kcy <F2> Environmcnt pulldown mcnu. This allows you to intcractivcly vicw thc line while dcciding on thc final
position.
Page20-4
20HATCH
21 UNE
Page 21 - 1
Chapter21
- 1 1 111
22.1 ARC
This command measures the center, radius and start and end angles
of an are.
USE
TurboCAD will prompt you to indicate the are. lndicate the are by
placing the cursor near the desired are and pressing the <RETURN>
key. The are will flash if TurboCAD manages to loca te it, or else
the bell will beep and you will have to indicate the are again with
the cursor c loser to the are.
OPERATION
TurboCAD will display the following measurements in the prompt
arca across the top of the TurboCAD drawing screen.
Center
This is the x-co-ordinate and y-co-ordinate of the center of the are.
Radius
This is the radius in drawing units of the are.
Start
This is the s tart angle of the are measured in degrees in an counterclockwise fashion from the horizontal.
End
This is the end angle of the are measured in degrees in an counterclockwise fashion from the horizontal.
NOTE
You can save the results of this command to the calculator using
<Ctrl-S> (refer to the Calculator <F4> Key).
Page21-2
21 LINE
22.1 ARC
Page22- 1
Mea sure
Chapter22
22.3 OUTLINE
22.2 LINE
This command measures the length, angle and horizontal and vertical
distance between the endpoints of a line.
This command measures the arca and perimeter of any o utli ncd
area.
USE
USE
This command will prompt you to specify an outli ne and thc Outline
menu will appear. You must specify the outline that you wish to
measure by defining a series o f points starting and ending at thc
same point thus defining to TurboCAD a closed po lygon. The o utline
menu provides a means of defining these points.
TurboCAD will prompt you to indicate the line. Indicate the line
by placing the cursor near the des ircd line and pressing the
<RETURN> key. The line will flash if TurboCAD manages to locate
it, or else the bell will bccp and you will havc to indicate the line
again with the cursor closer to the linc.
Use thc Point option to select a mode o f operation which a ll ows

you to explicitly define points in a roanner ana logous to the NearPoint point dcfinition mode (i.e. when you press <RETUR N> to
specify a point, TurboCAD will snap to the closest existing draw ing
point).
OPERATION
TurboCAD will display the following measuremcnts in the prompt
area across the top of thc TurboCAD drawing scrccn.
Lcngth
This is the length of the line in drawing units.
The Erase option allows you to erase any poi nt which has bccn
defined in error. This option will sequcntially rcmove thc most recen!
point specified.
Angle
This is the angle of the line to the horizontal measured in degrees
in an counter-clockwise fashion from the horizontal.
The Are option will automatically place a series of points on an

are to generate a polygon approximation to that are.
OPERATION
dX
As soon as you spccify the s tarting po in t fo r thc sccon<l time.

T11rhoCA D will display th e arca an<l pcrimctcr of the o utl inc in th e
prompt linc a l the top of thc TurboCAD drawing scrcc n.
Tbis is tbc horizontal distancc between tbe endpoints of thc line.

dY
This is thc vertical distance bctween the cndpoints of the line.
NOTES
1. Thc mcas ure-outlinc fun c tion rcquircs that a polygon be spccific<l
in scqucncc with thc starting and en<ling poin ts bci ng th c samc
point.
NOTE
You can savc the results of this command to the calculator using
<Ctrl-S> (refer to the Calculator <1<'4> Key).
This causes problcms in the case of measuring a circlc. In ordcr l o

mcasure thc arca of a circlc, s pccify thc ccnter point o f th e c irclc
as thc starting point. Thcn use the are option to place a se ri es o f
points on thc are. Finally, selcc t thc point option again ami spccify
thc cnding point as being the ccntcr of thc circlc agai n.
Page22-2
22.2 UNE
22.3 OUTLINE
Page22- 3
Chapter 22
Measure
2. TurboCAD indicates each point that has been specified by placing

a little cross at that point. It docs this by reversing thc existing
colour of each pixel needed to draw thc cross. As a result, if you
specify a point twice, TurboCAD will draw a blank cross over the
first cross for the second point. However, both points are still
specified .
22.4 POINT
This command gives the x and y co-ordinates of a point.
USE
3. You can save the results of this command to the calculator using
<Clrl-S> (refer to the Calculator <F4> Key).
TurboCAD will ask you to indicate the point you want to mcasure.
Use any of TurboCAD's point definition modesto indica te this point
(remember that pressing <RETURN> specifies a point) .
4. The polygon which defines the outline to be measured can be a

complex polygon. For example, to measure the area bctween two
rcctangles you could spccify a complex polygon by specifying points
as dcpicted in thc sequcnce below.
Outl lne :
Hatch
199
Polnt
181
OPERATION
TurboCAD will display the x-co-ordinatc and the y-co-ordinale of
the specified point in the prompl linc al the top of the TurboCAD
drawing screen.
Outl ine:
Point
Are
Erase
11
You can save the results of this command to the calculalor using
<Ctrl-S> (refer to the Calculator <F4> Key).
10
4
NOTE
9
8
11en: 199 1
CI
L
He
8 P t
Notice thal the oullinc boundary is defiucd by Lwo ovcrlappiug lines

2-3 and 7-8.
Page22-4
22.3 OUTLINE
22.4 POINT
Page22 - 5
Chapter22
22.5 TWOPOINTS
This command measures lhe dislancc, angle and horizontal and vertical dislance belween lhe lwo poinls.
This command allows you lo s pecify a poinl on lhe d raw ing.
USE
TurboCAD will prompt you to indicatc lhc first poinl. Use any of
TurboCAD's poinl dcfinilion modcs lo indicale lhis poinl (rcmcmber
lhal prcssing <RETURN> specifics a poinl). Once lhc firsl point
has bccn spccified, TurboCAD will ask you lo indicale the second
poinl. lndicale rhis poinl in exaclly the same way as lhe firsl point.
USE
OPERATION
OPERATION
TurboCAD will display the following mcasuremcnls in the prompl

area across lhc top of thc TurboCAD drawing scrcen.
TurboC A D wi ll draw a po in t al the position specificd.
TurboCAD wi ll prompt you lo indicale a poinl and will dis pl ay lhc

poinl dc fi nition menu. Us e any of these poinl de finitio n modes lo
specify thc poinl (remembcr thal prcssing <RET UR N> spcc ifics a
po int). Press lhe <Ese> when you have finis hed defin ing po inls.
NOTE
Dist
This is lhc distancc betwccn the lwo points in drawing units.
Allho ugh a si ngle point on lhe drawing is nol o f much use, lhcy
are usefu l as cons lruc lion poinls. lf, for insla ncc, you a re go i ng lo
use a po inl on lhc inlc rscctio n o f a linc an d an are frcqu cntly, it
may be wo rLh your while to defi ne a permancnt poinl lhcrc ami use
the Nea rPo inl poinl dcfinilion modc ralhcr tha n thc more tcd ious
lnlersecl- Linc Arc mode .
Angle
This is the angle thal a linc <lrawn bctwcen the lwo points would
make with the horizontal measurc<l in <legrees in a countcr-clockwisc
fashion from the horizonlal.
dX
This is the horizontal <listance bctwccn the two poinls.
dY
This is thc vertical <lislancc bclwccn thc lwo poinls.
NOTE
You can save thc rcsults of lhis command lo lhe calculator using
<Ctrl-S> (refer lo lhe Calculalor <F4> Kcy).
Page22- 6
22.5 TWOPOINTS
23POINT
Page 23 - 1
Chapter 23
This Page lnlenlionally Lefl Blank
The sketch comman<l allows you lo use TurboCAD as a sketchpad.
USE
Whcn using Lhis mo<le of operation, the cursor responds likc a pcn
or pcncil. You use the cursor control keys to movc the cursor (pcn)
aroun<l ancl press <RETURN> to alternately raise or lower the pen.
Press the <Ese> key when you have finishc<l skctching.
NOTES
1. Rcmembcr Lhal you can set Lhe cursor increments using Lhc
numeric keys al thc top of the keyboard (refer to the section on
the cursor keys).
2. Rcmcmber that you can move diagonally (refer lo thc section on
Lhe cursor keys).
3. This method of drawing is probably most useful with an alternatc
input dcvicc such as the mouse.
Page 23- 2
23POINT
24SKETCH
Page 24 - 1
Chapter 24
::.:.:
1
:::: >:: ::} :/ :: :

:::~:. .,., ,::::.,
::::: ::::: ::::: ::::::::
::::::
::: ::: :.:>: :.:::: :::
::: : : ::: /:::
?' :.:.: : :::: / }} / ::::: : :. :::::::::: }f: ... ::: ~

r:: 1. m ~fUXF llT 1j
I'. ;f :.1 r :; .. ::: :r: .}. L : u ::c.: h'. "'' ~ \.1 ;:::: r:::::.
:::::~ ::::;:: ::.:::
::::::: :::::: ::::: ::::::
:;:;::: :::::::
::::: ::::::: ::::: ::::::
:[)!J;;
:;::::: :::::: :;:::::::::;:::::::: ::, ::'. 7:::
This Page lnlenlionally Lefl Blank

This command draws a specified lexl slring. The lext will be drawn
using lhe currenlly selected paramelers on lhe SETUP key <F2 >
Text pulldown menu.
USE
TurboCAD will prompl for lhe lexl slring to be drawn .
Type in lhe required text (up lo 60 characlers) follow e d hy
<RETURN>. TurboCAD will lhen prompl for lhe lcxt width. Thi s
is lhe widlh in drawing unils thal lhe widesl lexl character will
occupy. Enler lhe desired value followed by <RETURN> or simpl y
prcss <RETURN> lo accept the defaull.
Next you will be asked to enler lhe lexl height. Type in lhe hc ight
in drawing units in which you wish the text lo be drawn followed
by <RETURN>. Lastly, you will be asked lo indicate the point
where you wanl lhe lcxl to be drawn . Use any of TurboCAD's mint
definition modes lo indicale lhis poinl (remembcr lhal prc ss ing
<RETURN> specifies a poinl) .
OPERATION
TurboCAD will draw lhe specificd lexljuslified aboul lh c s pec ifi cd
poinl according lo lhe juslificalion poinl specificd in thc SETUP
kcy <F2> Texl pulldown mcnu .
Page 24 - 2
24SKETCH
25 TEXT
Page 25 - 1
Chapter 25
This Pagc lntcntionallyLcft Blank
This command is uscd to finish working with a drawing. It also

providcs thc option of ending a TurboCAD work scssion .
USE
TurboCAD will ask "Quit (Y/N) ?"to vcrify that you didn't invokc
thc quit command by accidcnt. If you do wish to tcnninatc work
on thc currcnl work drawing typc in <Y> followcd by <RETURN >
or simply prcss <RETURN> to acccpt thc dcfault.
TurboCAD will now ask "Savc drawing (Y/N) ? ". If you prcss
<Y> followcd by <RETURN> or simply <RETURN>, thc currcnt
work drawing will be saved to disk undcr the name and in thc work
dircctory spccificd al thc time you startcd thc drawing. lf you prcss
<N> followcd by <RETURN> or <Ese>, tbe drawing will not be
savc<l an<l ali thc changcs thal you ma<lc an<l didn't sav e will be
los t.
Finally, TurboCAD will ask "Anothcr drawing (Y/N) ?". lf you rcply
<Y> followc<l by <RETURN> TurboCAD will starl a ncw <lrawing
session with anolhcr <lrawing. If you press <N> followcd by
<RETURN> or <Ese>, TurboCAD will tcrminatc an<l rcturn you
to the opcrating systcm .
WARNING
You should always Quil back to Lhc DOS prompt bcforc switching
off your computcr.
Page 25- 2
25 TEXT
26QUIT
Page 26 - 1
Chapter26
This Page lnlenlionally Lcft Blank

Poinl definilion is an integral part of TurboCAD. For examplc, a
line is simply remembercd by TurboCAD as two points which musl
be connectcd whcncvcr oulpul is called for.
Points are needed for:

1. Dcfining cntitics, e.g ., cnds of lincs, ccnlcrs of ares.
2. Rcfcrcnce for moving, copying, inscrting, rotaling, ele.
3. Sclcction of cxisting cnlries.
Thus TurboCAD nccds lo providc a mcans by which thc uscr can
define points. This has bccn catcrcd for in thc Point Dcfinition Mcnu
which appcars on thc right of thc scrccn as follows:
lndicate point
Define point
ScrcenPos
195
151
Pointnef:
. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - Screcr1Pns
Hertrl'oinl
CoordsOLs
Relative
Polar
NidPt Li11
EndPI llrc
Ore ftngle
On llrc Pt
Line Pt
ltur & Rad
Ver & Rurl
X & llnglr.
Y & Angln
In terse c t
Digi t
is~r
Men:
~05
CI
Me
0 P 1
This mcnu cannot he acccsscd from thc main mcnu, hut will aulo matically appear whcncvcr TurhoCAD requircs thc user to spcciry
a point. lt offers a number of differcnt mcthods (modcs) by which
poinls can be dcfined lo TurhoCAD . You sclcct a poinl ckfinition
modc by sclecting thc relevanl oplion on Lhc mc11u.
Page26-2
26QUIT
Page 27 - 1
Chapter27
Point Defintion
Tbe current point definition mode is displayed al tbe top of tbe
scrcen jusl to the rigbt of tbe menu option currently selected (refer
to section on lhe TurboCAD drawing screen). When a new drawing
is slarted, the poinl definition mode will dcfauh lo tbe ScreenPos
mode, but thercafter, it will remain sel al tbc last modc selected
by tbe user.
27.1 SCREENPOS
This mode uses the cursor position on the screen as the point :o
be defined.
USE
NOTES
l. Wberever it is necessary lo specify a distance, the units will
depend on the drawing size and scale as selccled when creating tbe
drawing or using tbe SETUP <F2> Environment pulldown menu.
2. Ali anglc spccifications are done in degrees.
3. TurboCAD has lwo searcb modes whicb apply whenever
TurboCAD calls for tbe user lo indicate an are or line. These are
CENTER and NEAR searcb modes (refer to tbe ENVIRONMENT
section under lhe SETUP key <F2> ).
Move tbe cursor to the point on the screen that you wish to define
and press the <RETURN> key to define it.
OPERATION
Thc co-ordinatcs of the registered poinl will corrcspond to thosc
displaycd un thc top right hand comer uf tbe screen (i.e ., cursor
position).
NOTE
lf the TurboCAD grid is switchcd on, thcn the cursor will snap to
lhe nearest grid point and TurboCAD will register that point as thc
registered poinl (refer to section on the GRID function key <F9>).
Page27-2
27.1 SCREENPOS
Page27- 3
Point Definition
Chapter 27
27.3 COORDSABS
27.2 NEARPOINT
This modc uses lhe ncarcsl cxisling drawing poinl as lhe point lo
be defined.
This mode works by using absolule cartcsian co-ordinates to de inc

a point.
USE
USE
Movc lhe cursor lo ncar an cxisting drawing poinl (c.g. end of linc,
cenlcr of circle ele) and press lhe <RETURN> key lo define it.
Typc in lhc absolule x and y carlcsian co-ordinatcs, each follow cd

by <RETURN>.
OPERATION
OPERATION
The cursor will snap lo lhc ncarcsl cxisling drawing poinl (on an
active !ayer) and TurboCAD will rcgislcr thal point.
Thc cursor will movc lo a posilion corresponding lo lhc co-ordinatcs

spccificd and TurboCAD will rcgislcr Lhal minl.
lndicate point
Define point
HearPoint
310
64
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
X coordinate : 318 . 290323 Define point
ConrdsAbs
318
Re lat ive
Polar
A:ft..er
/ +
N e a r P o i r i t
&
Rad
(o.o)
Ver & Rad

X & Angle
Y & Angle
( 4-,1.5)
MidPt Lin
EndP t flrc
Ore f)ngle
X = 4-
On Are Pt
Line PI
Y-1.5
Uor & Rad
CoordsAbs
lntersect
Digitiser
Ver & Roo

X & Angie
Y & Angie
lntersect
ti ser
n ig i
Men:
1811 1
Nen:
17!!
Op
He
Op
He
Page27-4
Polar
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Line Pt
llur
PointOef:
Se roen Pos
HearPnint
Coordsflbs
CoordsAbs
Relatlve
Befare
28
r-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-,
11
P 1
27.2 NEARPOINT
27.3 COORDSABS
0 P 1
Page27- 5
Chapter 27
Point Definition
27.4 RELATIVE
27.5 POLAR
This mode works by using a displacemcnt in thc horizontal and/or

vertical directions from the last point dcfined.
This rnodc works by using rclativc polar co-ordinatcs to calcu ate

the displaccmcnt from the last registcred point.
USE
USE
Type in thc x and y displacemcnts (X Relativc and Y Rclative)

from thc last registcred point, each followcd by <RETURN>.
Type in the anglc to thc horizontal an<l ra<lius to be use<l, cach

followed by <RETURN>.
OPERATION
Thc cursor will movc to a position displaced from thc last rcgistcrcd
point by thc amounts spccificd and TurboCAD will rcgister this
ncw position.
)( relative
OPERATION
The cursor wi ll movc to a position displaced from thc lasl rcg is lcrcd
poinl by thc radius spccificd at thc spccificd anglc lo Lhc horizontal
an<l TurhoCAD will rcgistcr this ncw position.
NOTE
NOTE
Positivc values for X Relativc will rcsult in displaccmcnts to the

right whilc negativc va lues will rcsult in displaccmcnts to thc left.
Similarly upward and downward displaccmcnts can be achicvcd by
cntcring positivc or ncgativc valucs for Y Rclativc.
Positive valucs uscd for thc ang le will calculatc in a counte r-clockwisc manncr, whilc ncgativc values will give risc lo clockwisc an gular displaccrncnls.
Define point
Relative
312
78
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~--'--~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-,
PointDer:
Angle
Define point
------------(2,3)
Relative
X=+4
Y=+l.5
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
Frevtous
llor & Rad

Ver & Rad
X & Angle
Y & An9le
A::m t
P=le.:r
Pani:
Relatl ve
P ol ar
llor & R<>d

Ver & Ra d
X & Angle
Y & Angl e
l nterseci
lntersect
Digltiser
Dlgltl:<er
Men: 180
He
CJ
L 0 p 1
Op
He
L 0 P 1
27.4 RELA T/VE
PointDef :
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are f\ngle
On Are Pt
Lino Pt
"'"" 1791
Page27- 6
86
Coordsflt:n;
New
Polar
( 6 ,4. 5)
318
ScreenPos
HearPoint
HearPoint
CoordsAbs
Relative
-------------
Polar
ScreenPos
27.SPOLAR
Page 27- 7
Point Definition
Chapter27
27.7 ENDPT ARC
27.6 MIDPT LIN

This mode works by using the eenler poinl of a specified line as
Lhe poinl Lo be specified.
This modc works by usiug Lhc cnd of an are as Lhc poinl lt be

spccifie<l.
USE
USE
TurboCAD will prompl you Lo indicale Lhe line. Movc Lhe cursor
Lo near thc speeified linc an<l prcss <RETURN> lo sclcel it.
TurboCAD will prompl you to indicate an are. Move thc cursor Lo

ncar thc <lesire<l are and press <RETURN> Lo select the are .
OPERATION
OPERATION
The cursor will movc lo Lhe centre of Lhc linc allll TurboCAD will
register this point.
Thc cursor will move Lo Lhe en<l of Lhe are closcst to wh ere thc
cursor was allll TurboCAD will register this point.
NOTE
NOTE
TurboCAD has Lwo metho<ls of searching for Lhc nearcsl linc - NEAR
an<l CENTER search mo<lcs (rcfcr to scclion on Environment undcr
Lhe SETUP kcy <F2>).
TurboCAD has Lwo methods of searching for an are - NEAR ami

CENTER search modes (refer Lo seclion on Environmcnt un<lcr thc
SETUP kcy <F2>).
lndieate line
Define point
MidPt Lin
318
7G
PointDef:
S:creenPos
lndieate are
Def 2pt line
EndPt Are
HearPoint
HearPoint
Before
=r=
After
X
(Defining
MidPt
L ines)
Lin
Relati ve
Polar
Befare
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
llor & Rad

Ver & Rad
)( & Angle
Y & Angle
lntersect
Dlgitlser
Men:
Op
Page27-8
Coordsf'lbs
CoordsAbs
RelatiYe
Polar
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
Aft.er
(Defining
EndP-t.
1771
Lines)
Are
MidPt Li n
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Line Pt
llo r & Rad

Ver & R<>d
)( & Anglc
Y & Angle
Intersec l
Dlgitiser
Mcn : 188 1
Op
He
0 P 1
27.6 MIDPT UN
PointDef :
ScreenPos
27. 7 ENDPT ARC
He
0 P 1
Page27 -9
Chapter 27
Point Definiti
27.9 ON ARC PT
27.8 ARC ANGLE

This modc works by using a point on an are at a specified anglc
to the horizontal.
Th is modc allows you to spccify a ny point on an a re.
USE
USE
TurboCAD will prompt you to indica tc an are. Movc th c c ursor

nca r thc dcsircd are at thc positio n you wish to spcc ify a nd pre
<RETURN > lo selcct thc are.
TurboCAD will prompt you to indicatc an are and spccify thc angle
on thc are. Move thc cursor to ncar thc specificd are and prcss
<RETURN> to select the are. Thcn cnter the dcsircd angle on the
are followcd by <RETURN>.
OPERATION
T hc cu rsor will :map to thc ncarcst po int on thc are and TurboCA
will rcgistcr this po in t.
OPERATION
Thc cursor will movc to a point on thc spccificd are corrcsponding
to an anglc as was rcqucstcd and TurboCAD will rcgistcr this point.
NOTE
TurboCAD has two mcthods of scarc hing fo r an are - NEAR a r

CENTER scarch m odcs (rcfcr lo scctio n o n Env ironmcn t un dc r ti
SETU P kcy <F2>).
NOTE
TurboCAD has two mcthods of scarching for an are - NEAR and
CENTER scarch modcs (rcfcr to scction on Environmcnl undcr thc
SETUP kcy <F2>).
Angle on are
90
Def 2pt line
Befare
Are lngle
After
Are
125
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
CoordsAbs
Relatlve
Polar
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Line Pt
flor & Rad
Ver & Rad
X & Angle
Y & Angle
A=90
(Defining
249
Lines)
Angle
lndieate are
Def 2pt line
Pt on Are
318
53
Po i ntDef :
ScroenPo~
HearPo i n l
Coordsf)b3
Relative
Befo re
After
Po l ar
Mi d PI L ir
EndPt llrc
Are Angl
On Are P 1
Llne P t
flor
Ver
X &
Y &
(Defining
lntersect
On
Digitiser
t1en: 176
Lines)
Are
Pt
& Rae
& Rae
Ang l
Angle
I n ten~ect
ti~er
D l gl
11en : 1 Bll
Op
L
Ne
B P 1
Op
He
L 8 P 1
Page 27 - 10
27.8 ARC ANGLE
27.9 ON ARC PT
Page 27 - 1
Point Definition
Chapter 27
27.11 HOR & RAD
27.10 LINE PT
This mode works by using relative horizontal an<l radial displac mcnts from the last point specified.
This mode allows you to specify any point on a line.
USE
USE
TurboCAD will prompt you to in<licate a line . Move the cursor to

near the desired line and press <RETURN> to spccify the line.
Type in the radial and horizontal displacements thal you requirc

followed by thc <RETURN> key.
OPERATION
OPERATION
The cursor will snap to the ncarest point on the line and TurboCAD
will registcr this point.
Thc cursor will move lo a position displaced from the lasl registercd
point by thc amounts specified an<l TurboCAD will registcr this
new position.
NOTE
TurboCAD has two methods of scarching for the nearcsl line - NEAR
an<l CENTER scarch modes (refcr to section on Environment under
thc SETUP key <F2>) .
Define point
lnd icate 1 ine
Pt on Lin
270
36
NOTE
Positive values for thc horizontal displacement will result in dis placcmcnts to thc right while negative values will result in di splaccmcnts to thc lcft.
PolntDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
CoordsAbs
Radiu~
Hor & Rad
Define point
317
Relative
Polar
A:Cter
Be'!:ore
(D=:fri.ri.g
Liri.e
--/
Lri=s)
F't
84
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
Coordsflbs
Relatlve
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
(6,3)
llor & Rad

Ver & Rad
X & Angle
Y & Angle
Hor=4
R.a.d=5
(2,3)
lntersect
Digltlser
Hor
Men: 177
Op
He
L 0 p 1
&
R.a.di u.s
Polar
MidPt Lin
EndPI Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Line PI
Hor & Rad
Ver & R<>d
X & Angle
V & Angle
In tersec t
Digitiser
Men :
176
Op
Ne
R'
L
Page 27 - 12
27.10 UNE PT
27. 11 HOR & RAD
0 P 1
1
1
Page 27 - 13
<r
Chapter 27
Point Definition
27.13 X & ANGLE
27.12 VER & RAD
Radlus
This modc works by usin g rclative ve rtical and radial displacements

from the last poinl specified.
This modc works by us ing rclalivc hori zontal a nd angula r d is p lac

menls from Lhe lasl po inl specificd.
USE
USE
Type in the radial and vertical displaeemcnls thal you require followed by thc <RETURN> key.
Type in Lhe horizontal displaccmcn l (X) and ang le Lhal you req uirc
followed by Lhe <RETURN> key.
OPERATION
OPERATION
The cursor will move to a position displaced from the last regislcre<l
poinl by the amounls spccificd and TurboCAD will registcr this
new position .
Thc cursor wi ll move lo a pos ilion displaced from Lhc lasl rcgislcred
poinl by thc amounls specificd and TurboCAD will rcgisle r this
ncw posilion .
NOTE
NOTE
Posilive values for the vertical displacement will result in upward

displacemenls while ncgalive values will resull in downward displacemenls.
Positi vc valucs for x will rcs ull in dis placements lo the ri g hl while
ncgativc values will rcsult in d isplacemenls lo the left. Similarly,
posilivc valucs for the anglc w ill resull in anglcs measurcd cou nlcrclockwise fro m thc horizon ta l. Ne ga tivc anglcs will rcsu lt in anglcs
mcasurcd clockwisc.
Define point
Ver & Rad
318
59
PointDef:
ScreenPos
HearPoint
CoordsAbs
Relatlve
Polar
(6,3)
Ver=3
Ra.d.=5
(2.3)
Ver
)(
Define point
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Line Pt
Hor & Rad

Ver & Rad
Angle
Y & Angle
)( &
&
Radiu.s
)( & Ang l ..
(6,3)
MidP t L in
X=4
Ang=36.B
(2,3)
Op
He
llo r
&
Rad
& Rad
)( & \ng l e
lntersecf
17~1
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
Ver
Y & Ang l e
Digi t i ser
Me":
'.llR
0 P t
&
Angle
lntersect
Digitiser
Mcn:
1 7~1
Op
Me
L
0 P 1
Page 27 - 14
27.12 VER & RAD
27.13 X & ANGLE
Page 27- 15
Point Definition
Chapter27
27.16 INTERSECT
27.14 Y & ANGLE

This mode works by using relative vertical and angular displaccments from thc last point specified.
USE
This m ode al lows you to spccify a ){)inl o n an e xis ting intcrscc ti < i .
Thcrc are 3 possibilitics, so a s ub-mcnu will a ulomaticall y a ppcar
and you m us t choosc the re levan! option.
Type in the vertical displacemenl (Y) and angle that you requirc
followed by the <RETURN> key.
XLINLIN
OPERATION
USE
The cursor will move to a position displaced from Lhc last registered
point by the amounts spccificd and TurboCAD will regisler this
new position .
TurboCAD wi ll prompl yo u to indica le th c firs l linc. Movc th e e ursor

to ncar thc fi rsl linc and prcss <RETURN> to incl ica tc thc lin l'.
Thc scco nd li nc is spcc ificd in cxac tl y thc s am c wa y.
NOTE
OPERATION
Positive values for y will result in upward displaccments while ncgaLive values will result in downward displacemenls. Similarly, posit i ve valucs for the anglc will resull in angles measured
countcr-clockwise from the horizontal. Negative angles will resull
in angles measurcd clockwisc.
Thc cursor w ill snap to th c point o f intcrsectio n of thc two lincs

and TurboCAD will rcgistcr this point.
lnlcrsccli o n of 2 lincs
l n dicate first line
Define point
X Li n L in
292
76
..--~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
lntersec:
Arc Arc
LineOrc
X Lin Li n
y .
Define point
& Angle
~
318
(6,3)
Y=3
Ar:i.g=36_B
(2.3)
&
Ar:i.gle
77
PolntDef :
ScreenPos
HearPoint
CoordsAbs
RelatiYe
Polar
MidPt Lin
EndPt Are
Are Angle
On Are Pt
Llne Pt
llor
Ver
)( &
Y &
L1
Angle
Angle
~"' ::~1
Page 27- 16
Lir:i.
& Rad
& Rad
""" ' rn.q
ln-tersect
Dlgl ti ser
Liri
8 P 1
27. 14 Y & ANGLE
Op
He
8 P t
NOTE
TurboCAD has Lwo mclhods ofscarching for thc ncarcs l linc - NE AR
and CENTER scarch modcs (rcfcr lo scclio n o n Env ironmcnl un dcr
thc SETUP kcy <F2>).
27. 16 INTERSECT
Page27- 17
Point Definition
Chapter27
LINEARC
ARCARC
Intersection of a line and an are
Intcrscction of 2 ares
USE
USE
lndicate the line by moving the cursor to near the required Iine and
then pressing <RETURN>.
lndicatc thc first are by moving the cursor to near the required are
and prcssing <RETURN>.
TurboCAD will then prompt you to indicate the are, which is

achieved by moving the cursor to near the are and pressing
<RETURN>. You must then indicate a point near to the intersection
so that TurboCAD knows which intersection point to use if the line
intersects the are more than once. This is done by moving the cursor
near to the intersection and pressing <RETURN>.
Thc secon<l are is indicaled in a similar manncr. You musl thcn

in<licatc a point near to Lhc inlcrscclion so that TurboCAD knows
which intcrscction point to use if the ares intcrsect more than once.
This is done by moving the cursor ncar to the intcrscction and prcss ing <RETURN>.
OPERATION
OPERATION
The cursor will snap lo the point of intersection of the line and are
closest to the near point indicated above and TurboCAD will register
this point.
Thc cursor will snap to thc point of inlcrscction of thc ares closcst
to thc ncar point indicatcd abovc an<l TurboCAD will rcgister this
point.
lndicate first Are
Def 2pt 1 ine
279
ArcArclnt
69
Intersec:
ArcArc
Lineftrc
lndicate llne
Def 2pt line
LinArclnt
316
60
)( Lin Lin
lntersec:
ArcArc
LineArc
X Lin Lin
A2
XA
Lin.e
Are
Are
Op
He
8 P 1
NOTE
TurboCAD has two mclhods of scaching for Lhe ncarest line and
/or are - NEA R anti CENTER scareh modes (rcfer to seetion on
Environment un<lcr thc SETUP kcy <F2>) .
Page 27- 18
27. 16 INTERSECT
Mcn:
186
0p
He
Men: 187
L
Are
8 P t .
NOTE
TurboCA D has two mcthods of scarching for thc ncarcst are - NEA R
ami CENTER scarch modcs (rcfcr to scction on Environmcnt undn
thc SETUP kcy <F2>).
27. 16 INTERSECT
Page 27 - 19
l)
Chapter 27
27.17 DIGITIZER
This mode uses a digitizer lo establish a point.
28.1 INTERFACE FILES

USE
Move the digitizer pen or puck lo lhe rcquired posilion . Press <BUTTON l> on lhe digilizer puck or clsc lhc slylus if using a digitizer
The following drawing cnlilics can be rcprcscnled in a TurbnC A D

interface file :
pen lo indicale lhc point.

Ares, dimcnsions, hatching, lincs, points, lext.
OPERATION
Thc cursor will move to thc scrccn posll1on corrcsponding to the
puck/pcn positii>n on lhc digitizcr pad . TurboCAD will thcn registcr
this point.
In addition, provision is madc to change the tcx l anglc. fonl, !ayer,

linc typc, pcn numbcr, horizontal tcxl size, vertical lcxl sizc and
linc thickncss .
Interface files are scqucnlial i.c . any global paramclcr su c h as Lc xt
sizc will hold for all subscqucnl lexl unlil anothcr command rc s cts
it. (Similarly for lext fonts , lcxl anglc, !ayer, pcn numbcr, linc or
are thickncss, linc type.)
Note that Tcxl X and Y sizcs are lhe same unlcss spccificall y slat cd
olhcrwisc .
LINES
A line is represented in the interface file using thc linc indicator.
UNE
slarl
start
end
end
x - co-ordinale
y - co-ordinatc
x - co-ordinatc
y- co-ordinalc
For cxamplc:
UNE
l .OOOOOOOOOOE+02
l .OOOOOOOOOOE+02
2.0000000000E+02
l .OOOOOOOOOOE+02
reprcscnts a linc starling 1OOmm from lhe lcfl boundary of lhe draw ing and IOOmm from thc boltom boundary. ll cxlcnds Lo a point
200mm from thc lcfl boundary ami IOOmm from thc boundary i.c .
il is a horizontal linc IOOmm long.
Page27-20
27. 17 DIGITIZER
28. 1 INTERFACE FILES
Page 28- 1
Chapter 28
Advanced Tapies
UNE TYPE:
TYPE
new line typc numbcr
PAl'ER :
PAPER
papcr size (intcgcr O - 4)
PEN:
PEN
ncw pcn numbcr
POINTS:
POINT
x - co-ordinale
y - co-ordinalc
RADIANS:
28.2 TurboCAD's MACROS

TurboCAD's macros are a way of remcmbcring a frcquently rcpeatcd
sel of kcy slrokcs. The following discus!'>ion describes how thcy
work logclhcr wilh cxamplcs. You are advisc<l lo actually run thc
cxamples in thc ordcr given in ordcr lo gain a complete undcr standing of TurboCAD's macros.
To create a macro, press lhc <All-(> kcy combination.This tells
TurboCAD that you wish lo crcalc a macro.
TurboCAD will rcspond by asking you to "Prcss Kcy to Define:".
RADIANS
SCALE:
SCALE
scale rclativc lo 1
SIZEX:
SIZEX
new texl horizontal size
SIZEY:
SIZEY
new lexl vertical size
TEXT:
TEXT
lexl linc
x co-ordinale of tcxl origin
y co-ordinale of lcxl origin
TEXT SIZE:
SIZE
sizc lo be uscd for ali fol lowing lcxl
THICK:
Now, typc in thc kcy combinalion you want to use to activatc thc
macro al a latcr stagc . You can use any of thc function kcys (cxccpt
<Fl>) in conjunction wilh cithcr the <Shifl>, <Clrl> or <All> kcys .
Whcn you havc prcsscd this kcy combination, thc prompl linc will
be clcarcd. From now on, ali kcyslrokes which you prcss will he
"rcmembercd" by TurboCAD until you press <Alt-)> to complete
thc macro.
Now create a macro which draws somc lcxl (Note that in this ex amplc, the main menu must be prcscnt whcn we start to define thc
macro).
ncw linc thickncss
KEYS TO PRESS
COMMENT
<All-(>
<Alt-F9>
T
Hcllo<RETURN>
9<REl'URN>
bcgin macro
thc kcy wc wish to use whcn activating lhc macru
9<R~;rURN>
NOTE
Thc wor<l DEGREES will be wrillcn al thc bcginning of an interface
file wrillcn out by TurboCAD. Whcn rca<ling in an interface file,
TurhoCAD will acccpl cilhcr lhc word DEGREES or thc wor<l
RADIANS an<l will changc lhc systcm accordingly. lf nothing is
found whcn rcading an interface rile, the system assumes RADIANS
to be consistent with older versions of the pro<luct whieh uscd to
operalc in radians.
s
<RlTURN>
<All-)>
sclcct thc tcxt comman<l rom thc nrnin mi:nu

thc tcxt you wish to <lmw
thc dcsirc<l lcxl width

the dcsircd lext hcight
sclcct thc ScrccnPos point Jdinition n11x..k
in<licatc lhc poinl whcrc lhe texl will Oc dmwn
cnd of macro
To scc thc rcsults of thc macro, movc thc cursor to a clcar spacc
in thc <lrawing arca an<l activatc thc macro by prcssing <All-F9>.
TurboCAD will draw thc tcxt "Helio" using a wi<lth and a height
of 9.
To scc whal macros havc bcen crcalc<l, use the <Shirt-Fl > kcy
comhination which will display a llclp scrccn as follows:
Page28-4
28.1 INTERFACE FILES
Page28- 5
Chapter 28
Advanced Tapies
78
185
,-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~----.,
11enu
:
Are
Me nu :
Are
Ch a nge
Change
Dinension
FancyLine
llatch
Line
Macro Help:
<Shift>:
DLI
BB
[J[j
[JE]
<Ctrl>:
F a nc~ ~ inc
lla t ch
Me asure
L ine
Me a sure
Point
Sketch
Text
Po int
S k etch
Tex t
Ouit
Macro t-lelp:
<Shift >:
<Al t>:
DG
~B
D~
Ll~
Dineusiun
DG
DGJ
Ll
Ll
~B
D~
????????
~
1L
Ll~
D~
8 P t
Macros which have been created will be indicated by ???????? next

to the macro kcy.
You may namc your macro whilc the Macro Help scrcen is displaycd
by prcssing the kcy combination uscd to invoke thc macro, thcn
typing up to eight characters followcd by <RETURN>
You can change the namc of a macro by the samc proccss.
For cxample, namc your macro "Tcxt". This will change the hclp
screen as follows:
<Ctrl >:
Ou it
D GJ
~
D~
Ll ~
DO
Ll LI
Ll
<A lt > :
D QJ
Tex t
D ElJ
0 P 1
To ma ke your macro more powerful , we can tell TurboCA D th at it

must s top and wai t for user input w hen runnin g by using the <Alt- =>
kcy combina tion when dcfining the sample macro uscd abovc:
KEYS TO PRE.SS
COMM ENT
<Al!-(>
<Alt-F9>
T
<Alt->
hcgin macro
thc key we wish to use whcn activating thc macro
sclcct lhe tcxt command from thc m ain rnc nu
XYZ<RETURN>
td l TurboCA D that it must stop nmning thc macro

an wait for uscr input followcd hy < RlT L'IC\>
any tcxl to check that macro wo rks - hccause of
thc <Alt--> instruction above, the macro v.:ill nnt
aclually draw th is lcxl whcn run. but will JrJ\.\,"
9<RETURN>
9 <RETURN>
s
<RI: l'URN>
<Alt-)>
thc tc xt typcd in h y thc uscr

thc csirc tc xt width
thc csirc tc xt hcight
sclcct thc Scrc<..-nPos poinl <lclinition nHxk
in<licatc thc poin t whcre thc lext wi ll be Jrnwn
cn<l of macro
Whcn you run this macro, TurboCAD will pause whcn the "Tcxt: "
prompt appcars and will wait until you type in sorne text foll owcd
by <RETURN> after which it will d raw the tcxt you havc s pcci fi cd
al run time ra thcr than thc tcxt dcfincd al dcfin ition time .
Page 28- 6
Page 28- 7
1
Chapter 28
Advanced Topics
NESTING AND RECURSION
DELETING MACROS
To make macros cvcn more powcrful, TurboCAD allows one macro

to call anothcr (nestcd macros). TurboCAD evcn allows a macro to
call itsclf (rccursivc macros). To illuslralc this, wc will expand the
above example further.
You can dclete any macro by pressing <Alt- -> fo l lowcd by thc
kcy combination of the macro which you wish lo dc lctc.
Keys to press
Commcnl
<Alt-(>
<All-F9>
T
<Ali-->
bcgin macro
XYZ<RETURN>
9<RlffURN>
9<RE'rtJRN>
s
<RE:rURN>
5
<l)o,n1Arrow>
<Alt-F'I>
<Ali-)>
thc key wc wish lo use when activating the macro

selcct the tcxl cornrnand frorn the rnain mcnu
tell TurboCAD that it must stop running thc macro
and wait for lL'cr input followed by <RE'I1JRN>
any tcxt to check that macro work.s - bccausc of
thc <Alt--> instruction above, the macro will not
actually drnw this tcxt whcn run. but will <lr.aw
thc tcxt typed in by the ll'er
thc dcsirc<l tcxt wi<lth
thc dcsired tcxt hcight
sclcct thc ScrccnPos point dcfinition mode
in<licatc thc point whcrc the text will be drawn
set the cursor step
movc down 1 cursor stcp
tell thc macro to call itsclf
cnd of macro
Whcn you run this macro, TurbuCAD will pause and wail for you
to typc in thc tcxt. lt will thcn movc down and cal) itsclf, thus
prumpling for more lcxt which will he drawn bclow thc prcvious
tcxl. This macro will kccp on drawing tcxt strings onc bclow thc
other until you prcss thc <Ese> key lo ahort thc macro. In general
you can use <Ese> to ahort macros.
Whcn you quit your drawing, TurboCAD will ask whcthcr you wanl
to "Savc Macros (Y/N) '?" if you have crcalcd or changcd thc macros
during your work session. lf you elcct lo savc thc macros, TurboCAD
will slorc thcm in a file callcd TURBOCAD.MAC on your
TurboCAD direclory. Thcsc macros will automatically be loadcd
when you run TurboCAD again.
STARTING MACROS AT ANY STAGE

There is no restriction as to whcn definilion of a mac ro can bcg in.
To illuslrate this, quit your TurboCAD work session a nd cnsure th at
the DOS prompl is prescnt.
Typc in TC <RETURN> lo load TurboCAD. This wi ll rcsult in th c
IMSI logo bcing displaycd. You can starl dcfining a macro al th is
stagc as follows:
KEYS TO l'RESS
<Ali-(>
<All-FIO>
<RETURN>
C:\TC<RlffURN>
MACRO<RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURN>
<RETURN >
<Ali-)>
COMMENT
bcgin macro
thc kcy we wish to use whcn activat ing thc macro
acccpt the tem1s of the liccn<;ing agrcc mcnt an<l
bcgin
the namc of your TurboCAD drawlng <lisk/uircctnry
thc namc of a drawing not yct crca tcd
to crcatc thc fllc
for A4 papcr sizc

for 1: 1 scale
to complete thc macro
Quit TurboC AD. Do nol savc thc drawing, bu l savc the ma cros .
Load Turbo CAD again by typi ng TC <RETURN> al th e DOS
prompl.
When the logo appears, press <Alt-FIO> to activatc the macro and
thc macro will automaticall y crcalc thc drawing called " MACRO "
on the "C :" disk in the su b-direclory callcd "\T C" w ith A4 pa pe r
sizc and a sea le of 1: 1.
WARNING
This macro will homb out if the drawing ca llcd macro a lrcad y cxists .
or if you do nol have a \TC sub-dircctory on thc C: dri vc .
NOTE
1. Whcn you save macros, TurboCAD will ovcrwritc thc macro file
with thc currcnl macro dcfinitions.
2. lf thcre are no macros, there will he no file callcd TUR80CAD.MAC.
Page 28- 8
Page 28- 9
Advanced Topics
Chapter 28
28.3 INTERF ACING TO OTHER SOFTWARE
AUTOEXEC MACROS
Any macro which has been defincd can be made lo automalically
execule as you slarl a TurboCAD work scssion by simply naming
the macro "AUTOEXEC".
DXFFILES
A number of CAD programs use the indu.;try standard inte rc hangc
files, the DXF formal. DXF is a neutral, ASCII file formal tha t
links otherwise incompatible CAD packages and Desk Top Publi shing systems . This neutral formal enables you to import and expon
TurboCAD drawing files from and to other CAD packages without
re-inputting the data .
Wbcn you are sure Lhal Lhe macro above is working properly, use
Lhc <Shift-1<'1> scrcen lo namc it as follows:
KEYS TO PRE.SS
COMMENT
<Shill-Fl>
<Alt-FIO>
AUTOEXEC<RETURN>
call up lhc macro hclp scrccn

thc kcy combination for the kcy we wish to namc
thc macro name (Musl be AUTOEXEC in
capital lcllcrs)
Another possiblc application for DXF files is thc processing o f a

drawing file to produce a bill of matcrials of ali thc items uscd in
the drawing, or to ealculatc certain structural analyscs . Thcrc are
a number of thesc sort of packages on the market that work with
DXF files.
Ir you once again tcrminatc your work session saving your macros,
bul nol your drawing and reslarl TurboCAD from Lhe DOS prompt,
this macro will automatically be invoked.
HINTS
1. The <Home> kcy will shifl you lo the lop line of any pull down
mcnu. Use Lhis fcalurc lo ensurc that you always acccss thc corree!
paramctcr whcn writing macros which use the pull down menus.
t,
2 . Always explicitly sclcct thc dcsircd point ddinitio n modc rcquircd

whcn defining a macro. The dcfault may not be thc same al run
time as when you defined the macro.
The DXF file formal is similar to the TurboCAD INT formal. See
more details in the section, Interface Files. A program ca ll ed
TCUTJL, shipped on your System Disk 2, converts DXF files to
TurboCAD INT files and back. The resulting DXF files can be read
by a numbcr of popular CAD packages. TCUTiL is entircly separa le
from TurboCAD and runs as a stand alone program .
RUNNING THE CONVERSION PROGRAM

To cxecute the convcrsion program, type al the DOS prompt:
3. The calculator, <F4>, and the mcasurc command can be pul to

good use when dcfining gcncralizcd macros, by rccalling storcd
values.
TCUTIL
<RETURN>
All the nccessary ins tructions are listcd on the scrccn. Remcmhc r
you can use thc <Ese> key al any slage to abort thc convcrsio n .
Whcn converting a file, TCUTIL may nccd to crcatc a largc work
file , usually 3 Limes thc sizc of thc DXF file. TC UTIL wi ll abort
if memory or disk memory runs out.
CONVERTING AUTOCAD DRA WINGS TO TurboCAD

1. Load thc drawing in AutoCAD ami writc it out in DXF form al.
t
Page 28- 10
2 . Run Lhc convcrsion program TC UTIL which will rcad in the DXr
file and writc o ul a TurboCAD in ter face file (*.INT file).
28.3 INTERFACING TO OTHER SOFTWARE
Page 28 - 11
Advanced Tapies
Chapter 28
3. Read the INT file into TurboCAD using the READ pulldown
menu .
CONVERTING TurboCAD ORAWINGS TO AUTOCAD

1. Load the drawing in TurboCAD and write out an interface file
using the WRITE pulldow n menu.
2. Run the conversion program TCUTIL which will read in the INT
.file and wrile out a DXF file.
set. TCUTIL wi ll scale an incoming dra wing to suit pape r sizc. Use
thc Environme nl mcnu in TURBOCAD lo change the sca lc and paper
sizc.
TurboCAD to DXF
Layers in DXF can only eontai n one line lype and onc color. TC UTIL
will allocale the firsl type or color that it comes across to the particular !ayer. Further changes will not be recognizcd.
Dimensions are wrilten inlo the DXF files as UNES and TEX T.
The dimensioni ng informalion is losl and cannnol be re-im ported.
3. lmport the DXF file into AuloCAD.
POSSIBLE PROBLEMS
Fonls are ma tc hed, as besl as possiblc, wilh no guaran tccs.
DXJ<' TO TurboCAD
VENTURA PUBLISHER
Early versions of AuloCAD and the associale DXF cxport vcrsions

have sorne limilations. Your version of AutoCAD may have overcome sorne of the following problems.
Ventura Publisher is primarily a raster based product that has a

facility for loading LINE-ART, or line drawings .
Ellipses do nol exisl as enlll1es in TurboCAD. TurboCAD approximales ellipscs wilh many sided polygons. When TCUTIL encounlers an cllipse in a DXF file, il subslilules a 100 sidcd polygon
in lhe INT file .
TurboCAD substilules standard fonls . There is no direct correlalion
between fonls . You may have to use th e CHANGE Command to
alter fonts to suit yourself.
D XF formal <loes not support ha te hes as entilies. Thcsc are merely
broughl in as set of lines.
Thcrc is no dimension cntity in DXF formal. This mcans thal dimcnsions are brought in as UNES ami TEXT. Once convcrtcd inlo
TurboCAD, thcy will nol changc thcir numeric labcls when objccts
are rolatcd or havc thcir sizc changed. DXF <loes nol support line
typcs in thc samc way as INT riles. Lincs are thus importcd in thc
standard formal. You may nccd lo Cl-IANGE thcm aflcrwards.
DXF supports an inrinitc numbcr of laycrs. INT supports only 128
laycrs. In thc case of a !ayer bcing highcr thal 127, thc cntitics on
lhc higher !ayer will be allocalcd lo !ayer 127 .
Therc are two ways to gel TurboCAD drawings into Ve n tura . One
is to WRITE out an INT file and th en use TCUTIL lo conve rl it
lo DXF. Ventu ra supplies a DXFTOGEM program and reads in GEM
drawings.
Thc simplcsl way howcvcr is to use TurboCAD in an HPGL rn odc.
This gives you a direcl access lo Ventura. Make sure th al your
ploller driver is sel lo an H P ( Hewlcll Pac kard) plo ltc r oplion.
Prefcrably use lhe HP7580 driver. PLOT out your draw ing to disk
using lhe " Plot lo file option" . This will crcalc a file with a PLT
exlcnsion . Th is file will rca d dircclly inlo lhe LI NE-ART scction
of Ventu ra.
Thc bcst rcsu lts come from crcati ng A4 dra wings ami plotting as
A 1 to disk. This usually givcs lhe bcst rcsulls in Ventura . Dra wings
plollcd to A4 s izc will rcsult in thi ck lincs whcn irnportcd in to
Ventura.
WORD PROCESSORS
A TurhoCAD INT file that is crcatcd with thc WRIT E p11lldow11
mcnu is a plain ASCII file th at can he rcad by most word proccssors.
Thc data can then he cdited . For cxample you could use thc global
scarch and rcplacc facility to c ha ngc rcpcatcd tcx t valucs in a dra w -
Scalc is handlcd diffcrcntly by DXF and INT. TurboCAD is limitcd

lo a numbcr of prcsct forms, whilc DXF has pagc limits which are
Page 28 - 12
Page 28 - 13
Advanced Tapies
Chapter 28
ing. The drawing can then be re-imported into TurboCAD using thc
READ pulldown menu.
Make sure that when you are dealing with a word processor, your
output <loes not contain hidden control or formatting characters.
The file should be kept in plain ASCII or non-document mode.
dBASE Ill AND LOTUS 1-2-3

Both dBASE and LOTUS have facilities to import and export plain
ASCII files. They can be used in conjunction with TurboCAD to
either cxtract information from a TurboCAD interface file or to
write out a calculated drawing . Any rclations bctwcen data variables
must be programmcd within dBASE or LOTUS.
28.4 BILL OF MATERIALS

EXTRACTING NON GRAPHIC INFORMATION
TurboCAD's interface facility allows a u~er to transfer non -graphic
information in and out of TurboCAD. One particularly useful ap plication of this facility is the production of a Bill of Matcrial s for
the various shapcs in a drawing.
For cxample: Take a manufacturer of kitchcn units. The componcnts
that make up a full kitchen are kcpt in a library of parts whcrc
each part is a TurboCAD drawing . The manufacturcr could thcn
construct a full kitchen using thc INSERT Command to bring thc
componcnts into thcir corrcct places in the drawing .
A Bill of Malcrials program will be most useful if thc manufacturcr
now wants to calculatc the total price or the numbcr of componcnts
in the ful! drawing.The simplcst way lo do this is to labcl cach
component with a piccc of text. These componcnts are then storcd
away in scparatc drawings.
When you have completcd your drawing, use thc WRITE facility
to writc out an interface file . The interface file that is crcatcd will
con ta in statcmcnts that contain thc word "TEXT'', followcd by thc
label that is attachcd to each shapc . The interface file is in ASCII
formal. You can use any word proccssor or programming lang11agc
to cxtract this information.
lt is not always practica! to manually go into thc interface file that
is gencratcd and cxtract thc information on the shapcs in your draw ing. Furthcr, tcxt labcls can be cumbersomc in a visual display.
AUTOMATING THE BILL OF MATERIALS

Included on Systcm Disk 2 is a dBASE program that ovcrcorncs
thcsc problcms. It is callcd BILLOFM.PRG . lts source co<lc is in
dBASE, hut thcrc is no rcason why you cannot use your favoritc
prograrnming languagc to crcalc a similar program.
Page 28 - 14
28.4 BILL OF MA TERIALS
Page 28 - 15
Chapter 28
CREATING A BILL OF MATERIALS PROGRAM

We suggest that you place labels of zero height and zero width at
the "BASE POINT" of each of the components that you save. These
labels will then be reflected on a one to one basis in the interface
file. The zero sizing would then distinguish between these labels
and normal text. The use of the zero size also means that the labels
would not appear on your drawing and clutter it up with additional
information .
While BILLOFM.PRG is good for example purposes, it can be
made more generally applicable.
Name and Cost are taken as one variable in the drawing. This
means that to alter a produces price, you must alter the labcl on
the drawing . lt is far easier to change priccs in dBASE than it is
to alter drawings . The program would be bellcr with name and
cosl separated .
Se l up a Product Master file with fields for Name anti Cost. Alter
the program so that it compares Name in the interface file with
Name in Lhe Producl Master file . Now pick up the associated cost
information from thc Product Master file .
The above alteralions will save information on Lhe drawing . lt will
now be a simple maller of altering thc price for a revised cost
estimale . You will also be able lo add other attributes to the master
file.
'
A.1 INSTALLATION
USING THE INSTALL PROGRAM
TurboCAD needs to be installed on to your hard disk drive. To do
this, insert your TurboCAD floppy into your A: drive and typc:
A:lNSTALL <RETURN>
The install program will then prompt you for the directory on yom
hanl disk inlo which you wish lo load TurboCAD (C:\TC by dcfault).
WARNING!
DO NOT INSTALL YOUR NEW TURBOCAD OVER AN OLD
VERSION, OTHERWISE YOU WILL BE UNABLE TO RUN THE
NEW VERSION.
lf you do not already havc a TC direclory, acccpl the default by
pressing <RETURN>. If you already have a TC directory on your
hard disk, change Lhis default lo another direclory e.g . C :\TC 18 .
The TurboCAD program files wil then be uncompressed from thc
A: drive into thc specificd directory and the SETUP program will
be run automatically.
THE SETUP PROGRAM
Thc SETUP program allows you to select the input devicc, plotter,
printer, and scrccn hardware you wish to use with TurboCAD as
wcll as choosing thc mcasurcment units to be used .
Thc option to "Setup TurboCAD Cache Disk" allows you to specify
which drivc TurboCAD will use for its interna! virtual storagc disk
cache. If you have a RAM drive installed on your system, you can
use it as the cache disk.
Ali the neccssary instruclions are listed on the screen . Remembcr
you can use thc <Ese> kcy at any stagc to aborl thc installation if
you think that you have made a mistake.
Page 28 16
28.4 BILL OF MA TERIALS
A.1 INSTALLA T/ON
Page A 1
Appendix A
Appendix A
Selection Of Plotters and Printers
SUPPORTED DEVICES
During lhe inslallalion, you will be asked lo selcel ploller and prinler
drivers (min = 1 max = 5).
TurboCAD currcntly supports th e following inpu t/o utput dcvices .

lf yo ur hardware is no t lislcd, check with your dcalcr whe th er :"ur
device is compatible with one of th ose listed or whe the r an upda ,ed
dri ver file is available with add itiona l dri vers .
NOTES
1. Even if you do nol have a ploller or prinler connecled, you musl
slill choose al leasl one of each, olherwise TurboCAD will nol work.
lf you do nol have a ploller or prinler, simply choose any plolter
or printer and use LPT 1: as Lhe porl lo which il is connecled.
TurboCAD will only allempl lo plot/prinl to Lhis device if you selecl
lo do so while running TurboCAD.
2. Mosl of lhe plollers capablc of supporling more lhan one paper
size have a separale driver for each paper size. This is lo caler for
the differenl scaling faclors involved. You can inslall up lo five
plollers, so install .all lhe paper sizes available for your ploller.
3. Sorne of lhe prinlers are supporled in more than one reso lution
and paper size. The paper size, as well asan "H" or "L" are indicaled
in Lhe driver name to indicale these options. You can install up lo
five prinlers, so choose the printer you wish and inslall differenl
paper sizes and resolulions .
4. The BASICA and Turbo PASCAL ploller drivers will create a
eompuler program in the rclcvant language to draw the current drawing . Simply plot Lhe drawing lo disk and Lhen compile Lhe plol file.
PLOTTER/PRINTER SCALING
When selecting ploller/prinler drivers, lhe instruclions al the bollom
of lhe screen will tell you thal you can use Lhe <F2> key lo change
lhe scaling factors. The scaling faetors are preset for the hardware
devices lested by us, bul you may find thal when you plol or prinl
that the measuremenls are nol correcl. Plol or prinl something of
known size, mcasure it and then alter lhe scaling factors as follows:
Lets say that we draw a square 100 mm by 100 mm but that when
it plots it comes out 90 mm by 110 mm.
Assuming that the 90 mm dimension is the horizontal one, we can
calculate lhe X-Scaling Factor as follows:
X-Scaling Factor
100/90
1.1111
Plollers:
AMPLOT 11
Benson 1002
BASICA
CW6120
DPX-200
DXY 1000
DXY 800/88 0
DXY IOl A
Epson HI-80
HP DraftMaster
HP7475A
HP7580B
Printcrs:
Dala Producls 802 1
Dala Producls 8052/72
Epson FX series
Epson LZ series
Fujitsu DPL24
IBM Graph ics
IBM ProPrin ter
Digilizcr.s :
Calcomp 22 120
Calcomp 221 80
Cherry MKlll
DigiPad 1117
DigiPad 7
HP Skc tch Pro
Kurta l lx8.5
Hl DMP MP
HI DMP SP
lo LP3 700
Penman
SPL-410
Turbo PASCAL
Ventura Ver 2
Watanabe MP IOO
Toshiba P34 J
RX 7100
HP LascrJct
Qume 11 Laser
Genius GT 1212
Summa Bit Pa<l 1
Summa Bit Pad Plus
Summa MM 1201
Summa MM18 12
T DS LC
Scrccn M odcs and Display Cards:

IBM CGA in Hi Res, single color mode
IBM VGA , EGA, MCGA
llcrculcs Graphics Card for monochromc scrccns
AT&T Hi Res, single color mode
Similarly Y-Scaling Factor = 100/ 11 O = 0.9091
PageA -2
A.1 INSTALLATION
A. 1 INSTALLA TION
PageA - 3
.,
AppendixA
Appendix A
Where neeessary, selup Lhe Porl aeeording lo your hardware eonfiguration and refer Lo Lhe deviee manual for the sellings lo be used
for baud rale, parily, data bits and slop bits.
WHAT THE INSTALL PROGRAM DOES

You can skip over this scction, as it is not necessary for the instal lation of TurboCAD. This section discusscs thc interna! workit !S
of the INSTALL program ami is inclu<le<l so that if you encountcr
problems, you can use this section to diagnose whcre thc prohlcm
lies. The TurhoCAD Inslallation program alters 5 files:
TC.BAT
CONFIG.CAD
MASTER.DRV
NORMAL.DRV
TC.BAT
As shippcd, this batch file simply clcars thc scrccn an<l <lisplays a
mcssagc lo thc cffcct lhal TurhoCAD has not yct bccn installc<l.
Thc installation program altcrs this file so that il runs TurboCAD
an<l spccifics what typc of graphics scrccn is installcd. Look for
thc line with thc word TURBOCAD in it. Thc wor<l following it is
thc scrccn paramctcr an<l shoul<l he onc of Lhc following:
IBM
- IBM color graphics scrccn with color graphics adaptcr

bcing run in high resolution - single colour mo<le.
COA
- IBM color graphics scrccn with color graphics a<laptcr

hcing run in medium resolution - multi colour modc.
OLI
- Olivclli monochromc scrccn with Olivctti Hi-Res card.
HGC
IBM nwnochromc scrccn with Hcrculcs graphics card.
EGA
- IBM cnhancc<l graphics screen wilh enhanccd graphics

adaptcr.
VGA
- IBM video graphics screen with video graphics adaptcr.
NOTES:
CONFIG.CAD
This file is an ASCII lcxt file usc<l by TurhoCAD to store a numhcr
of system paran1ctcrs.
Mousc
PageA -4
A.1 INSTALLA TION
A.1 INSTALLATION
Page A - 5
Appendix A
Appendix A
A.3 PLOTTERS
A.2MOUSE
TurboCAD has been <lcsigncd to work in conjunction with thc IMSI
Mouse or Microsoft compatible mousc. These micc are supplie<l
with software which is a mcmory resi<lent program which monitors
the mouse hardware. TurboCAD <loes not access the mouse hardware
<lirectly, but simply "talks" to this resi<lent software supplie<l with
thc mousc. lf this software is NOT LOADED, TurboCAD WILL
NOT WORK in conjunction with thc mousc.
GENERAL TIPS
Thc TurboCAD SETUP program sets up the nccessary files and

comman<ls to load thc mousc mcmory rcsi<lcnt program as a DEVICE
DRIVER (i.e. using MOUSE.SYS) ami thus rcqucsts that you inscrt
your mousc disk al thc rclcvant time if it is not alrca<ly loa<lcd onto
your computer systcm.
Explanation: Plottcr commands which control pcn movc mcnt givc

x and y co-ordinates (e.g. 2500,1000). Asan cxamplc, considcr drawing a horizontal linc from 2500, 1000 to 4500, 1000. Whc n th c rc is
a commun ication problcm, part or ali of onc of thcsc numhers trans mittcd by thc computcr are not rcccivcd by thc plottcr. In ou r cxamplc, the plo tter could for instance rcccive 2500,1 instcacl of
2500, 1000. This would rcsult in a linc bcing drawn fro m thc bottom
of the papcr to thc point 4500,2500 instcad of the dcsircd horizonta l
linc.
lf you wish to load the mousc mcmory rcsi<lent software by running

thc MOUSE.COM program instea<l, selcct to install "Keyboar<l only
with no extra deviccs" whcn installing TurboCAD. You can thcn
actvate the mouse while running TurboCAD using thc "Configuration" option of the Setup <F2> kcy providc<l that TurboCAD finds
the mouse memory-rcsi<lcnt software prcsent.
1. Where you have a choice as to wheth"'r to use a parallcl cable

ora serial cable to conncct your plottcr to your computcr, thc parallcl
connection is the prcferrcd mcthod.
2. If strange fines appcar on your drawing, this is ca uscd by a
communication problem bctwecn the computer and plottcr.
Suggestion: You should check that your serial cable corrcsponds

with the plottcr manufacturcrs spccifications ancl that the switch
settings on your plotter correspond to the sctting usc<l in TurhoCAD
for baud rate, pa rity, data bits and stop bits.
OTHERMICE
lf these are ali correct, try running al a lowcr baud rate.
Although TurboCAD was dcsigned to work in conjunction with thc

mouse, most othcr mice available work in a similar manncr and
may be run with TurboCAD by simply cnsuring that thc neccssary
mcmory rcsident mouse software supplicd by thc mouse manufacturcr is loadcd correctly. Rcfer to thc prcvious section for an cxplanation of thc mcchanism to use a mousc.
Page A - 8
A.2MOUSE
3. Many plottcrs will not allow you to plot to thc full cxtcnt o f thc
papcr as the plotter uses sorne of the papcr arca for ho lding the
papcr. TurboCAD maps thc screcn view to full pape r s izc, and so
when using a plottcr which rcstricts thc plotting arca to bclow the
papcr size, you will wastc thc corrcsponding amoun t of scrccn . 1-lowcver, ali of TurboCAD's wastagc occurs al the top and ri ght of the
screen as illustrated on the ncxt page:
A.3 PLOTTERS
PageA - 9
Appendix A
Appendix A
A.3.2 HEWLETT PACKARD
Plottcr Papcr Wastagc
Hewlett Packard HP7475A
('
PLOTTER
IBM PC
conncct lo shcild
2
3
e
20
(4 , 8 through 19, and

21 through 25 are nol
conncclcd)
--~~~~~~~-2
Ff
~~
20
(4, 8 through 19, and

conncctcd)
Corrcsponding TurboCAD Waslagc

IBM AT
PLOTTER
~ ~
20
[6
( 1, 7 anti 9 are
nol conncclcd)
PageA - 10
A.3 PLOTTERS
A.3 PLOTTERS
(1, 4, 8 through 19, anti

conncctcd)
Page A - 11
Appendix A
Appendix A
HOUSTON INSTRUMENTS
Hewlett Packard HP7580
Houston Instruments DMP Series Plotters

There are ten plotter drivers corresponding to these plotters. You
should only install the drivers corresponding to the paper sizes which
can be used by your specific plotter. In addition, you should only
install "Single Pen" drivers unless your plotter has the capability
of automatically changing pens.
PLOTTER
IBM PC
connect to sheild
2
3
2
3
Ff
e~
20
21 through 25 are not
connected)
~::i
Single Pen
HI DMP SP
HI DMP SP
HI DMP SP
HI DMP SP
HI DMP SP
20
connected)
A4
A3
A2
Al
AO
Mulliple Pcn
HI DMP MP
HI DMP MP
HI DMP MP
HI DMP MP
HI DMP MP
PLOTTER
IBM AT
2
3
4
5
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[6
8
( 1, 7 and 9 are not
connected)
~ :J
'--~~~~~~~~~-
7
20
(1, 4, 8 through 19, an

connected)
A.3 PLOTTERS
PLOTTER
IBM PC
3
4
ett=
2
3
4
5
22
( 1, 9 through 19, 21 and
conncctcd)
PageA- 12
A4
A3
A2
Al
AO
A.3 PLOTTERS
L~
22
(1, 9 through L.,

connected)
PageA - 13
Appendix A
IBM AT
1
2
3
Appendix A
Houston Instruments PC Series Plotters
PLOTTER
Install thc HI DMP MP A4 and HI DMP MP A3 drivers.
4s
7
8
9
IBM PC
2
3
(1, 9 through 19, 21,

and 23 through 25
are not connected
[ !.
l==
PLOTTER
.-----------2
'---+----------3
~--------- 4
---------+---------5
22
(1, 4, 9 through 19,

21, and 23 through 25
are not conncctcd)
IBM AT
(1 and 6 are
not connected
PLOTTER
2 -----------------3 -----------------4
~--------5
~-------6
8
9
(7 is not conncctcd)
PageA - 14
A.3 PLOITERS
A.3 PLOITERS
2
3
4
5
(1 and 6 are
not connected
PageA - 15
AppendixA
AppendixA
2. If your drawing is to big to fil, the plotter POWER (ERROR)

LED will flash. Tui~ means that you have drawn a drawing that is
to large to fil withih the paper limits of the plotter.
ROLAND
Roland DXY-lOlA Plotter
You should select the DXY-lOlA A4 and DXY- lOlA A3 plotter
drivers.
Roland DPX-2000 Plotter

You should select the DPX-2000 A4, DPX-2000 A3 and DPX-2000
A2 plotter drivers.
Operating Tips:
1. Always move the plotter pen carriage to the bottom left hand
comer before powering up the plotter.
If your drawing is to big too fil, the plotter POWER (ERROR) LED
will flash. This means that you have drawn a drawing that is too
Jarge to fit within the paper limits of the plotter.
2 . Since this plotter is a one pen plotter, TurboCAD will pause cach
time a new pen is required and prompt you to inscrt the relcvant
pen. For example before pcn onc is plotted TurboCAD will say:
OPERATING TIPS
1. Use the UR switch to ensure that ali pens are rcplaccd and to
move the pen carriage to the top right of the plotter so that paper
can be inserted or removed.
"Pen l : Press RETURN to continue"

To change pens al this stage you should:
2 . If the AUTO light is on, the plotter will go through the motions
of plotting without actually selecting a pen. Using the AUTO switch
toggles this light ON and OFF.
- Use the plotter PEN UP/DOWN switch to lift the pen clear of
thc drawing surface.
- Press plotter HOME switch to send the pen to the "home" position.
3. Place paper in the bottom left comer of the plotter if using s izes
smaller than A2.
- Inserl thc dcsircd pen into the pcn holder.

- Prcss thc plotter PEN UP/DOWN switch Lo switch off thc PEN
UP light as this mode of opcralion overidcs the software control
and TurboCAD will plol in thc "air" if thc PEN UP light is on.
Jf you wish to conlinuc plotting in thc currcnl pcn colour, simply
prcss <RETURN>.
Roland DXY-800/880/980 Plotter

You should select thc DXY800/880A4 and DXY800/880A3 plottcr
drivers.
Opcraling Tips:
1. Always movc thc plottcr pcn carriagc to thc bottom lcft hand
comer bcforc powcring up Lhc plollcr and makc surc that ali pcns
to be uscd are in thc pcn stock al thc lcfl (i.c. no pcns in thc pcn
carriagc).
1
PageA - 18
A.3 PLOTTERS
A.3 PLOTTERS
PageA - 19
Appendix A
Appendix A
loLINE LP 3700 PLOTTER
Suggested configuration:
You should select the lo LP3700 A4, lo LP3700 A3, lo LP3700

A2, lo LP3700 Al and lo LP3700 AO plotter drivers.
9600 - baud
None - parity
8 - data bits
1 - stop bit
Connect your plotter cable to the plotter port marked "HOST or

MODEM"
IBM PC
PLOTTER
cable sheild - -
1
2
2
....__-+~~~~~~~~~~
3
4
El
IBM AT
2
3
PLOTTER
cable sheild - -
~~~~~+-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5
6
~-------7
PageA -20
A.3 PLOTTERS
~
J.t
~ [~
A.3 PLOTTERS
PageA - 21
Appendix A
Appendix A
A.4 DIGITIZERS
WATANABE MPlOOOX-YPLOTTER
PLOTTER
IBM PC
CALCOMP 2200 -MODEL 22120(12"x12")
---------2
y-.l..---------3
IBM PC
1
e~
~ =1
~-------6
7 -------+-----...,----7
8
20.
DIGITISER
1
2
3
2
3
e~
20
[ :.
~J
Power - - 24
Power - - 25
SUGGESTED CONFIGURATION
Switch setting
The DTE/DCE toggle switch (located between the plugs al the back
of the digitizcr) must be switched to the right (i.e. DTE device) .
Corresponding
TurboCAD Setting
~ ~ ~ [;] ~ ~ ~ [;] [;] ~:~

o
You should use the following settings when using the TurboCAD
INSTALL program :
Baud rale -240

-Nohe
Parity
Data Bits -8
Stop Bits -1
9600
Even
7
123456789
-baud
-parity
-data bits
-stop bit
WARNING
Only power up the digititizer once your computcr has bccn booted,
but bcforc running TurboCAD .
The digitizer is set al the factory to transmit ASCII formal data .
You will have to change this to BINARY formal when using it with
TurhoCAD. The digitizer settings are changed using thc digitizer
setup menu al the top of the digitizer and the factory settings appear
as follows (highlights indicate parameters which are set on):
lj.
ft;
PageA -22
A.4 DIGITIZERS
A.3 PLOTTERS
PageA -23
AppendixA
Appendix A
CALCOMP 2200 - MODEL 22180 (12" x 18")

MODE
IN.I
POJNT 1 RUNI TRAC KI HA;
DIGITIZEP
IBM PC
FRAMING 11BAUD,,FORMATjjDATA11 RESOLUTIO

RATE
RATE
METIUC
2
3
2
3
Before running TurboCAD you musl change lhe formal selling as
follows. Aclivale the cursor (or stylus) over the word SETUP on
the digitiser causing the setup LED to flicker. Move the cursor (or
stylus) to over the 2 under FORMAT and activale so that the setup
LED is on. Move the cursor (or stylus) back lo the word SETUP
and activate it thus exiting selup mode and causing the sctup LED
lo stop lashing. The resulting configuralion is as follows:
[ :,
!J
Power - - 24
Powcr - - 25
RESOLUTION
MODE
POINT ouNTRAcKHAL1lPROMP1JMOllSEl1
e~
" I I<
i" i f f' I I .,..
~11
1- 11-rN
METRIC
The DTE/DCE toggle switch (localed between Lhe plugs al the back
of the digitizer) must be switched lo the righl (i.e. DTE device).
You should use lhe following seuings when using Lhe TurboCAD
INSTALL program:
9600
Even
7
baud
parity
data bits
stop bit
WARNING
Only power up the digittzer once your compulcr has been booled,
but before runnng TurboCAD .
The digilizer is set al lhc faclory lo lransmil ASCII formal dala .
You will have lo change this to BINARY formal when usng with
TurboCAD. The dgilizcr sellings are changcd using thc digilizcr
sclup menu al Lhe top of the digitizer and the factory settings appcar
as follows (highlights indicatc parameters which are set on) :
PageA 24
A.4 DIG/TIZERS
A.4 DIGITIZERS
PageA 25
Appendix A
AppendixA
KURTA SERIES ONE (11x8.5 inches)

MODE
FRAMING
Uses the Hardwire handshake.
RESOLUTION
IN.I
METRIC
IBM PC
POJNT 1 RUNI TRACK IHAJ.:
Before running TurboCAD you must change the formal setting as

follows . Actvate the cursor (or stylus) over the word SETUP on
the digitiser causing the setup LED to flicker. Move the cursor (or
stylus) to over the 2 under FORMAT and actvate so that the setup
LED is on. Move the cursor (or stylus) back to the word SETUP
and actvate it thus exiting setup mode and causing the setup LED
to stop flashing . The resulting configuration is as follows:
DIGITISER
e~
[
Note:
20
For the IBM AT you may have to cross over the connections betwccn
pins 2 and 3 on the cable to the computer as follows :
2
'--~+-~~~~~~~~~
3
MODE
POINT IRUN I TRACK IHAL11 PROMPTI MOUSE
Suggested switch . settings (switches found al the back of the

digitiser)
Program
[;] ~ [;] [;J [;] [;] [;] ~::F ~

12
67
[;] [;] ~::F

2
Using the above switch settings results in the following configuration:

9600
Odd
7
Page A - 26
A.4 DIGIT/ZERS
A.4 DIGITIZERS
J.
-baud
-parity
-data bits
-stop bit
PageA -27
Appendx A
Appendx A
SUMMA GRAPHICS 1201 & MM961
NOTE
If lhe digilizer "bombs oul" while using il and lhe cursor slops
moving, move lhe crosshair to over lhe "AUTO" selection al the
top of the digiliser and press lhe <RETURN> Button.
MM data/power
able from
cable
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Puck sellings:
BM
25~
- <RETURN>
Left Bulton
Middle Bullon - <Ese>
Righl Buuon
- <Ctrl-RETURN>
o-
25-pin
female
D conneclor
mal e
D
4-pin male
conneclor to be connected
j
_ ____________y~ ~~e__l!~":'.c:! _s_:ip~Ir ______ _j
Thc internal connections are as follows:
----1
----2
----3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
----7
----9
----12
----13
----15
----18
----24
----25
7
9
-7
e~
15
>---
PageA -28
A.4 DIGIT/ZERS
A.4 DIGITIZERS
PageA -29
Ap_e_endix A
AppendixA
NOTES
SUMMA GRAPHICS MM1812
1. The cable to thc IBM is not provided by the digitizer manufacturer.
IBM PC
2. For the IBM AT you will have to cross over the conncclions
betwecn pins 2 and 3 on lhe cable lo lhe compuler as follows:
2
'---+-------~3
3------~~~~
DIGITIZER
1 ~~~~~~-=-~-===============-=
2~~~~
IL_+-~~~~~
3=======---~~~~-_
~ -----=========- 20
4
20========~~~~~-
The digitiser is factory sel to the following configuration:

9600
Odd
8
PageA -30
-baud
-parity
-data bits
-stop bit
Thc digi ti zcr is factory set to the following configuration:

9600 -baud
ODD -parity
8
-data bits
-stop bit
A.4 DIGIT/ZERS
A.4 DIG/TIZERS
PageA -31
Appendix B
Appendix A
,,,,,,,
;;;;;
,,,,,,
,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,
,,,,,,,
...,
,,,,,,;
,,,,,,
,,,,, ,,,,,,
,,,,, ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,, ,,,,,, ;;;;;;;

,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,, ''' ' ,,,,,,,
,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,, ,;;;;;;;;; ;;;;;;; ,,,,,
B.1 TurboCAD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
number of pcns:
tcx t cntry length:
layers:
numbcr of fonts memory resident:
numbcr of lines in an arrowhead:
numbcr of zoom positions:
numbcr of line types:
numhcr of points in a hatch/measure outlinc:
linc/arc thickncss:
nu mhcr of macros:
Memory rcgistcrs in calculator:
PageA - 32
A.4 DIGITIZERS
B. 1 TurboCAD TECHNICAL SPECIFICA TIONS
16
60
128
8
32
15
100
200
255
27
10
Page B - 1
Appendx B
Appendx 8
B.2 TurboCAD ERROR MESSAGES
INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE ERRORS

1 Missing file
FATAL ERRORS
Problcm:
TurboCAD cannol find a file
240 Overlay file missing

Problem:
TurboCAD cannol find an overlay file
Solution:
Run lhe TurboCAD INSTALL program lo check whelher TCDIR is
the same as the directory where your program files can be found.
If lhis is not the case, check lhat all lhe overlay files TURBOCAD.000 lo TURBOCAD.032 are presenl.
255 Out of memory error

Problcm:
The currcnl drawing cannol fil inlo lhe mcmory availablc.
1.
Solution
lncrcase the availablc mcmory or reduce lhc drawing complexily.
Remcmbcr lhal cerlain programs remain mcmory rcsidcnl, lhus
reducing lhe amounl of mcmory available lo TurboCAD. Use of a
RAM drivc also uses syslcm mcmory. Releasing lhis rnernory lo
lhe syslcm can gain more mcmory for TurboCAD .
r,
Solulion:
This problem occurs on floppy disk syslern whcn a disk is changed
uncxpecled ly.
16 Error in numeric formal

Prohlcm:
TurboCAD cannol read your dala file - your dala file is
corrupt
Solulion:
Check your disk and rcslore your backup
144 Record length mismatch

Prohlcm:
TurboCAD cannol rcad your dala file - your dala file is
corrupl
Solution:
Check your disk and reslore your backup
145 Seek beyond end of file

Prohlcm:
TurboCAD cannol read your dala file - your dala file is
corrupl
Solulion:
Check your disk ami reslorc your backup
153 Unexpected end of file

Problcm:
TurhoCAD cannol read your dala lile - your dala file is
corrupl
Solution:
Check your disk and reslore your backup.
Page 8-2
8.2 TurboCAD ERROR MESSAGES
B.2 TurboCAD ERROR MESSAGES
Page B-3
AppendixC
Appendix 8
240 Disk write error

Prohlem:
TurboCAD cannot write to disk. The disk is probably full.
Solution:
Pul a floppy disk which still has space on it into your floppy disk
drive. Save your drawing on it.
C.1 PROBLEM SOLVINGAND COMMONLY ASKED

QUESTIONS
241 Directory foil error
INSTALLATION
Problem:
TurboCAD canno t write to disk. The disk directory is full.
1. TurboCAD has becn w rittcn and cxtcnsively tcsted and is ccrtified

to work on 100% l lcrc ulcs, CGA, EGA or VGA compatible cquipmcnl. Picase check yo ur equipment before calling customer support.
Solution:
Put a floppy disk which still has space on it into your floppy disk
drive. Save your drawing on it.
242 File index overflow

Prohlem:
TurboCAD tried to write more than 65535 entities to a file
243 Too many files open

Prohlem:
Your computer s ystem was not booted with a DOS disk containing
the corrcct CONFIG.SYS file (creatcd by the INSTALL program) .
Rc-boot with the corrcct DOS disk or rc-install the systcm.
255 File disappeared

Prohlcm:
TurboCAD could not find a file
Solution:
This problem occurs on floppy disk system when a disk is change<l
unexpectedly.
2. Cannot find the corree! printcr driver fo r my printer.

TurboCA D s upports all Epson and IBM c ompat ib le graphics
printcrs. Almos! ali printcrs suppo rt one of thcsc two standards.
Chec k in yo ur printcr manual which of thcsc are supported, and
sclect thc appropriatc d river. A4 or J\3 suffi xes on driver namcs
rc fcr to papcr sizcs. Sclcct A4 for 80-colum n printcrs, and A3 for
widc ca rraige printcrs. I-11 and LO refcr to thc rcsolution of thc
printcr driver. Use LO for draft copy and JU for fina l output.
3. TurboCAD locks up aftcr typing "TC" but bcforc starting any
draw ing. Strnnge Iincs may appcar. Scrcens may ovcrwri lc onc
anothcr.
- TurboCAD has bccn installcd for the incorrcct scrcen typc. An
EGA card is being uscd with lcss than 256K of memory on thc
EGA card.
- An EGA card is bcing uscd wi th a CGA or Mono monitor, or
the video card and scrccn bcing used are o therw isc mixcd.
- TurboCAD has becn writtcn and cxtensivcly tcstcd and is ccrtified to work on 100% 1-lcrcules, CGA, EGA, or VGA compatible
cquipment. Picase check your cquipment before calling customer
support.
4. Cannot install mouse correctly.
TurboCAD has been wri ttcn specifically for the Microsoft com patible mice. If you are using any other type of mouse, then sim ply
sclcct "Keyboard Only" for you input device during the Setup program . Proceed to load your mouse driver normall y al lhe DOS
prompl. TurboCAD will automatically recognize that the mouse is
prcscn l. TurboCAD works with ali Microsoft compatib le micc.
Page 8 - 4
8 .2 TurboCAD ERROR MESSAGES
C. 1 PROBLEM SOL V/NG ANO COMMONL Y ASKED QUESTIONS
Page C - 1
.
AppendixC
OPERATION
1. TurboCAD uses ISO (lnternational Standards Organization) standard paper sizes. Oelow is a list of paper sizcs and the closest corresponding ANSI. (American National Standards lnstitutc) paper
sizes.
AO
Al
A2
A3
A4
1\11 keys (See Kcy Usage) 2-12
Base Poinl 4-7, 6-4

Baud Rale 7-5,7-11
Bill of Malerials 28-15
Break Line 33, 17-7
Bullons 4-1
ANSI
ISO
33" X 46.5"
23" X 33"
16.5" X 23"
11.5" X 16.5"
8" X 11.5"
E
D
e
I3
A
34" X 44"
23" X 33"
17" X 22"
11" X 17"
8.5" X Jl"
2. Cursor Snaps away from reference points, or lines snap to 90

degree angles. Make sure system is not on ORTIIO mode and that
the current !ayer is active.
Anglc 6-18
Anglcs
Change End /\ngle Of Are 17 l

Change Slarl Angle Of Are 17-1
Dcfaull Texl Angle 6-18
Drawing Angle Syslem 3-1
AnglesRad 33, 17-1
Angular Slep in Radial Copy 12-9
Are 3-3
Change 17-1
Flip 17-3
Pen Layer 17-5
Pen colour 17-5
Radius 17-7
Trim radius to point 17-7
Type ncw radius 17-1

Spli1 17-9
Slarl and End Anglcs 17-1, 17-3
Thickncss 17-5
Trim end lo poinl 17-11
Drnw
Ccnlrc & l'oinl 16-3
Double point 16-5
Fillcls 16-6
Radius & Cenare 16-10
Tangcnt to Arr: 16-1
Tangen! 10 1inc 16-8

Triple poinl 16-11
Ernse 4-10
Measure 22-1
Scareh Mode 6-8
Thiekness 6-28
Are Angle l'oint Definilion 3-4
Are Are lntersection
Point Dcfinition 3-4
Are Measure 3-3, 22-1

/\re Tan 16-1, 3-3
/\rcl'ITan FaneyLine 3-3, 19-11
Arra y Copies 12-5
Arrow Dimension 3-3, 18-12
Arrows 6<!3
Dcfaul1 6-23
Draw 3-3
File Exlension 6-24
l lelp 6-23
User Defined 6-24
/\seii files 2813
Au10CAD Conversion 28-11
Auto Zoom (See Zoom)
Page C-2
C. 1 PROBLEM SOL VING ANO COMMONL Y ASKED QUESTIONS
e
CAD Vs. Manual Draugh1ing 2-4
Calculator 2-9, 8-1
Funetions 8-2
Memory Use 3-2, 8-2
Notation 8-2
Centre
Centre &.. point on circumference
ares 16-3
Centre of Radial Copy 12-8
Ccnlre Seareh Mode 6-8
Radius & Cenare ares 16-10
Cenlre&l't 3-3, 16-3
Change 3-3, 17-1
/\res (see /\re) 17-1
Dimensions (see Dimension) 17-13
llatehes (see 1-lateh) 17-!6
Lincs (sce Line) 17-19
Points (sce Point)
Text (see Text) 17 30
Circles
Centre & point 16-3
Radius & Centre 16-10
Tangent to are 16-1
Tangcnt to line 16-8
Closcd Window Mode 6-6
Colour
Drawing Entities (see Pen)
Screen Colours (see Scrcen)
Columns in Array 12-5
Command Reference Section 3-J
<Ctrl-R> Recall Command 3-1, 4-5

<Ese> Escape Command 2-11, 2-22, 3-1
<'4> Memory Command 2-9, 3-1 , 8-1
<RETURN> Entcr Command 2-2, 3-1. 6-12
Search Modcs 3-1, 6-8
Configuration
lnstall 6-12
Pulldown Setup Menu 6- 12
Cursor Type 6-15
Digitiser 6-14
Key Cliek 6-12
MS Mouse 6-16
lndex 1
INDEX
INDEX
Palette Number 6-13
Plotter 6-15
Printer 6-15
Screen Colour 6-12
Control Key 2-11, 4-4

Conventions For Keys l 7
CoordsAbs Point Definition 3-4. 27-5
Copy
Of Drawings 7 22
Of Entities 3-2
Array Copies 12-5
Copy Command 3-2
Linear Copies 12-2
Radial Copies l 2-8
Of Plots 7-6
Of Prints 7-12
Creating Files 2-16
Cursor
Change Cursor Type 3-2, 6-15

Double Cursor 3-2
Drawing Cursor 1-16
Highlighted Oars
PullDown Menus 3-2, 6-1
Screen Menus 1-16
Keys 4-2
Large Cursor 6 -15
Menu Cursor 1-16
Mouse Cursor 6-16
Pulldown Menu Cursor 3-2, 6-1
Small Cursor 6-15
Swap 4-6
Speed 2-24
Underscore Cursor 6-2
Cursor Type 6-15
Text Height 17-13

Text Width 17-13
Draw 17-3, 18-2
Arrow Dimensions 18-2
Horizontl Dimensions 18-3

Parallel Dimensions 18-4
Radius Dimensions 18-5
Vertical Dimensions 18-6

Erase 4-10
Extension Line Suppression 6-26
Label Doesn't Fil Between Arrows 6-27
Position Of Label On Line 6-25
Pulldown Setup Menu 6-21
Arrow Type 6-23
Decimal Places 6-25
Lable Above/On/Below 6-25
Layer 6-21
No Fit 6-27
Pen Colour 6-21
Suppress ExtLn 6-26
Text Font 6-22
Text Height 6-22
Text Width 6-21
Total Digits 6-25
User Defined Arrows 6-23
Dir (See Directory)
Directory
Arrow Files 6-23

Drawing Files 7-27
Font Files 6-22
HPGL Files 7-17
Interface Files 7-19
Plot Files 7-17
Print Files 7-15
Disks
D
Data Bits 7-6, 7-12
dBASE 28-14
Decimal Places 6-25
Delete (See Erase) 2-12
Destination Point
Copy 12-3, 12-5
Move 11-1
Digitiser
Buttons 4- 1
Calibration A-27
6-14
Dig itiser Point Definition 3-4, 27-20
Dimrnsion 17-13, 181
Change l 7 .13
Arrow Type 17-13
Decimal Places 17-14
Lable Above/On/Oelow l 7 14
Layer 17-13
No Fit 17-14
Pen Colour 17-13
Scaling 17-14
Suppress ExtLn 17-14
Text Font 17-13
Di~itiser
lndex 2
Preparing far Storage 1-10

Protecting Program Disks l 9
DoublePt 3-3, 16-5
Drnw
Ares (see Are)
Dimensions (see Dimension)
Hatches (see Hatch)
Lines (see Line)
Points (see Point)
Sketch (see Sketch)
Text (see Text)
Drawing
Copies 7-22
Directory 1-12, 7-27
Erase 7-25
Name 1-13
Plot 7-3
Print 7-9
Rename 7-23
Save 7-22
Screen l -13
Units 3-1
Drawing 7-27
Drop Line FancyLine 3-3, 19-3
DXF File Conversion Utility 28 -11, 28-12, 28-13
E
Ellipse FancyLine 3-3, 19-5
End angle
Change are 17-1
Measure 22 l
EndPt Are Point Definition 3-4, 27-9
Enter Key 2-12
Entities 2-20
Environment 6-4
Oase Point 6-4

Grid Steps 6-4
Ortho Mode 6-6
Pan Distance 6-5
Paper Size 6-6
Rubber Oanding 6-9
Scale 6-6
Search Mode 6-8
Window Mode 6-6
Zoom Magn 6-5
Erase 2-25, 3-2, 3-5
Ares (see Are)
Closed Window Mode 6-6
Dimensions (see Dimension) 4- 10
Drawing 7-25
Hatches (see Hatch)
Key 3-2, 4-10
Last Entity Drawn 4-10
Lines (see Line)
Menu 4-10
Oops to UnErase 4-10
Open Window Mode 6-6
l'oints (see Point)
Text (see Text)
Winduw 4-10
Erase Drawing 2-25, 7 -25
Escape 2-11, 2-22, 4-3
Extcnsio11 Line Supprcssion 6-26
F
rancvLine 19-1
A;cl'tTan 19-1
Drop Line 19-3
Ellipse 19-5
Une2Arcs 19-7
Parnllcl 19-8
plygon 19-10
Rcctangle l 9-11
Tangen! 19-12
File
Arrow Files 6-23
Drnwing Files 7-27
Font Files 6-22
llPGL Files 7-17
lnsert Shape Name 2-12, 4-7
Interface Files 7-16, 28-3
Plot Files 7 -8
Print Files 7-15
Store Shape Name 4-7

Files Pulldown Menu 7 -22
Drawing 7-27
Save 7-22
Rename 7-23
Erase 7-25
Directory 7-27
Fillet 3-3
Flip 3-3
Font 6-19, 6-22
Fonts
Default 6-19
File Extension 6-19
Help 6-19
Function Keys 2-8, 3-2
Fundamental Concepts (See Concepts)
G
Getting Started ll
Conventions Used In This Manual 1-7
Conventions For Keys 2-3
Drawing Screen 1-15
Fundamental Concepts
CAD vs. Manual Draughting 2-4
Coordinate System 2-28
Entities 2-20
Layers 2-81
Panning 2-83
Resolution 2-7
Scale 2-17
Storage 2-6
Zooming 2-83
Getting Out Of Trouble 1-16
Hardware Requirements 1-5
Package Contents l -3
Preparing Disks For Storage 1-10
Protecting Your Disks 1-9
Starting TurboCAD 1-11
Starting Your Computer 1-8
Graphics Print (See Print)
Grid 2-11, 13-1
Key <F9> 131
Grid Steps 6-4
H
Hardware Reqoirements 16
Hatch 20-1 , 3-3
Change 17-16, 3-3
Draw 3-3
Erase 4-10
Search 6-8
Height 6-18, 6-22
Help 2-9, 5-1
<Alt-FI> Help On <Alt> Keys 3-2
<Ctrl-FI> View Help Key 3-2
Pan Distance 5-2
/ndex3
INDEX
Screen Limils 5-2
Zoom Magnification 5-2
Zoom Position 5-2
<F l> Help Key 3-2
Context Specific 3-2
Directory 2-9, 6-19
Keyboard Help 3-2
Setup Menus 6-1
Directory of Files
Arrow Files 6-24
Drawing Files 7-27
Font Files 6-22
HPGL Files 7-17
Interface Files 7-19
Work Drawing 1-14
TurboCAD.HLP 3-2
Hor &. Rad Point Definition 3-4, 27-13
Horizontl Dimension 3-3, 18-3
llPGL Files
Directory 7-17
File Extension 7-17
Plouing (See Plot) 7-3, 7-9
Reading 7-17
Writing 7-20
I
1nput Devices
MS Mouse (see Mousc)
lnsert Shape 2-12, 3-2
Uase Point 4-7
File tbme 4-7
Reference Point 4-8
Rotation 4-8
X & Y Scaling 4-8
lnstall A-1
Ploller Drivers A-2, A-3
Printer Drivers A-2 , A-3
Interface Files 7-19, 28-1

Ares 28-2
Converl ing Autocad Drawings 28-11
Directory 7-19
DXF Files 28-11, 28-12
File Extension 7-17
Formal 28-3
Lines 28-3
Reading 7-16
Writing 7-20
lnterrupt 1-18, 2-22, 4-3
1ntersect Point Definition 3-4, 27-17
J
Justi[y 6-20
lndex4
INDEX
Zoom 4-11
<F7> Move Key 3-2,11-1
<F8> Copy Key 3-2, 12-1
<F9> Grid Key
Function Key 3-2, 13-1
Selling Steps 6-4, 13-1
K
Key Click 6-12
Key Usage 2-8
<+> Zoom In 4-12
<-> Zoom Out 4-13
<0 - 9> Cursor Speed 4-2
<Ah> Alt Key Short Cuis 3-2
<Alt-C> Cursor Type Switch 3--2, 6-15
<Alt-Fl> Help on Alt Keys 3-2
<Alt-1> Free lnteger Memory 3-2
<Alt-K> Key Click Switch 3-2, 6-12
<Alt-0> Ortho Mode Switch 3-2, 6-6
<Alt-Q> Quicktext Switch 3-2, 6-20
<Alt-R> Rubber Banding Switch 3-2, 6-9
<Alt-S> Search Mode Switch 3-2, 6-8
<Alt-W> Window Mode Switch 3-2, 6-6
Alt Keys Affecting Other Entities 3-2
<Alt-D> Set Line Dash Type 3-2, 6-30
<Alt-L> Set Layer 3-2, 6-28
<Alt-P> Set Pen Colour 3-2, 6-28
<Alt-T> Set Thickness 3-2, 6-28
<BackSpace> Zoom Return 3-2, 4-12
<Ctrl-BackSpace> Auto Zoom 4-4, 4-11
<Ctrl-C> Configuration Pulldown Menu 4, 6-12
<Ctrl-D> Dimensions Pulldown Menu 4-4, 6-21
<Ctrl-E> Environment Pulldown Menu 4-4, 6-4
<Ctrl-Fl> View Help Key 5-2
<Ctrl-F> Files Pulldown Menu 4-5, 7-22
<Ctrl-G> Graphics Print Pulldown
Menu 4-5, 7-9
<Ctrl-L> Layers Pulldown Menu 4-4, 6-10
<Ctrl-0> Other Entities Pulldown Menu
4-7, 6-28
<Ctrl-P> Plot Pulldown Menu 4-5, 7-3
<Ctrl-R> 4-4, 4-5
In Pulldown menus 4-5
Read Pulldown Menu 4-5,7 - 16
<Ctrl-RETURN> Repeat Last Command
4-4
<Ctrl-S> Store in Calculator 4-4
<Ctrl-T> Text Pulldown Menu 4-4
<Ctrl-W> Write Pulldown Menu 4-5, 7-20
<Ctrl> The Control Key 4-4
<Del> Erase Key 2-25, 4-10, 7-25
<Down> Cursor Key 4-2
<End> Cursor Key 4-2
<Ese> Gelling Out Of Trouble 2-11, 2-22, 4-3
<FIO> Pan Key 3-2, 14-1
<F l> Help Key 2-9, 3-2, 5-1
<F2> Setup Key 2-9, 3-2, 6-1
<F3> Transfer Key 2-9, 3-2, 7-1
<F4> Calculator Key 2-9, 3-2, 8-1
<f5> Redraw Key 3-2, 9-1
<F6> Window Key 10-1
Copy 12-1
Erase 4-10
Function Key 3-2
Move 11-1
Open and Closed Modes 6-6
Store Shape 4-7
<Home> Cursor Key 4-2
<lns> lnsert Key 4-7

lnsert Shape (See lnscrt Shapc)
Store Shape (See Storc Shapc)
<Left> Cursor Key 4-2
<NumLock> Numeric Kcv Pad/Cursor Modc 4-2
<PgDn> Cursor Key 4-2

<PgUp> Cursor Key 4-2
<RETURN>
Directory 2-12
l'ulldown menus 6-12
<Right> Cursor Key 4-2

<SpaceBar>
Cursor Swap 2-13, 4 -6

Dircctory 2-12, 6-23
Pulldown menus 3-2. 6-l:!
<Up> Cursor Key 4-2

Bullons 4-2
Click 6-12
llelp on Keys 3-2, 5-1
Manual Conventions 1-7, 3-2
Length Of Line 17-19

Line Type 17-23
Meet 2Lns 17-21
Meet Two Lines 17-21
Pen 17-23
PenLayer 17-23
Split Line 17-25
lbickness 17-23
Trim Line 17-28
Trim Line To Line 17-28
Trim Line To Point 17-26
tRimToPt 17-26
Draw 3-3
Erase 4-10
Layer 6-28
Line Type 17-23
Measure 22-2
Peo Colour 17-23
Rubber Oanding 6-9
Seorch Mode 6-8
Thickness 6-28
Line Are lntersection Point Definition 3-4, 27-18
Line Measure 3-3, 22-2

Line Pt Point Definition 3-4, 27 -12
Line Tan 3-3, 16-8
Line Type 17-23
Line2Arcs FancyLine 3-3, 19-7
Linc-ar Copies 12-2
Lotus 28-14
L
Lahlc 6-25
laSt 3-4, 3-5, 4-10
Laycrs 6-10, 6-17, 6-28
Are
Change 17-1
Default 6-28
Concept of Layers 2-81
Dimension
Change 17-3
Dcfault 6-21
llatch
Change 17-16
Ddault 6-28
Linc
Change 17-19
Default 6-28
On & Off 6-10
Pulldown Menu 6-1 O
Rcdraw 6-11
Savcd 6-10
Tcxl
Change 6-17, 17-30

Default 17-30
Length Of Line 3-3, 17-19
Library 4-7
Liccnsc Agrcemcnt 1-12
Linc 17-17. 21 - 1
Changc 17-17
Ureak Linc 17-17
Laycr 17-23
M
Macros 28-5
Aborting Macros 28-8
Autoexec Macros 28-10
Creating Macros 28-5
Dcleting Macros 28-9
Help Screen 28-6
lnterrupting Macros 28-8
Nam ing Macros 28-6
Nesting 28-8
Recursion 28-8
Saving Macros 28-8
Main Menu Summary 3-3

Measure 22-1
Are 22-1
Line 22-2
Outline 22-3
Point 22-5
TwoPoints 22-6
Meet 2Lns 3-3
MidPt Lin Point Definition 3-4
Mouse
Configuration 6-16, A-11
Cursor 6-16
Manufacturer Supplied Software 6-16
MOUSE.SYS 6-16, A-11
lndex 5
INDEX
fNDEX
Movc 2-10, 11-1
lkstination Point 111
Rccrcncc l'oint 11-1
Rotation 11-2
Window 6-6
X Scaling 11 2
Y Scaling 11 2
Move Command 3-2, 111
MS Mouse 3-13, 4-1 , 6-16, i\-11
N
Ncar Scarch Modc 6 -8
Nc;irl'oint Point Oefinition 3-4. 27-4
No fit 6-27
NORMAL.FNT 6-19
,!
.
.
~
fi
1.
I'f!
o
On Are Pt Point Definirion 3-4
Oops to IJnErasc 2-26

Ortllo Mode 6-6
Other Entities Pulldown Mcnu 6-28
Laycr 6-28
Line Type 6-30
l'cn Colour 2-28
Thickness 6-28
Outline Measure 3-3, 223
p
Package Contents 1-5
Palelle Number 6-13
Pan 211, 14-1
Concept o[ Pan 2-83
Pan Distance 6 -5
l'anning 2-83
l'apcr Size 2-16, 6-6
Changing 17 - 1
New Drawing 1-13
l'lotting 6-15
l'arallel Dimcnsion 3-3, 18-4
Parallel FancyLine 3-3, 198
PMily 7-5, 7-12
Pen
Are
Change 17-5
Default 6-28
Dimension
Change 17-3
!)
lndex6
Default 6-21
Hatch
Chango 17-6
Default 6-28
Linc
Chango 17-19
Default 6-28
Text Pen
Chango 6- 17, 17-30
Default 17-30
Vclocity 7.7
Pen Colour 6-17, 6 -21 , 6-28
PenLayer 3-3, 6-17, 6-21, 6-28
Plot Pulldown Menu 7 .3
Baud Rate 7-5
Data Bits 7-6
Directory 7-8
File 7-8
Parity 7.5
Plot to File 7-6
Plot to Port 7 .3
Plotter Port 7-5
Port 7-5
Stop Bits 7 -6
Plot to File 7-8
Plot to Port 7 -3
Plotter
Copies o[ Plots 7 -6
File Extension 7-8
Paper Sizes 6-15
Selection i\2
Plotter 6-15
Plotter Port 7-5
Point 27-1
Draw 3.3
Erase 4-10
Laycr 6-28
Measure 22-5, 22-6
Pen Colour 6-28
Point Definition Menu 3-4
/\re Angle 27. JO
Are Are 27-19
CoordsAbs 27 .5
Digitiser 27-20
EndPt Are 27 9
Hor & Rad 27-13
lntersect 27-17
Line Are 27-18
Line Pt 27-12
MidPt Lin 27-8
NearPoint 27 .4
On Are Pt 27-11
Polar 27 7
Relative 27 -6
ScreenPos 27-3
Ver & Rad 27-14
X & Angle 27-15
X Lin Lin 27-17
Y & Angle 27-16
Point Measure 225, 22-6
Polar Point Definition 3-4
pOlygon FancyLine 3-3, 19-10
Position of
Dimension Label 17-14

Text Justification 6-20
Print 7-1 5
Print to File 7-15
Print to Port 7.13
Print Pulldown Menu 7-9
Baud Rate 7-11
Copies o[ Plots 7 -12
Data Bits 7-12
Directory 7-15
File 7- 15
File Extension 7-15
Parity 7-12
Port 7- ll
Print to File 7 -12
Print to Port 7 .9
Printer Port 7-11
Scans 7 -11
Selection 615, A2
Stop Bits 7-12
Printer Selection 6-15, A-2
Printer to File 7-12
Printer to Port 7 -9
Protecting Your Program Disks 1-9
Pulldown menos
Configuration 6-12
Dimensions 6 -21
Read Directory 7-19

Read Filename 7-17
Read HPGL File 7-17
Read Interface File 7-16
Read Pulldown Menu 7- 16
READ.ME File 14
Rectangle
Rectangle FancyLine 3-3, 19-11
Rubber Banding 6-9
Redraw 2-10, 9-1
A fter Switching Layers 6 -11 , 9- 1
Command 2-10, 9-1
Opti misation 9 -2
Q uick Text 6-20
Reference Point
Copy 122, 12-5, 12-8

lnsert S hape 4-8
Move 11-1
S tore Shape 4-8
Relative Point Definition 3-4, 27 -5
Re name Drawing 7 23
Repeat Last Command 44
Repetitions
A rray Copy Rows 8t Columns 125
Copy 12-4, 129
Last Command 4.4
Resolution 2-7
Rotate in Radial Copy 12-8
Environment 6 -4
Rotat ion
Files 7-22
Graphics Print 7 .9
Layers 6 -10
O ther Entities 6-28
Plot 7 .3
Read 7 -1 6
Setup 6-l
Te xt 6- 17
Write 7 -20
Copy 123, 129

l nse rt Shape 4-8
Move 112
Rows in Array 125
Rubber Banding 6-9
Q
Quick Text 6-20
Quit 2-23, 261
R
Rad Tri m 3-3, 17 l
RadCentre 3-3
Rad ial Copies 12-8
Rad ius
Centre and radius ares 16-10
Change are radius 17-1
Dimension 3 -3
Trim are radius to point 17 7

Rad ius Dimension 3-3, 185
s
Save Drawing 2 -22
Scale 2 17, 6-6
C hanging 6-6
Concept o[ Scale 2-17
New Drawing 2-1 7
Real World 3-1
S cale 6-6
Sca ling
Copy 12-3, 12-6
lnsert Shape 4-8
Move 112
S tore Shape 4-7
Screen
Colour
Entities on Screen 6-12
Palelle 6-13
C ursors (see Cursor)
Drawing Screen 2-17
Layout 2-17
Resolution 2 7
lndex 7
INDEX
INDEX
Screen Limits 5-2
Status Area (see Status)
ScreenPos Point Derinition 3-4, 27 -3
Search Mode 6-8
Semi circles 16-5
Setup 2-9, 6-1
Configuration 6-12
Dimensions 6-21
Environment 64
Layers 6-10
Other Entities 6-28
'.fext 6-17
Shapes 4-7
Short Cuts
For Changing Setup Options 3-2
For Multiple Zooms 9-1
For Pulldown Menus 3-2
Sketch 2-30, 24-1
Space Bar 2-13
Split 3-3
Are 17-9
Line 17-25
Spool
Plots 7-6
Prints 7-12
Start angle
Change are 17-1
Measure 22- 1
Starting
Starting TurboCAD 1-9, 2-14
Status Area 1-7
Stop Bits 7-6, 7-12
Storage on Disks 2-6
Store Shape 4-7
Base Point 4-7
File Name 4-7
Paper Size 4-7
Scale 4-8
Suppress Extln 6-26
T
Tangent FaneyLine 3-3, 19-12
Tangents
Are to are 16-1
Are to 1ine 16-8
Line to Are 19-12
Line to Two Ares 19-7
Perpendicular 10 Une 19-3
Point lo Are 19-1
Tcxl 25-1
Change 16-17, 17-30
Draw 3-3, 25-1
Erase 4-10
Pulldown Setup Menu 6-17
Angle 6-18
Font 6-19
Fonls (see Fonts)
Height 6-18
Help 6-18
Jndex8
Justify 6-20
Layer 6-17
Pen Colour 6-17
QuiekText 6-20
Width 6-17
User Defined Fonts 6-19
Thickness
Are
Change 17-5
Default 6-28
Line
Change 17-23
Default 6-28
Thickness 6-28
Three point ares 16-11
Toggling 6-2
Total Digits 6-25
Transfer 2-9, 3-2, 7-1
Files 7-22
Graphics Print 7-9
Plot 7-3
Read 7-16
Write 7-20
Trim
Are end to point 17-11
Are radius to point 17-7
Line to line 17-28
Line to point 17-26
Trim Line 3-3
tRimToPt 3-3
TrimToPt 3-3
Triple Pt 3-3, 16-7, 16-11
Two point ares 16,5
TwoPoints Measure 3-3, 22-6
u
UnErase 4-10
User Defined Arrowheads 6-23
User Defined Text Fonts 6-19
V
Velocity lo Plol 7-7
Ver & Rad Poinl Definition 3-4, 27-14
Vertical Dimension 3-3, 18-6
Ventura Publisher 28-13
lnsen 4-7
Move 6-6
Zoom 4-11
Pulldown Menus (see Pulldown)
Window Change Menu Summary 3-6
Word Processors 28-13
Work Directory 2-14, 7-21
Work Drawing 2-15
Wrile Filename 7-21
Write 7-20
Wrile Interface File 7-20
X
X & Angle Poinl Definition 3-4, 27-15
X & Y Orid Steps 6-4
X Lin Lin lntersection Poinl Definition 3-4, 27-17
X Scaling
Copy 12-3, 12-6
lnsert Shape 4-8
Move 11 -2
y
Y & Angle Poinl Definition 3-4
Y Scaling
Copy 12-3, 12-6
lnsert Shape 4-8
Move 11-2
z
Zoom 2-13
Auto Zoom 4-4
Concepl of Zoom 2-83
Enlarge 4-12
Extents 4-11
Fill Screen With Drawing 4-12
In 3-2
Out 3-2
Position 4-12
Reduce 4-11
Return 4-12
To Paper Size 4-12
Zoom Mago 6-5
Zoom Magnification 6-5
Width 7-16
Windows 2-10, 10-1
<F6> Functions 3-2, 10-1
Change 10-1
Copy 12-1
Delete 4-10
/ndex 9
Program Licence Agreement

IMPORTANT NOTICE: USING THIS PACKAGE INDICATES YOUR
ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS ANO CONOITIONS. IF YOU DO
NOT AGREE WITH THEM, YOU SHOULO PROMPTLY RETURN
THE PACKAGE; YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDEO.
Artlcle 1: Llcense Grant. lnternational Microcomputer Software, lnc.
(IMSI) grants to you a license:
1. To use the program on a single machine
2.
To make archiva( back-up copies of the program in support of your use

of the single program on a single machine.
3. To modify .the program and/or merge it into anothcr program for use
on a single machine.
4. To transfer the program to another party if thal party agrees to accept
the terms and conditions of this Agreement, and you do not retain any
copies of the program, whether in printed, machine-readable, modificd
or merged form . Except as expressly provided for in this license, you
may not copy, modify, or transfer this program.
Article 2: Term. The license is effective until terminated. You may tcrminatc
it al any time by destroying the program together with ali copies ,
modifications and mergcd portions in any form . lt will also terminate upon
conditions set forth elsewhere in this Agreement. You agree, upon such
termination, to dcstroy the program togcther with ali copies, modifications,
and mcrgcd portions in any form.
Article J: Disclalmcr of Warranties and Limltallons of Remedies.
l.
IMSI software is sold and liccnsed "as is." Ali warrantics, cithcr
cxpressed or implied, are disclaimed as to the software and its quality,
performance, or fitness for any particular purpose. You, the consumcr,
bear the entire risk relating to the quality and performance of thc
software. In no evcnt will IMSI be Hable for direet, indirect, incidental,
or conscqucntial damages rcsulting from any defcet in the software. lf
thc software proves to have dcfects, you, and not IMSI, assume the
cost of any necessary servicing or rcpair.
2. Thirty-day limited warranty on disks. IMSI warrants the enclosed disks

to be free of defects in material and workmanship undcr normal use
for 30 days after purchase.
During thc 30-day period, you may return a defectivc disk to an
Authorized IMSI Dealer, and it will be replaced without charge, unless
the disk is damaged by accident or misuse. Replacement of a disk is
your sole remedy in the event of a dcfect. This warranty gives you
specific legal rights, and you may also havc other rights which vary
from state to slate.
l
1
l
4
Sorne states do nol allow the exclusion or limitation of implied

warranties of liability for incidental or consequential damages, so the
above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
t1
Artlcle 4: General. You may not sublicensc, assign, or transfcr the license
or the program exccpt as expressly providcd in this Agreemcnt. Any attempt
otherwise to sublicense, assign, or transfer any of the rights, duties, or
obligations hcrcunder is void. This Agrcemcnt will be govemed by thc laws
of the State of California.
3.

Turbo CAD

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Turbo CAD

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Breakthrough CAD Software

Are you a new'generation CAD user or potential user??

TurboCAD Is For You.

TurboCAD Makes Drawing Easy.

drawing with speed. Use linear, array or radial

TurboCAD Gives You Flexibility.

"Best pricelpeiformonce of any CAD fHJCkage

Unlike other CAD packages, TurboCAD uses

TurboCAD Gives You Power.

Context Sensitive HELP

TurboC AD 1s a rcg1stercd tradcmarlc of Pink Soft lntemauonal

(415 14.14 710!

Chapter 1 - Getting Started

Chapter 2- The TurboCAD Tutorial

Chapter 3 - Command Summary

Chapter 4 - Command Keys

Chapter 5 - The Help Facility

Configuration Pulldown Menu

Plot Pulldown Menu . . . .

Chapter 8 - The Calculator

Chapter 9 - Redrawing The Se re en

Chapter 13 - The Grid . . .

Chapter 15 The TurboCAD Menus

Chapter 17 - The Change Command

Chapter 7 - Transfer Utilities

Change - Are - Anglesrad

17.8 Change - Batch . . . . .

Chaptcr 18 - Dimcnsion Commands

Chaptcr 19 - Fancyline Command

Chapter 20 - The Hatch Command

Chapter 21 - The Line Command .

Chapter 22 - The Measure Command

Chapter 23 - The Point Command

Chapter 24 - The Sketch Command

Chapter 25 - The Text Command

Chapter 26 - The Quit Command

Chapter 27 - Point Definition Menu

Chapter 28 - Advanced Topics

8.1 Turbocad Technical Specifications

: : ,: , , , :':':' ,, , ,,,: ,,,. , , , :':': ,, ,., , ., ,. , , , ., , , , ,

,,,,,:, "" ':''''

Problem Solving and Common Questions

, , , , ::}'/\'' :':\':\: ,,, , \\ , '"'"' {:. :::>('.: '' 1

''"' ">l :?A :'];

1 { 1-.~ FJi >:' :'.::.>:...\>.,

::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ::::::: :::::;;:::::::: :::::::::::::: ::::::: ;:::.:::::::. :::::::::::::

1.2 WHAT'S NEW

1.2 WHA T'S NEW

1.3 PACKAGE CONTENTS

Systcm Disk - slarts TurboCAD and contains the following:

7. USING OLD VERSION DRAWINGS

2. TurboCAD program manual

4. IMSI registration card

10. VGA SUPPORT

A> TYl'E READ.ME <RETURN>

1.3 PACKAGE CONTENTS

1.5 CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL

1.4 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

This manual uses bo ld face characters enclosed in angular brackets

TurboCAD requires the following mnimum configuration:

- Al least 512K of memory

- A hard drive with a minimu m of one megabyte of space free

The kcys o n the cursor kcypad al thc ri ght h<ind sidc: